Home

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer

1. Paper type Weight g m Remarks Labels Inkjet printer paper cannot be used Covers 106 163 Covers Thick 164 216 Envelope Coated 106 163 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used Coated Thick 164 216 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used Letterhead Preprinted 64 Prepunched 64 Color 64 272 l Print Media Guidelines Loading Print Media Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble free printing Before loading any print media identify the recommended print side of the print media This information is usually indicated on the print media package Capacity The standard 250 sheet tray and optional 250 sheet feeder can hold e 250 sheets of the standard paper The SSF can hold e 1 sheet of the standard paper Print Media Dimensions The maximum dimensions of print media that the standard 250 sheet tray optional 250 sheet feeder and SSF can handle are e Width 76 2 mm 3 00 inches to 215 9 mm 8 5 inches Length 127 mm 5 00 inches to 355 6 mm 14 00 inches Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder K NOTE To avoid paper jams do not remove the tray while printing is in progress K NOTE Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper in the printer 1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the tray with both hands and remove it from the printer Loading Print
2. Copy Color Yellow Low Displays the color balance level of low density Balance Dens yellow Yellow Medium Displays the color balance level of medium Dens density yellow Yellow High Displays the color balance level of high density Dens yellow Magenta Low Displays the color balance level of low density Dens magenta Magenta Displays the color balance level of medium Medium Dens density magenta Magenta High Displays the color balance level of high density Dens magenta Cyan Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density cyan Cyan Medium Displays the color balance level of medium Dens density cyan Cyan High Dens Displays the color balance level of high density cyan Black Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density black Black Medium Displays the color balance level of medium Dens density black Black High Dens Displays the color balance level of high density black Copy Settings 2 Sided Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Multiple Up Displays whether the Multiple Up feature is enabled Margin Displays the value of the top and bottom Top Bottom margins Margin Displays the value of the left and right margins Left Right Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin 186 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission Lighter Darker Displays
3. Lighter Darker Lighter 3 Makes the scanned image lighter than the Lighter 2 original Works well with dark print Lighter 1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darker 1 Makes the scanned image darker than the Darker 2 original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker 3 Sharpness Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original Normal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original Contrast High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original Medium Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original Auto Exposure On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy off Does not suppress the background Auto Expo Level Normal Sets the background suppression level to Normal Higher 1 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 1 Higher 2 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 2 Margin Top Bottom 0 50 mm Sets the value of the top and bottom margins 0 0 2 0 inch 2mm 0 1 inch Understanding the Tool Box Menus 455 Margin Left Right 0 50 mm Sets the value of the left and right margins 0 0 2 0 inch
4. Copy Printer Settings Set Password LDAP Server LDAP User Mapping SSL TLS IPsec 802 1x IP Filter IPv4 Print Volume LDAP User Mapping Refiesh Address Book LDAP User Mapping Printer Information z Common Name Tray Settings Surname an gt Given Name givenname E Mail Alert Email Address mail Set Password n Fax Phone facsimile Telephone Number Online Help Apply New Senings Restore Settings Order Supplies at www dell com supplies Contact Dell Support at support dell com ag I 2 B internet 1 Refresh Button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame 2 Apply New Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Settings Button Web Tool to the printer The new settings replace the old settings of the printer 3 Restore Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were Settings Button made New settings will not be submitted to the printer Changing the Settings of the Menu Items Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool When you access these menus the authentication window appears on the screen Type a user name and password for the printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box 172 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool The default user name is admin and the default
5. O Pattern 3 TUU Lo o Y Pattern 4 es rs oe Pattern 5 E Doo f Pattern 6 UUL TUUL THL ratem LIL ITLL Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service For example Pattern 7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern rings for 400 ms stops for 800 ms rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms This pattern is repeated over and over again This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence s DA4 in New Zealand 496 Understanding the Printer Menus Duplex Print K NOTE Duplex Print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer To set the duplex printing for fax Values off Does not perform duplex printing On Performs duplex printing Sent Fax Fwd Purpose To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination Values off Does not forward incoming faxes Forward Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer Print and Forward Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination Fax Fwd Number Purpose To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Prefix Dial Purpose To select whether to set a prefix dial number Values off Does not set a prefix dial number On Sets a prefix dial number Understanding the Printer Menus 497
6. Higher 2 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 2 Color Balance Purpose To specify the default color balance level within the range of 3 to 3 Values Yellow Low Dens 0 Sets the color balance level of low density yellow 3 to 3 Yellow Med Dens 0 Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow 3 to 3 Yellow High Dens o Sets the color balance level of high density yellow 3 to 3 Magen Low Dens o Sets the color balance level of low density magenta 3 to 3 Magen Med Dens 0 Sets the color balance level of medium density 3 to 3 magenta Magen High Dens o Sets the color balance level of high density magenta 3 to 3 Cyan Low Dens 0 Sets the color balance level of low density cyan 3 to 3 Cyan Med Dens o Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan 3 to 3 Cyan High Dens o Sets the color balance level of high density cyan 3 to 3 Black Low Dens o Sets the color balance level of low density black 3 to 3 Black Med Dens 0 Sets the color balance level of medium density black 3 to 3 Understanding the Printer Menus 523 Black High Dens o Sets the color balance level of high density black 3 to 3 Scan Defaults To modify the SCAN menu defaults Scan Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the SCAN menu Color Purpose To specify whether to print in colo
7. Scan To PC LLTD Wireless LAN Reset Print Server Security Set Password LDAP Server LDAP User Mapping SSL TLS IPsec 802 1x 3 IP Filter IPv4 Copy Printer Settings Copy Printer Settings Copy Printer Settings Copy Printer Settings Report Print Volume Print Volume Print Volume Dell ColorTrack Address Book E Mail Address E Mail Address Top Page E Mail Group Top Page Default Setup Server Address Server Address Top Page Phone Book FAX Speed Dial Top Page FAX Group Top Page Tray Settings Tray Settings Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool l 175 l This item is available only when RAM disk is enabled 2 This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network 3 This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable Printer Status Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables hardware and specifications of the printer The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu Printer Status Purpose To check the status of the consumables trays and covers Values Cyan Cartridge Level OK Magenta Cartridge Level Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon Yellow Cartridge Level
8. Ensure the 250 sheet feeder is correctly installed on the printer Re install the feeder See Removing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder and Installing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Ensure the print media is loaded correctly See Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder for more information Memory module Ensure the memory module is securely connected to the memory connector Wireless printer adapter e Ensure the wireless printer adapter is securely inserted to the correct slot Troubleshooting Guide 727 Scanner Driver Printer Utility Problems Problem Action Unable to retrieve the Address Book data from the printer on the Address Book Editor Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly Ensure that the power of your printer is on Ensure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the scanner driver when the printer is connected using a USB cable The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the printer Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly Ifusing the network connection check that IP address of the printer is set correctly To check the IP address see Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver Check whether the printer is on If the printer is on reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again If a sca
9. Max Email Size Purpose To specify the maximum size of e mail that can be sent Values 2048 KB Sets the maximum size of e mail that can be sent in increments of 1 50 16384 Fax Defaults Purpose Understanding the Printer Menus 525 To modify the Fax menu defaults See Fax Menu for more details Print from USB Defaults To modify the defaults for the Print from USB Defaults menu Print from USB Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Print from USB menu Color Purpose To specify whether to print in black and white or in color Values Black amp White Prints in black and white Color Prints in color Tray Settings Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray and the optional 250 sheet feeder V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Tray 1 Purpose To specify the paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Values 526 Understanding the Printer Menus Paper Size mm series inch series A4 AS B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env Monarch Env L DL Env DL Env L C5 Env Custom Size Letter Folio Legal A4 AS B5 Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env Monarch Env L DL
10. Tone Uses tone dialing Pulse 10PPS Sets DP 10PPS Dial Pulse 10 Pulse Per Second as the dial type Pulse 20PPS Sets DP 20PPS Dial Pulse 20 Pulse Per Second as the dial type 492 Understanding the Printer Menus Resend Delay Purpose To specify the interval between re send attempts Values 8 Sets the interval in increments of 1 second 3 255 Redial Attempts Purpose To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 13 If you enter 0 the printer will not redial Values 3 Sets the number of redial attempts in increments of 1 0 13 Redial Delay Purpose To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes Values 1 Sets the interval in increments of 1 minute 1 15 Junk Fax Setup Purpose To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book Values off Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers Understanding the Printer Menus 493 On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers Remote Receive Purpose To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone Values Off Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone On Receives a fax by pressing a remot
11. Check to see if the display shows Memory Full If the time interval specified for the following features is too long change the time interval shorter such as 30 seconds e Auto Rec Fax Auto Rec TEL FAX Auto Rec Ans FAX Diagnose the FAX connection See Diagnosing the Fax Connection The printer does not send faxes Sending should show up on the display Check the other fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse Ensure that the document is loaded in the ADF or on the document feeder glass Diagnose the FAX connection See Diagnosing the Fax Connection The incoming fax has blank spaces or is received in poor quality Check your printer by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the Toner Cartridges A noisy phone line can cause line errors Set the fax modem speed to a slower speed The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam Troubleshooting Guide 721 There are lines on the documents you send Check your scan glass for marks and clean it See Cleaning the Scanner The printer dials a number but the connection with another fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of pape
12. 3 Press or w button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the y Set button Standard Used for documents with normal sized characters Faxing 391 Fine Used for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Used for documents containing extremely fine detail The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution See the note below Photo Used for documents containing photographic images Denotes the factory default setting K NOTE Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device Adjusting the Document Contrast You can adjust the contrast of the fax document to be lighter or darker than the original 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document 2 Press the amp Fax button Press button until Lighter Darker is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press or gt button to move for adjusting the darkness level and then press the vA Set button Lighter3 Works well with dark print Lighter2 Lighter1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents
13. 65 Installing the Wireless Adapter Using Video Instructions Recommended 65 Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter 66 Printing System Settings Report 67 Determining the Wireless Network Settings 68 Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter 69 Using Wizard Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter 70 Using Advanced Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter 72 Constructing a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer ort darei fa eee Eee ee SS 79 N Contents 7 Connecting Your Printer 91 Connecting Printer to Computer or Network 92 Direct Connection 92 Network Connection 94 Connecting the Telephone Line 94 Turning onthe Printer 2 2 002 97 Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel 97 8 Setting the IP Address 103 Assigning an IP Address 2 2 0 103 When Using the Easy Setup Navigator 103 When Using the Operator Panel 104 When Using the Tool Box 2 2 105 Verifying the IP Settings 202 106 Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report 106 Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command 107 9 Loading Paper 109 10 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 113 Identifying Printer Driver Pre install Status 113 When Using the Operator Panel 113 When Using the Tool Box
14. DRS Dasmi Tat ten Btn Ponent Qe ee ted MEP ates Damai Paor To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book 2 Server Select FTP if you store document on a FTP server 362 Type Select SMB if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer Scanning 3 Server Enter a FTP server name that you have shared out or a server name or IP Address address of your computer e For FTP Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address 192 168 1 100 e For SMB Server name myhost IP address 192 168 1 100 4 Share Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer For SMB Name only 5 Server Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be Path stored Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server 6 Server Enter the Server Port Number If you are unsure you can enter the Port default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for SMB Number Available ports are FTP 21 5000 65535 SMB 139 445 5000 65535 7 Login Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your Name computer or to a FTP server e For FTP Contact the system administrator e For SMB Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1 8 Login Enter the pass
15. For information on the country setting see Setting Your Country Fax Header Name Specifies the sender s name to be printed on the header of faxes Fax Number Specifies the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of faxes This feature is available when you set Fax Header to On The number specified in Fax Number is used in the printer ID Fax Cover Page You can set whether to attach a cover page to faxes when sending faxes DRPD Pattern Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Duplex Print 384 Faxing You can set whether to make duplex print when you print faxes Select Of f to print faxes on one side of a sheet of paper Select On to print faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper Option Description Sent Fax Fwd You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number When a fax arrives at your printer it is stored in the memory Then the printer dials the fax number that you have specified and sends the fax Select Of f not to forward incoming faxes Select Forward to forward incoming faxes without printing If an error occurs during forwarding a rece
16. Authentication error has occurred The account is not registered Pleas contact the system administrator 016 757 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact your system administrator Troubleshooting Guide Problem Action Function unavailable It is a function that cannot be used Pleas contact the system administrator 016 758 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact your system administrator Printable page limit reached Printable page limit reached cannot print Please contact the system administrator 016 759 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact your system administrator Multifunction printer error Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridg Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel Replace the PHD unit Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 919 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact Customer Support Multifunction printer error Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridg Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel Replace the PHD unit Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 920 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact Customer Support Troubleshooting Guide 731 Problem Action Multifunction Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the printer error Check operator panel phe RHD
17. Dell ScanCenter The Dell ScanCenter button opens the Dell ScanCenter which is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without running the PaperPort program first For more information about using Dell ScanCenter refer to Dell ScanCenter or PaperPort s Help menu 560 Understanding Your Printer Software Address Books There are several address books available for Scan and Fax services Address books help you organize contact information such as e mail addresses fax numbers and server information and quickly choose the recipient or locate the address The address book data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server K NOTE Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section K NOTE For information on how to setup the LDAP server see LDAP Server and LDAP User Mapping For information on the LDAP Address Books see Server Address Book and Server Phone Book Types of Address Books E mail Address Book for Scan to E mail E mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e mail Email Group for Scan to E mail Groups of e mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e mail LDAP Server Address Book for Scan to E mail E mail addresses registered in the address book data through the LDAP server for sending the scanned document via e mail Network Address Book for
18. Installing Optional Accessories Wireless Network Connection Status PR General Suppor Connection status Address Type Automatic Private Address am IP Address 169 254 209 169 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click pair 3 Set the IP address on the printer a Press the Menu button b Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Set button c Press S button until Admin menu is highlighted and then press the vA Set button d Press w button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button e Press w button until TCP IP is highlighted and then press the Set button f Press w button until IPv4 is highlighted and then press the Y Set button g Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted and then press the va Set button h Press button until Panel is highlighted and then press the vA Set button i Press button until TP Address is highlighted and then press the vA Set button j Manually enter the IP address using the numeric keypad A W and gt button on the operator panel and then press the va Set button 4 Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser Installing Optional Accessories 87 F https 8 2 pet Moe Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address httpst DAs Mfr Microsoft Internet Exp
19. K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client Setup Overview Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client 1 Install the printer driver 2 Set up the print queue 3 Specify the default queue 4 Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver NOTICE Before you install the printer driver on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 confirm that Update 5 or higher is applied to your operating system Consult your Linux distributor for the upgrade of your system 1 Double click Dell 2155 Color MFP x x x i686 rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD 2 Type the administrator s password 3 Click Continue in the Completed System Preparation window Installation starts When the installation is complete the window is automatically closed Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 147 Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 2 3 4 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Type root as the user name and type the administrator password Click Add Printer Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add New Printer window and click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information For network connections a Select LPD LPR
20. Press the Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Color Reg Adjust is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until Enter Number is highlighted and then press the vA Set button l Maintaining Your Printer 10 11 12 Ensure that LY is highlighted and press 4My or 4 button to specify the values Press gt button to move the highlight to the next value Press the V Set button RY is highlighted Repeat steps 7 to 9 to enter the desired values and then press the vA Set button K NOTE You can specify each value for process left and right colors LY LM LC RY RM RC PY PM and PC by repeating the steps 7 to 9 Press a to highlight Color Reg Chart and then press the y Set button Press y button to highlight Yes and then press the y Set button The color registration chart with the new values is printed If the straightest line is not at the value of 0 adjust the values again Checking the charts before and after the adjustments will help you to determine the values to enter When Using the Tool Box Y NOTE Using the Tool Box enter the values that you found in the color registration ch
21. Understanding the Tool Box Menus 439 Time Zone Sets the time zone Set Date Sets the date Set Time Sets the time You can select AM or PM when Time Format is set to 12H Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new Click this button to restart the printer and apply the settings changes Paper Density Purpose To specify the paper density settings Values Plain Light Sets plain paper density Normal Label Light Sets label paper density Normal Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new Click this button to restart the printer and apply the settings changes Color Registration Adjustment Purpose To set Color Registration Adjustment individual yellow magenta cyan correction settings When Auto Registration Adjustment is set to On the printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration by using the chart Color registration adjustments need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different location Values 440 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Auto Auto Registration Off Does not perform color Registration Adjustment registration automatically Adjustment On Performs color registration automatically Manual A
22. 64 40 bit key 128 104 bit key WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK AES IEEE 802 1x attestation function of WPA 1x non corresponds Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Push Button Configuration PBC Personal Identification Number PIN K NOTE When the wireless adapter is installed you cannot use IEEE 802 1x authentication and or the Ethernet port for a wired connection 64 Installing Optional Accessories Verifying the Contents of the Box DAL Installing the Optional Pin e e Wireless Adapter sad Dell Wireless Adapter K NOTE To complete wireless installation you require the corresponding Drivers and Utilities CD that comes with your printer which can also be downloaded from support dell com Installing the Wireless Adapter Using Video Instructions Recommended To install the Dell wireless adapter perform the following method 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in your computer The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically 2 Select Optional Accessories Setup on the Easy Setup Navigator window Installing Optional Accessories 65 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Language Welcome English Easy Setup Advance Setup advance roots 17273 Guidea Setup Step by step instructions to set More Information up your printer PVR C Optional Accessories Setup f O software Installation U
23. 673 A CAUTION The fuser is hot Do not touch it doing so may cause burns 5 Open the cover of the fuser and remove the jammed paper 6 Close the cover of the fuser and press down the levers at both ends of the fuser 674 Clearing Jams 7 Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer and then close the belt unit 4 8 Close the front cover Clearing Jams 675 Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the side button to open the front cover 2 Open the cover of the duplexer 3 Remove the jammed paper from the duplexer 676 Clearing Jams 4 Close the cover of the duplexer 5 Close the front cover Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Pull the optional 250 sheet feeder out of the printer carefully Hold the feeder with both hands and remove it from the printer Clearing Jams 677 K NOTE Paper in the optional 250 sheet feeder feeds to the printer from the front of the standard 250 sheet tray therefore paper jammed in the standard 250 sheet tray can block the optional 250 sheet feeder in the printer preventing you from opening it Look for the jammed paper sequentially starting wit
24. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 gt h amp _ 4 Select printing options as required K NOTE You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user may not be printed properly PDF Port Direct Printing You can directly print PDF files in a computer by specifying LPR command Windows lpr S server _ address P lp o PDF filename The PDF file sent is printed in accordance with the printer settings set in the printer You can however change the PDF settings from the operator panel of the printer The following PDF settings can be changed Quantity e 2Sided e Print Mode PDF Password e Collated Printing 301 e Output Size e Layout e Output Color K NOTE You should change the settings before the job starts K NOTE You can directly print PDF files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user may not be printed properly Printing a Report Page By using the Reports menu you can print a variety of settings for your printer including system settings panel setting and font list The following sections describe two examples of printing from the Reports menu e Printing System Settings Report e Printing Font Sample List Printing System Settings Report To verify detailed printer settings print a system settings repo
25. All Tones 181 196 Altitude 607 Answer Machine Fax 205 Appendix 739 Apply New Settings 172 Asset Tag Number 162 178 Assigning IP address 103 Audio Tone 435 Authenticate Error Trap 234 Auto 431 Auto Clear Alert 436 Auto Clear Alert Tone 181 196 423 Auto Correct 211 441 Auto Expo Level 428 430 451 455 Auto Exposure 185 190 202 208 428 430 451 455 540 547 Auto Exposure Level 185 190 202 208 Auto IP 487 Auto Log Print 181 196 424 437 506 Auto Rec Ans Fax 431 460 491 Auto Rec Fax 431 460 490 Auto Rec Fax Tel 431 460 Auto Rec Tel Fax 491 744 Index Auto Receive Answer Fax 188 205 Auto Receive Fax 188 205 Auto Receive Tel Fax 188 205 Auto Reg Adjust 515 Auto Registration Adjustment 192 211 425 441 Auto Reset 180 195 422 434 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 40 41 660 Avoiding jam 291 659 B B amp W Color LED 286 B5 270 Banner Sheet 437 Banner Sheet Insert Position 182 196 424 Banner Sheet Specify Tray 182 196 424 Base memory 605 Base Tone 181 196 423 436 Basic Information 222 Basic printer problem 685 Belt unit 41 Bitmapped font 583 Black amp White Button 190 208 Blue plug 41 95 Bonjour mDNS 219 223 BOOTP 487 C C5 270 Cable 607 Canceling a print job 292 Canceling print job From your computer 293 Carbonless copy paper 263 CCP 263 Certificate Details 241 242
26. Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID E Mail Address Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the e mail address entries on the E Mail Address page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the E mail Address top page Values ID Displays the selected user ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID or enter a name for the new entry Address Allows you to view or edit the e mail address of the user or enter an e mail address for the new entry Delete Click this button to delete the selected user Apply New Click this button to apply the new settings Settings Restore Click this button to restore the previous settings Settings Back Click this button to return to the top page l This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button E Mail Address Delete Purpose To delete the e mail address entries registered on the E Mail Address page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the E mail Address top page Values ID Displays the selected user ID 250 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID Address Displays the e mail address of the
27. D LL Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Welcome Pua English Easy Setup Advance Setup Step by step instructions to set More Information up your printer 12 3 Guided setup Optional Accessories Setup O software Installation Users Guide v Install print driver and supporting software Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Click IP Configuration Follow the instructions displayed on the screen When Using the Operator Panel For more information on using the operator panel see Operator Panel 1 2 3 104 Turn on the printer Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until Network is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until TCP IP is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until IPv4 is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press g button until Panel is highlighted and then press the V Set button Setting the IP Address 10 Press the M Back button 11 Press g button until IP Address is highlighted and then press the va Set button The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address 12 Use the ten keys to enter t
28. Electronic Support Service mobile _support us dell com support us dell com la techsupport dell com Latin America and Caribbean countries only apsupport dell com Asian Pacific countries only support jp dell com Japan only support euro dell com Europe only Electronic Quote Service apmarketing dell com Asian Pacific countries only sales_canada dell com Canada only Appendix 741 742 Appendix Index Symbols All Clear button 286 Back button 287 Backspace button 286 Cancel button 286 Color Mode button 286 Contacts button 286 Copy button 285 Fax button 285 Menu button 287 Redial Pause button 286 Scan button 287 Set button 286 Speed Dial button 286 Start button 286 Numerics 1000BASE T Full Duplex 223 100BASE TX Full Duplex 223 100BASE TX Half Duplex 223 1OBASE T Full Duplex 223 1OBASE T Half Duplex 223 2 Sided 183 186 191 203 2Sided 429 431 453 459 4 Colors Configuration Chart 464 02 1x 220 243 A A4 270 A5 270 About printer 39 Access List 244 Address Book 164 170 194 248 Address Book Editor 560 Address Books 561 ADF glass 642 Ad Hoc 236 Adjust Altitude 192 214 425 442 Adjust BTR 191 210 513 Adjust Fuser 192 210 514 Adjusting color registration 643 Adjusting the Language 309 Admin Menu 471 Administrator Account 235 Alert Tone 181 196 423 436 Alignment Chart 464 Index 743
29. Form Line Displays the number of lines in a page Quantity Displays the number of copies to print Image Displays whether to enable the Image Enhancement Enhancement feature Hex Dump Displays whether to enable the Hex Dump feature Draft Mode Displays whether to print in the draft mode Line Termination Displays whether to set the line termination Default Color Displays the color mode setting PDF Settings Quantity Displays the number of copies to print 2 Sided Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Print Mode Displays the print mode setting Collated Displays whether to sort a job Output Size Displays the output paper size Layout Displays the output layout Output Color Displays the color mode setting Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 183 Secure Settings Panel Lock Set Displays whether to lock Admin Menu witha password Copy Displays whether to lock the Copy service with a password Fax Displays whether to lock the Fax service with a password Scan Displays whether to lock the Scan service with a password Print from USB Displays whether to lock the Print from USB service with a password Secure Receive Set Displays whether a password is required to receive faxes Login Error Displays how many times an administrator can 184 Attempts attempt to log in to Panel Lock Function Enabled and Secure Receive
30. Loud Machine off Does not emit a tone when the printer Ready becomes ready Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when the printer becomes ready Loud Copy Off Does not emit a tone when copying is Completed complete Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when copying is complete Loud Job Off Does not emit a tone when any other Completed job except copying is complete Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when any other job except copying is complete Loud Fault Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when a job ends abnormally Loud Understanding the Tool Box Menus 435 Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when a problem occurs Loud Out of Off Does not emit a tone when the printer Paper runs out of paper Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when the printer runs out of paper Loud Low Toner Off Does not emit a tone when the toner is Alert low Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when the toner is low Loud Auto Clear Off Does not emit a tone before the printer Alert performs auto clear Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 Normal seconds before the printer performs auto clear Loud Base Tone Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel display is returne
31. Maintaining Your Printer 641 4 ADF Glass 4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the document cover Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies It is recommended to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals 1 Open the ADF cover 2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint free cloth or paper towel until it is clean If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains paper from the ADF may also be soiled In this case slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water and then remove the contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry 642 l Maintaining Your Printer Adjusting Color Registration To adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a new location follow the procedure below e Printing the Color Registration Chart e Determining Values e Entering Values Printing the Color Registration Chart When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the A Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press button until Color Reg Adjust is highlight
32. Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Receive Tone Displays the 2 digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Displays the name of the sender that will be Name printed on the header of faxes Fax Number Displays the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of faxes Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD setting Duplex Print Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Sent Fax Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a Forward specified destination Fax Forward Displays the fax number of the destination to Number which incoming faxes are to be forwarded Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Displays a prefix dial number This number dials Number before any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper ECM Displays whether the Error Correction Mode ECM is enabled
33. Secure Settings Set Available Displays whether to set the available time period Print Copy Fax Time for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services Scan respectively Start Time Displays the start time of the available time period for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services respectively End Time Displays the end time of the available time period for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services respectively Recurrence Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Copy Defaults Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white Select Tray Displays the default input tray SSF Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Type Displays the paper type settings of the single sheet feeder Collated Displays whether to sort a copy job Reduce Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction enlargement ratio Document Size Displays the paper size of the original Original Type Displays the type of the original Lighter Darker Displays the default copy density Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level Color Saturation Displays the default color saturation level Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Auto Exposure Displays the background suppression level Level Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 185
34. To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original Copying 323 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the lt B Copy button Press button until Lighter Darker is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press or gt button to move for adjusting the darkness level and then press the V Set button Lighter3 Works well with dark print Lighter2 Lighter1 Normal Works well with normal typed or printed documents Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Darker3 Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Sharpness To adjust the sharpness to make the copy image sharper or softer than the original 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 324 Copying 2 Press the lt B Copy button Press button until Sharpness is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press f or butto
35. 031 528 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the printer can communicate via network with the forwarding destination SMB server For example check the following Connection of a network cable TCP IP setting e Communication with Port 137 UDP 138 UDP and 139 TCP For communication beyond the subnet contact your system administrator 031 529 Press the V Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if password is correct 031 530 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if storage location is correct Storage location you specified is DFS setting and check if it is linked to other server Specify directly linked server share name and storage location 031 531 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check access right of the folder you specified 031 532 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Change file name and forwarding destination folder or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder 031 533 031 534 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the following e If the file name you specified is not used by other users e If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists 031 535 031 536 Press the va
36. 16 Contents Sharpness 2 5 tv Soc evn ses A fe ce ate tense A 546 Contrastes ga a dre Bt nh heey Oe teak eh at 546 Auto Exposure 2 0 0 00 0 547 Margin Top Bottom 547 Margin Left Right 547 Margin Middle 547 Bax Menus 0 40 pone WA sis see ye siete aed envy Mews 548 FaK tO h Gwe ge hak owe ae Oe RS ey 548 Resolution 2 0 20 0000 548 Lighter Darker 2 2 0 000 0 549 OnHOOk s 4 4 Bas hele vn be Ge 549 Delayed Start 2 2 549 Polling Receive oo aaa 550 Fax Cover Page o sc ca poeno Bok Ges 550 Print from USB Menu 550 Document su T eyt eo e ee E Y 550 Select Tray gt couter e oE N 551 SSE Paper Size eimina ahd e hae he ete ONA 551 SSF Paper Type aoaaa aaa 552 2Sid6d sn oy BV ov a le te a oh Bod 552 LAYOUT t ah ok ad oe ee eB E a 553 PDF Password 553 Pane ISG CK eat Ais fi oe ae tae ae ne este eae Set 553 Enabling the Panel Lock 553 Disabling the Panel Lock 554 Resetting Defaults 0002 555 When Using the Operator Panel 555 Contents 18 23 Understanding Your Printer Software 557 Contents Printer Settings Utility 0 00 559 Status Window 560 Tool BORA ote ised oes ENS hk ee hg 560 Updater ts avila i Ain SB Sate Bote aR yh a aes 560 Troubleshooting 560 Address B
37. 2 The document name is displayed The save date and time are displayed if the docu ment name is not specified Private Mail Box K NOTE Private Mail Box feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable Purpose To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mail Box Values Understanding the Printer Menus l 531 Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver All Print and Documents Delete Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them Print Prints all documents and saves them in memory Delete Deletes all documents from print memory Print and Delete document n Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it Print Prints the specified document and saves it in memory Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory ment name is not specified l This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored 2 The document name is displayed The save date and time are displayed if the docu Public Mail Box K NOTE Public Mail Box feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable Purpose To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mail Box Values 532 Understanding the Printer Menus Select UserID All Print and Deletes all documents from print Documents Delete memory after printi
38. 278 Loading paper 109 Loading print media 273 SSE 280 standard 250 sheet tray and optional 250 sheet feeder 273 Location 169 177 Login Attempts 200 Login Error 200 Low Toner Alert 436 Low Toner Alert Msg 182 197 424 438 Low Toner Alert Tone 181 196 423 LPD 217 223 226 488 M MAC Address 236 Machine Check 465 Machine Digital Certification 241 Machine Ready 435 Machine Ready Tone 181 195 423 Main Motor Operation Check 465 Maintenance 613 Manual Registration Adjustments 441 Margin Left Right 186 190 203 208 429 430 453 456 541 547 Margin Middle 186 190 203 208 429 430 453 456 542 547 Margin Top Bottom 186 190 203 208 429 430 453 455 541 547 Max E Mail Size 190 208 Max Email Size 430 456 Maximum memory 605 Memory 605 Memory Capacity 178 Memory connector 605 Memory module 649 Memory speed 605 Menu item 173 Menu Settings 179 MIB compatibility 606 mim inch 181 196 424 438 Modem Speed 189 207 432 462 498 Monarch 270 MonoCount Limit 247 Monthly Settings 201 MO Chart 464 Multiple Up 614 Multiple Up 186 203 429 453 541 Index 751 N NCR 263 Network 94 Network connection setup 118 Network Firmware Version 178 Network TWAIN 218 223 227 Network Type 236 New Password 199 No Account User Print 193 246 No carbon required 263 No of Sheets 179 Non Dell Toner
39. 3 7 Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers Right click the printer icon and select Sharing Click Change sharing options The message Windows needs your permission to continue appears Click Continue Select the Share this printer check box and then type a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer Click OK Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 132 1 2 3 4 Click Start Control Panel Printers Right click the printer icon and select Sharing Click Change Sharing Options if exists Select the Share this printer check box and then type a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer Click OK Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 5 Click Start Devices and Printers Right click the printer icon and select Printer properties On the Sharing tab click Change Sharing Options if exists Check the Share this printer check box and then type a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer Click Apply and then click OK To confirm that the printer is properly shared Ensure tha
40. 479 Driver 31 Drivers and utilities CD 31 DRPD 205 DRPD Pattern 189 206 432 461 495 Drum Refresh 212 Drum Refresh Configuration Chart 464 Drum Refresh Mode 467 Duplex Print 189 206 432 462 497 Duplexer 0 660 E ECM 189 207 432 462 498 Edit Print User Registration 246 E Mail Address 249 250 E Mail Alert 165 171 223 229 488 E Mail Alert Settings 221 231 E Mail Alert Setup 161 E mail Alert Setup Page 220 Email From Field 425 438 E Mail Group 249 251 E Mail Server Settings 221 229 Emulations 606 Encryption 237 End Time 201 Entering Values 646 Envelope 191 192 210 211 267 514 515 Envelope 10 270 Environment 606 Index 747 environment settings of your web browser 165 Error History 194 427 470 Error Code 590 Ethernet 215 223 607 Ethernet port 41 92 94 Event Panel 169 EWS 488 EWS Settings 222 Executive 270 Expiration Mode 201 Expiration Time 201 Express Service Service Code 178 F fast scan 644 Fault Time Out 180 195 423 436 Fault Tone 181 196 423 435 Fax Activity 189 194 207 433 462 499 Fax Broadcast 189 207 433 463 500 Fax Cover Page 189 206 432 461 495 550 Fax Defaults 187 203 430 553 Fax Forward Number 189 206 Fax Fwd Number 432 462 497 748 Index FAX Group 249 257 258 Fax Header 188 206 432 461 494 Fax Header Name 188 206 432 461
41. 494 Fax Menu 548 Fax Number 188 206 432 461 494 Fax Pending 194 Fax Protocol 189 207 433 463 Fax Settings 188 204 FAX Speed Dial 249 258 Fax to 548 Fax Transmit 189 207 433 463 Feed Roll Operation Check 465 File Format 190 208 429 454 544 Finding Information 31 Firmware Version 178 Flip on Long Edge 296 Flip on Short Edge 297 Folio 270 Font 182 197 581 PCL 5 PCL 6 585 Pitch 582 Point size 582 Style 581 Typefaces and fonts 581 Weight 581 Font Pitch 183 197 477 Font Size 183 197 476 Form Line 183 198 477 Front cover 40 FTP Client 219 235 Function Enabled 199 520 Function Enabled Copy 199 Function Enabled Fax 199 Function Enabled Scan 199 Fuser 660 Fuser Motor Operation Check 465 G Gateway Address 225 427 447 487 Generate Self Signed Certificate 241 Generate Signed Certificate 241 Get Environment Sensor Info 467 Ghost Configuration Chart 64 Group Dial 472 H Hex Dump 183 198 478 Host I F 178 179 Host Name 178 179 231 239 How to install option 53 How to remove option 649 How to replace retard roller 627 How to set up 33 How to use printer 32 HTTP 218 227 HTTP SSL TLS Communication 241 l ID 178 179 Identifying print media 270 Identifying print paper 270 Image Compression 190 208 430 456 Image Enhancement 183 198 Impression Number 179 Infrastructure 236 Init
42. 524 Fax Defaults o a ee ee 525 Print from USB Defaults 2 2 2 526 Tray Settings 2 0004 526 Panel Language 0 530 Print Menu aeta oe bee hf oe ace Behn hoe Y 530 Contents 15 Secure Print 0 2 530 Private Mail Box 531 Public Mail Box 532 Proof Print 533 SecureReceive 534 Copy Menu 2004 534 Select Tray te ae Shs a he Ale ea 534 SSF Paper Size ri sea ee a 535 SSF Paper Type 00 536 Collated tire feed ir nnn Bones Ants ae Gy gree et 537 Reduce Enlarge 2 2 0 0 537 Document Size 538 Original Type 2 020 0 0 539 Fighter Darke onsite torts ace Satay Sees 539 Sharpness 3 ii org ws 2 eo eA ee a 540 Color Saturation 0 540 Auto Exposure 04 540 QSIded gt se Se eye ae ed ek SS 540 Multiple Up 2 0 541 Margin Top Bottom 541 Margin Left Right 2 0 541 Margin Middle 0 542 Scan Menso a nn a EREE A E eens Y 542 ScantoUSBMemory 542 ScantoE Mail 542 Scan to Network 543 Scan to Application 543 FileFormat 0005 544 Color Modes pk muve ee ee Yt 544 Resolution 0 4 544 Document Size 545 Lighter Dartketiis apes goes ste Sata ae 546
43. 6 Blue Plug 2 Control Board Cover 7 Power Connector 3 Control Board 8 Ethernet Port 4 Phone Connector 9 Wireless Adapter Socket 5 Wall Jack Connector 10 USB Port Space Requirements Provide enough room to open the printer trays covers and optional accessories and for proper ventilation About the Printer 41 1 v v 320 mm 12 60 inches a 413 mm 16 27 inches 100 mm 3 94 inches 451 mm 17 75 inches 600 mm 23 62 inches 100 mm 3 94 inches Automatic Document Feeder ADF ADF Cover Document Guides Document Glass Document Feeder Tray Front USB Port MA RB wl N About the Printer 42 Operator Panel For more information on the operator panel see Using the Operator Panel Buttons Securing the Printer To protect your printer from theft you can use the optional Kensington lock Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer Security Slot Security Slot For details see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock Ordering Supplies You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and click the web address under Order Supplies at to order toner or supplies for your printer About the Printer 43 You can also order replacement toner cartridges or supplies fr
44. 602 Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD 7 Printa test page to verify print installation a Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 b Right click the printer you just created and then click Properties Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 For PCL driver On the Options tab set each setting item and then click Apply For PS driver On the Device Settings tab set each setting item and then click Apply c On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD 603 604 Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD Specifications Operating System Compatibility Your Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer is compatible with Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Edition Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client x86 and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 x86 Power Supply Rated Voltage 220 VAC 240 VAC 110 VAC 127 VAC Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Current 5 A or less 9 A or less Dimensions
45. 754 Index Printer paper 261 Printer Revision Levels 178 Printer Serial Number 178 Printer Settings 164 179 195 Printer settings utility 559 Printer software 557 Printer specification 605 Printer Status 163 170 176 Printer Status Window 557 Printer Type 177 Printing 291 Printing on letterhead 265 Printing problem 686 Printing Speed 177 Problems with Optional Accessories 727 Processor Speed 178 Product Information Guide 32 Proof Print 533 Protocol Monitor 194 427 470 Q Quantity 183 198 478 Quick Launch Utility 559 Quick Reference Guide 32 RAM Disk 182 196 424 437 508 RARP 487 Ready Error LED 285 Rear side 466 Receive Mode 188 205 431 460 490 Recommended paper 262 Recurrence 201 Recycled 192 210 514 515 Red Hat 147 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 147 605 Redial Attempts 188 206 432 461 493 Redial Delay 188 206 432 461 493 Reduce Enlarge 185 201 428 449 537 Re enter Password 199 Refresh 172 REGI CLUTCH Operation Check 465 Registration Adjustments 441 Regular 193 Relative humidity 606 Remote Rev Tone 432 461 494 Remote Receive 188 206 432 461 494 Remote Receive Tone 188 206 Removing a optional memory module 649 Removing optional 250 sheet feeder 652 Removing options 649 Removing paper jam 659 From ADF 661 From duplexer 676 From fuser 672 From optional 250 sheet feeder 677
46. C 32 C Relative humidity 10 85 RH no condensation Print Quality Guarantee Temperature 15 C 28 C Relative humidity 20 70 RH no condensation 606 Specifications Storage Temperature range 20 C to 40 C 0 F to 104 F Storage humidity range 5 85 RH no condensation Altitude Operating Up to 3 100 m 10 000 feet Storage 70 9275 Kpa Cables Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements Connection type Connection specifications and symbols 1 USB USB 2 0 ZS 2 Wireless IEEE 802 11b 802 11 802 11n adapter socket o 3 Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Sey 4 Phone connector PHONE S 5 Wall jack connector LINE K Specifications 607 Copier Specifications Item Description Copy Resolution Optical 600 dpi x 600 dpi Copy Speed Color 23 cpm or more Black amp White 23 cpm or more When using the document glass to make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one Color 8 cpm or more Black amp White 16 cpm or more When using the ADF to make sequential copies of multiple documents Paper Size A4 A5 B5 Executive Letter Folio Legal Monarch DL C5 Envelope 10 Zoom Rate Document glass 25 400 ADF 25 400 Multiple copies 1 99 pages Copy mode Original Type 608 l Specifications Text Text
47. Copying OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the lt B Copy button Press button until Reduce 1 vA Set button Enlarge is highlighted and then press the 4 Press A or 9 button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Inch series Custom 100 50 Ldgr gt Ltr 64 Lgl gt Ltr 78 100 Stmt gt Ltr 129 Stmt Legl 154 200 mm series Custom 100 50 A4 gt A5 70 B5 A5 81 100 A5 gt B5 122 A5 gt A4 141 200 Denotes the factory default setting Copying 321 K NOTE You can also specify the value in increments of 1 from 25 to 400 by pressing or gt button or entering a value using the numeric keypad 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Document Size To select the default document size 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the PS Copy button Press g button until Document Size
48. DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP Panel Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the operator panel IP Address When an IP address is being set manually the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255 255 255 255 255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask Gateway Address When an IP address is being set manually the gateway address is specified using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address IPsec Disable Disables IPsec Protocol Purpose To enable or disable each protocol The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Understanding the Printer Menus 487 LPD Disable Disables the LPD port Enable Enables the Line Printer Daemon LPD port Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port Enable Enabl
49. From single sheet feeder 664 From tray 668 Removing retard roller in tray 628 Removing toner cartridge 616 Removing wireless adapter 654 Replacing the retard roller 627 Reports 194 Resend Delay 188 206 432 461 493 Reset Defaults 213 442 Reset Print Server 238 Resetting Defaults 308 Resident font 585 Resident scalable fonts 585 Resolution 187 190 204 208 430 454 457 544 548 Restore Settings 172 Result 465 Index 755 Return policy 740 Right frame 171 Ring Tone Volume 188 205 431 460 492 RSA BSAFE 28 S Safety information 32 Scalable font 583 Scan Defaults 190 429 Scan to Application 543 Scan to E mail 542 Scan To Network 429 Scan to Network 190 208 235 454 543 Scan to USB Memory 542 ScanButton Manager 560 Search PhoneBook 548 Secure Print 530 Secure Receive 521 Secure Receive Set 200 Secure Settings 184 198 Security 238 Security Settings 237 Select Reorder URL 193 Select Tray 185 191 201 427 431 448 458 534 551 Selecting letterhead 264 Selecting paper 263 Selecting preprinted form 264 Selecting pre punched paper 264 Sending print job 292 Sent Fax Forward 189 206 Sent Fax Fwd 432 462 Server Address 194 249 253 Server Address Book 425 438 Server Phone Book 425 438 Service code 33 Service tag 33 Set Available Time 200 Set Date 192 425 440 Set Password 165 171 238 Set Time 192 42
50. Label Recycled Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Sets the type of paper to be used by the Paper Wrinkle Check Mode Rear side K Off Does not use the print side 2 of the paper On Uses the print side 2 of the paper Color Mode Color Prints in color mode Black amp White Prints in monochrome mode Start Click this button to print in the specified paper size type and color mode Environment Sensor Info Purpose Understanding the Tool Box Menus To print the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result Values Get Environment Click this button to confirm the internal environment sensor Sensor Info information of the printer such as temperature and humidity Clean Developer Purpose To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge Values Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner Refresh Mode Purpose To use up a toner cartridge or PHD unit when you need to replace it before the end of its life or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge K NOTE Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner Values Toner Refresh Yellow Click Yellow to clean the yellow cartridge Mode Magenta Click Magenta to clean the magenta cartridge Cyan Click Cyan to clean the cyan cartridge Black Click Black to clean the black cartridge Drum Refresh Drum C
51. Number of Copies 315 COLO ioe obo a ig le ca te ae Ne 316 select Tray i Six bee a ieee eee Se 316 SSF Paper Size 0 317 SSF Paper Type 0 0040 318 Collated i235 tte ce Me tie E A 319 Reduce Enlarge 02 0 2 0 00 c eee eee 320 Contents Document Size 322 Original Types sachs ae gee Bf he steak a 323 Lighter Darker 0 323 Sharpness 2 0 20 0 000 324 Color Saturation 000000 325 Auto Exposure oaa a 326 ZSid ed gt i Se a eo Re Ew ae baa eS 326 Multiple Up o aa 328 Margin Top Bottom 329 Margin Left Right 2 0 2 330 Margin Middle 331 Changing the Default Settings 2 331 Setting the Power Saver Timer Option 332 19 Scanning 9 3425 26 oip e phyteaio ds caxy 335 Scanning Overview ooo 335 Scanning With scanner driver 335 Scanning Without scanner driver 336 Scanning From the Operator Panel 2 337 Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver 339 Scan Setting Tool 2 2 342 IP Address Settings 343 Password Setting 345 Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition WIA Driver 346 Scanning to Network 00 348 Overview 2 0 0 0 0000 eee 349 Procedures 00 2 0 a 350 Setting a Login Name and a Password SMB Only 350 10 Contents Creating a Sh
52. OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document 3 Press the gt Scan button 4 Ensure thatScan to USB Memory is highlighted and then press the va Set button 5 Press the gt Start button to begin scanning the document 6 Remove the USB memory from the printer See Inserting and Removing a USB Memory for more details Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image To save the scanned image to a USB memory specify a folder in the USB memory before executing the scan job 1 Select a folder to save the scanned image from the printer operator panel K NOTE The default saving location is the root directory of the USB memory K NOTE You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad Scanning 369 K NOTE You can select any folder in the USB memory but cannot create a new folder in this step You should always create a new folder before connecting the memory to the printer If the name of the scanned image has already existed in the folder the printer automatically generate a new file name to save the data Inserting and Removing a USB Memory You can insert the USB memory before scanning images Before removing the USB memory ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory N ELZ ZET NOTICE If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing the da
53. Pause button e Re dials a telephone number Inserts a pause into a telephone number Cancel button e Cancels the current processing or pending job B amp W Color LED e Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected Color Mode button e Switches the color mode gt Start button e Starts a job 7 Speed Dial button e Calls up a stored telephone number lt Backspace button e Deletes characters and numbers Numeric keypad e Enters characters and numbers AC All Clear button e Resets the current setting and returns to the top menu Operator Panel 19S Back button e Returns to the previous screen 20 LCD panel e Displays various settings instructions and error messages 21 gt Scan button e Moves to the top level of the Scan menu 22 E Menu button e Moves to the top level of the Print from USB Memory Job Status and System menus K NOTE Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting Make sure to press the Y Set button to save the current entry or setting K NOTE For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters Printing a Panel Settings Page The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted an
54. Perform steps 8 and 9 above to change the password This will change the password Disabling the Panel Lock 554 1 2 Press the B Menu button Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press gf button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted and then press the V Set button Understanding the Printer Menus 7 Ensure that Disable is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 8 Enter the current password and then press the y Set button The setting has been ch anged Resetting Defaults After executing this function and rebooting the printer all the menu parameters except the parameters for the network are reset to their default values When Using the Operator Panel Press the E Menu button Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y 1 2 Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press Sg button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Reset Defaults is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press y button until the desired setting is highligh
55. Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes I This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed 2 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Scan Defaults Purpose To create your own scan settings Values Understanding the Tool Box Menus 453 Scan To Network Server FTP Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol Computer Stores the scanned image on a computer using Network the Server Message Block SMB protocol File Format PDF Saves the scanned image in PDF Multi Page Saves the scanned image in Multi Page TIFF TIFF TIFF Saves the scanned image in TIFF JPEG Saves the scanned image in JPEG Color Black amp Scans in black and white mode White Color Scans in color mode Color Black amp Black amp Scans in black and white Button White White Set Button GrayScale Scans in grayscale Color Color Scans in color Button Stee as Color Photo Scans in color Photo This is suitable for photographic images Resolution 200 x 200 dpi Scans an image at 200 dpi 300 x 300 dpi Scans an image at 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi Scans an image at 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi Scans an image at 600 dpi Document size A4 Sets the document size A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive 454 Understanding the Tool Box Menus
56. Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified 031 537 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if storage location has free space 031 539 Press the v Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if server name is correct 031 540 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if domain name is correct 031 541 594 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if login name user name is correct Understanding Printer Messages 031 542 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Wait for a while and try the same operation again Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 031 543 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check login permitted time with your system administrator 031 544 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the password valid period with your system administrator 031 545 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check necessity of password change with your system administrator 031 546 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover
57. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values No n Address n is 1 5 Sets the IP address for Filter n No n Mask n is 1 5 Sets the address mask for Filter n No n Mode n is 1 5 oft Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address Reject Rejects an access from the specified IP address IEEE 802 1x K NOTE IEEE 802 1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable and it is available only when the IEEE 802 1 authentication is enabled Purpose To disable IEEE 802 1x authentication The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Disable Disables IEEE 802 1x Reset LAN Purpose To initialize wired network data stored in non volatile memory NVM After executing this function and rebooting the printer all wired network settings are reset to their default values Values Understanding the Printer Menus 489 Yes Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM No Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM Fax Settings Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Receive Mode Purpose To select the default fax receiving mode Values Telephone Automatic fax r
58. The printer driver is uninstalled Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 Setup Overview SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 1 Install the printer driver 2 Set up the print queue 3 Specify the default queue 4 Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver 1 Double click Dell 2155 Color MFP x x x i686 rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD 2 Type the administrator password and click Continue Installation starts When the installation is complete the window is automatically closed Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser 2 Type the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated 3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Printer The Printer Configurations dialog box opens 154 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS For network connections a Click Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens Click Connection Wizard The Connection Wizard dialog box opens Select Line Printer Daemon LPD Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via Type the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer drop down menu Click OK The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appear Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP vx x Dell Dell_2155cdn_Co
59. To avoid jams flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the tray 276 Loading Print Media Envelope 10 Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer Monarch or DL The Monarch or DL envelopes can be loaded in one of the following ways Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer OR Load the envelopes long edge feed with the flaps open and the print side up Ensure that the flaps come at the top when you face towards the printer Loading Print Media 277 C5 Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up Ensure that the flaps come at the bottom when you face towards the printer Loading Letterhead Pre Printed and Pre Punched Paper When using the standard 250 sheet tray and optional 250 sheet feeder the pre printed paper such as letterhead and pre punched paper enter the printer with the print side facing up for Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer As for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer the pre printed paper such as letterhead and pre punched paper enter the printer with the print side facing down as shown below K NOTE For Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Le
60. Tone Pulse You can select the dialing type e Tone e Pulse 10PPS e Pulse 20PPS Resend Delay You can specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds The default is 8 seconds Redial Attempts You can specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 13 If you enter 0 the printer will not redial Redial Delay Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy Intervals from 1 15 minutes can be entered Faxing 383 Option Description Junk Fax Setup You can reject faxes sent from unwanted stations The system only accepts faxes from the remote stations registered in the speed dial This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes Select Of f to turn the feature off Anybody can send you a fax Select On to turn the feature on Remote Receive You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone Remote Rev Tone You can specify the tone when Remote Receive is set to On Fax Header Prints the sender s information on the header of faxes Select Of f to turn this feature off Select On to turn this feature on Note that if United States is selected for the setting of Country this option does not appear on the menu The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed
61. WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS K NOTE The optional wireless adapter must be installed on the printer K NOTE For information on how to install a wireless adapter see Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter Using Wizard Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically 7 Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Welcome pes English Easy Setup Advance Setup Advance Toots Perey Guided setup Step by step instructions to set More Information up your printer optiona accessories Setup O Software Installation users cuide M sal print orver ana supporting software Troubleshooting Guide Product Features 2 Click Guided Setup 70 Installing Optional Accessories 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 oo Easy Setup Navigator Welcome Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Language English B Easy Setup Advance Setup Advance Tools Step by step instructions to set More Information O Guidea Setup up your printer Optional Accessories Setup O software Installation Users Guide Instali print driver and supporting software Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Home gt
62. Wireless Adapter 64 Wireless adapter socket 41 Wireless Settings 216 236 WPA PSK 237 WSD 218 223 226 601 X XPS printer driver 115 120 Y Yellow terminator 96 Index 759
63. aaa a 417 Pax P riding ons eo gee ab f ng heey es tte ae oe 417 Print Met r sip Poe ee a hee 417 Changing Setting Options 418 Know Your Printer 419 21 Understanding the Tool Box Menus 421 Printer Settings Report 0 0 00 cee ee 421 Printer Information 2 2 421 Menu Settings 02 422 Reports a ee ve s wa digaagau iamo tA data aes 2 426 TCP IP Settings 427 Defaults Settings 00 e eee eee 427 Pax Settings sh togiee vee oe Sea se sess 431 Printer Maintenance 2 0 00 eee eee eee 433 Contents System Settings 0 433 Date amp Times 06 aaietvioe die tives salaries 2 439 Paper Density 440 Color Registration Adjustment 440 Adjust Altitude 0 442 Reset Defaults 0 442 Non Dell Toner 2 2 2 2 443 Initialize Print Meter 443 Tray Settings 00 0 cece eee 443 TCP IP Settings 446 Network Settings ooa 447 Copy Defaults 0 eee eee ee 447 Scat Defaults wis ty mtn esting eae eS eee He oS 453 Fax DefaultS 220 sacnacn uriin cases iach e 456 Print from USB Defaults 00 458 Fax Settings 4 4 3 ss aie ae ete ane alae 3 460 Diagnosis nce hak cals eee aie Rene SSG E ia duce ses 463 Chart Printe seca fas ROMA SB 463 Machine Check 464 Paper Wrinkle Chec
64. and Windows 7 64 bit Edition For Windows Vista 1 Click Start Control Panel Select User Accounts and Family Safety Click User Accounts Click Turn User Account Control on or off Click Continue nA A U N Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 127 6 7 Clear the Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer check box Restart the computer For Windows Server 2008 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Control Panel Double click User Accounts Click Turn User Account Control on or off Clear the Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer check box Click OK Restart the computer For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 Click Start Control Panel Select User Accounts Click Change User Account Control Settings 4 Move the slider to the bottom and then click OK 5 Restart the computer For Windows 7 1 Click Start Control Panel ND Nn BW N Select User Accounts and Family Safety Click User Accounts Click Change User Account Control Settings Move the slider to the bottom and then click OK Click Yes in the User Account Control dialog box Restart the computer Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks K NOTE This procedure is required when you use Windows Vista Windows Vista 128 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Editio
65. button d Ensure that System Setting is highlighted and then press the vA Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE a Click Start All Programs Dell Printers gt Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box Installing Optional Accessories 6l 62 10 12 K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears Click the System Settings button The system settings report is printed Confirm Tray 2 250 Sheet Feeder is listed in the system settings report under Printer Options If the feeder is not listed turn off the printer unplug the power cable and re install the optional 250 sheet feeder After loading paper in the optional 250 sheet feeder specify the paper type from the printer operator panel a b Press the E Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until Tray Settings is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until Tray 2 is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press button until Paper Type is highligh
66. community name if using default community name public Up to 31 characters can be entered Service Tag button Click this button to obtain the service tag K NOTE You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable done button Click this button to return to the Printer Status window Status Monitor Console for Linux Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Linux and the printer Understanding Your Printer Software 571 Status Monitor Console Feature e Monitoring Dell Printers Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux e Receiving Alerts Alerts you to problems such as paper jams or low toner e Ordering Supplies Allows you to access the web site to order supplies Before Installing the Status Monitor Console K NOTE The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed Python PyGTK Net SNMP cups libs and xog open Please confirm that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console NOTE The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network LPR or Socket 9100 USB connection is not supported Distributions Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS 4 e Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 e SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 Printing system
67. cyan Dens Cyan 3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of medium Middle 0 density cyan Den Cyan 3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density High 0 cyan Dens Black 3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density Low 0 black Dens Black 3 to3 Sets the color balance level of medium Middle 0 density black Dens Black 3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density High 0 black Dens Understanding the Tool Box Menus 2Sided 1 gt 1Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge Multiple Up off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge Margin 0 50 mm Sets the value of the top and bottom Top Bottom 0 0 2 0 inch margins 4 mm 0 2 inch Margin Left Right 0 50 mm Sets the value of the left and right margins 0 0 2 0 inch 4 mm 0 2 inch Margin Middle 0 50 mm Sets the value of the middle margin 0 0 2 0 inch 0 mm 0 0 inch Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes
68. riemst Name e Address Click the Apply New Settings button Sending an E mail With the Scanned File 1 2 372 Press the gt Scan button Press w button until Scan to E Mail is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Ensure that Email to is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press 4 button until the desired menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Keypad Enter an e mail address directly Address Book Select an e mail address registered in the address book Scanning Email Group Select a group of e mails registered in the address book Search Local Address Book Search an e mail address from the local address book Search Server Address Book Search an e mail address from the LDAP server address book K NOTE For more information on address book and server address book see Address Books Z NOTE If you are using the LDAP server address book Server Address Book must be set to On For details see LDAP Server and Server Address Book K NOTE The e mail addresses need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel 5 Press gt button to select TO or BCC 6 Press the gt Start button to begin sending e mail Scanning 373 374 Scanning Faxing Z NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Specifying the Fax Initial
69. use the Scan to E mail feature You can directly send the data scanned as an e mail attachment You can choose destination e mail addresses from the address book on the printer or server Or you can enter the address from the printer s operator panel using the numeric keypad Scanning to a USB Memory Scan to USB Memory DE A With the Scan to USB Memory feature you don t need a PC to connect a USB memory You can specify the USB memory inserted into the printer s port as a data saving location when you scan data Product Features Scanning to Network Scan to SMB FTP You can transfer data scanned to a PC or a server via SMB or FTP without service software Although prior registration of the destination FTP server or PC on the address book is required it helps save your time Making Copies From the Document Glass Scan From Document Glass JA D N You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the document glass When you scan documents using the document glass place them facing down Making Copies From the ADF Sending a Fax from the Driver Scan From ADF Direct Fax Direct Fax from PC on You can scan pieces of unbound paper You can directly send faxes from your using the ADF When you scan PC using the fax driver You can documents using the ADF load them specify the fax settings like the normal facing up fax Also you can specify the recipient s fax number from the numeri
70. 0 00 eee eee 168 Top Frame 026 45 ao a AMG he Bode a a 168 TOP Framesi estoa uann Boog Reta Yee nana Sete 170 Right Frame 171 Changing the Settings of the Menu Items 172 Details of the Menu Items 173 Printer Status 42 0 0 veldeia Sie aa od oe PSs 176 Printer Jobs ressis ct pte cde ee esata el Mee 178 Printer Settings 20 0 0c eee eee 179 Print Server Settings 215 Copy Printer Settings 0005 245 Print Volume scs ccce s4ce0esc0sseeeebsaa dare 245 Address Book 0 0 0 cece eee eee 248 Tray Settings 00 2 cece eee eee 259 14 Print Media Guidelines 261 PAD CD NE SEES SEAS atts oan maaan ett A SM 261 Paper Characteristics 261 Recommended Paper 262 Unacceptable Paper 2 0002 263 s l cting Paper 2442 deuoedd heed ode haalea 263 Contents Selecting Pre Printed Media and Letterheads 264 Selecting Pre Punched Paper 264 Printing on a Letterhead Pre Printed and Pre Punched Paper 265 Envelopes 05 636 04 He stesckas Pais esas nes 267 TRAD SL Soh esate er cates tex E terse ae aera Met aes R 268 Storing Print Media 0 000 002 eee 269 Identifying Print Media and Specifications 270 Supported Paper Sizes 2 270 Supported Paper Types 271 Paper Type Specifications 271 15 Loading Print
71. 00 A4 DD MM YY Australia 10 00 A4 DD MM YY Austria 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Belgium 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Bulgaria 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Canada 5 00 Letter MM DD YY Colombia 5 00 Letter DD MM YY Costa Rica 6 00 Letter DD MM YY Cyprus 2 00 A4 DD MM YY 98 Connecting Your Printer Czech Republic 1 00 A4 YY MM DD Denmark 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Dominican Republic 4 00 Letter DD MM YY Egypt 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Estonia 3 00 A4 DD MM YY Finland 2 00 A4 DD MM YY France 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Germany 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Greece 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Guatemala 6 00 Letter DD MM YY Hungary 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Iceland 9 00 A4 DD MM YY Treland 00 00 A4 DD MM YY Italy 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Jamaica 5 00 Letter MM DD YY Jordan 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Latvia 3 00 A4 DD MM YY Liechtenstein 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Lithuania 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Luxembourg 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Malta 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Mexico 6 00 Letter DD MM YY Netherlands 1 00 A4 DD MM YY New Zealand 12 00 A4 DD MM YY Nicaragua 6 00 Letter DD MM YY Norway 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Panama 5 00 Letter DD MM YY Poland 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Portugal 00 00 A4 DD MM YY Puerto Rico 4 00 Letter MM DD YY Romania 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Connecting Your Printer 99 Russia 3 00 A4 DD MM YY Saudi Arabia 3 00 A4 DD MM YY Slovakia 1 00 A4 YY MM DD Slovenia 1 00 A4 DD MM
72. 2 EDE Auto ID Copy Manual Automatically Always prints Reduces the reduces the two sides of pages in the pages to fitin the ID cardin custom size one page one page in the depending on the original size setting of the by 100 Reduce Enlarge menu 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the Pe Copy button 328 Copying 3 Press w button until Multiple Up is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press or Sw button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge Denotes the factory default setting 5 To customize the copy settings including the number of copies contrast and image quality see Setting Copy Options Press the gt Start button to begin copying a When you are using the document glass and it is set to Auto ID Copy or Manual the display prompts you for another page I
73. 2 2 113 Disabling Firewall Before Installing Printer Software 114 Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD 114 Contents Direct Connection Setup 115 Network Connection Setup 118 Network Printer Setup on a Local Network 118 Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network 124 Setting Up for Shared Printing 131 Point and Print 133 Peer to Peer 2 136 11 Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers 141 Installing the Drivers and Software 141 Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 142 Adding a Printer on MacOS X 10 4 11 143 Adding a Printer on MacOS X 10 3 9 145 Configuring Settings 0 146 12 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 147 Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client 147 Setup Overview 147 Installing the Printer Driver 147 Setting Up the Queue 0 20000 148 Setting the Default Queue 149 Specifying the Printing Options 149 Uninstalling the Printer Driver 149 Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 150 Setup Overview 0 150 Installing the Printer Driver 150 Contents Setting Up the Queue 151 Setting the DefaultQueue 152 Specifying the Printing Options 152 Setting the Passwor
74. 2 mm 0 1 inch Margin Middle 0 50 mm Sets the value of the middle margin 0 0 2 0 inch 0 mm 0 0 inch TIFF File Format TIFF Vo Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 TTN2 Sets the TIFF file format to TTN2 Image Compression High Sets the image compression level to High Medium Sets the image compression level to Medium Low Sets the image compression level to Low Max Email Size 50 16384 Sets the maximum size of e mail that can be 2048 sent within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes The default is 2048 K bytes Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes Fax Defaults Purpose To create your own fax settings Values 456 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Resolution Standard Improves the output quality of the original For documents with normal sized characters Fine Improves the output quality of the original For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Improves the output quality of the original For documents containing extremely fine detail The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution Photo Improves the output quality of the original For documents containing photographic images Lighter Darker
75. 4 Click the Server Address tab and then click a Create button Scanning 361 F hitps 1b Ani dt dt indexhtm Microsoft Internet Explorer Ble Edt View Favorites Tools Hep O O aG Poa kros O 2 SBS Address Eaim e Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 Tb Did al Printer Jobs IPv6 Link Local ms iih Siw La Location Printer Settings Contact Person lt gt Print Server Settings as sere adie Sore Copy Printer Settings E Mail Address E Mail Group Default Setup Print Volume E Mail Address Address List to 001 020 021 040 041 060 J 061 060 081 100 Address Book DNeme Aa Printer Information 001 Not in Use Create 002 Not in Use Create Tray Settings 003 Not in Use Create E Mail Alert 004 Not in Use Create Set Password 005 Not in Use Create 006 Not in Use Create Online Help 007 Not in Use Create Order Supplies at 008 Not in Use man www dell com supplies 009 Not in Use Create Contact Dell Support at 540 Not in Use oe support dell com 011 Not in Use Create Server Address page appears Server Address w 1D ee Papat wmon dnr f 6 Pethes Swed Phe DQ serves Type ari ea PT tip Server Atinom Mah SWE Cane AMD wtih Marenchomes Fatt Ovens Rett em 4 ver tere 5 sewer ran es gk pcre Debrecen tence et rence ae Seer G tewer retinas var area see een
76. 4 PC 1004 WINBALT ISO 6 PC 775 WINGDINGS ISO 60 PC 8 WIN L1 ISO 69 PC 850 WIN L2 ISO L1 PC 852 WIN L5 ISO L2 PC 8 DN DESKTOP ISO L5 PC 8 TK DNGBTSMS ISO L6 PI FONT ISO 11 LEGAL PS MATH ISO 15 MATH 8 PS TEXT Font Size Purpose To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts Values 12 00 Sets the values in increments of 0 25 4 00 50 00 Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch K NOTE The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts See also 476 Understanding the Printer Menus Pitch and Point Size Font Pitch Purpose To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts Values 10 00 Sets the value in increments of 0 01 6 00 24 00 Font pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters in a horizontal inch of type For nonscalable mono spaced fonts the pitch is displayed but cannot be changed Z NOTE The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts See also Pitch and Point Size Form Line Purpose To set the number of lines in a page Values mm series 64 Sets the value in increments of 1 5 128 1 Denotes country specific factory default values inch series 60 Sets the value in increments of 1 5 128 l Denotes country specific factory default values Understanding the Printer Menus 477 The printer sets t
77. 718 NOISE mi 5s ie x ons rae OA Myo aoe See Be 719 Copy Problem 0 720 Fax Problems 45 4 2 2 8 bbe e aoe ke A 720 Scanning Problems 0 723 Problems With Installed Optional Accessories 727 Scanner Driver Printer Utility Problems 728 Other Problems 730 Contacting Service 2 2 732 Appendix 737 B Appendix 26 stdin den eae kee ees 739 Dell Technical Support Policy 739 Online Services oo 739 Warranty and Return Policy 0 740 Recycling Information 740 Contents 23 24 Contents Contacting Dell Before Beginning 25 26 Notes Notices and Cautions K NOTE A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer NOTICE A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem A CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2010 Dell Inc All rights reserved Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text Dell the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server Windows Vista and Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor
78. 75 g m 20 Ib documents for one job using the ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass A CAUTION Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5 5 in by 5 5 in 139 7 mm by 139 7 mm or larger than 8 5 in by 14 in 215 9 mm by 355 6 mm different sizes or weights together or booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics in ADF A CAUTION Carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF Copying 311 A CAUTION Do not use the documents with staples paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue ink and correcting fluid in ADF K NOTE To get the best scan quality especially for color or gray scale images use the document glass instead of the ADF Making Copies From the Document Glass K NOTE A computer connection is not required for copying K NOTE Remove any documents from the ADF before copying from the document glass K NOTE Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output For best results clean the document glass before use For more information see Cleaning the Scanner To make a copy from the document glass 1 Lift and open the document cover 2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glas
79. Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID or enter a new server address Share Name Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name or enter a new shared name when Server Type is set to SMB Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path or enter a new path Server Port Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number or enter a Number new port number If you leave the text box blank the default port number FTP 21 SMB 139 will be used Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol or enter a new login name Login Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the Password selected protocol or enter a new password Re enter Confirms the set password Password Delete Click this button to delete the current entry Apply New Click this button to apply the new settings Settings Restore Click this button to restore the previous settings Settings Back Click this button to return to the top page 254 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool l You can edit this item only when you click the Create button 2 This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB 3 This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button Server Address Delete Purpose To delete the server address entries registered on th
80. Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new Click this button to restart the printer and apply the settings changes I This item is available only when Display of EWS is se to On Copy Defaults Purpose To create your own copy settings Values Understanding the Tool Box Menus 447 Color Black amp White Prints in black and white mode Color Prints in color mode Select Tray Tray 1 The paper is fed from the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 The paper is fed from the optional 250 sheet feeder SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Size Ag Sets the document size loaded in the single AS sheet feeder B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch DL c5 448 Understanding the Tool Box Menus SSF Paper Type Plain Sets the document type loaded in the Plain Thick single sheet feeder Covers Covers Thick Coated Coated Thick Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain Side 2 Plain Thick Side 2 Recycled Side 2 Color Side 2 Collated off Does not sort copy job On Sorts the copy job Auto Automatically sorts the copy job Reduce Enlarge mm series Custom Sets the default enlargement reduction ratio to the custom
81. Aq Sets the document size loaded in the A5 single sheet feeder B5 Letter Folio Legal 458 Understanding the Tool Box Menus SSF Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick Coated Coated Thick Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain Side 2 Plain Thick Side 2 Recycled Side 2 Color Side 2 Sets the document type loaded in the single sheet feeder 2Sided 1 gt 1Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge Layout 1Up Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper 2Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper 4Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes I This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed 2 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Understanding the Tool Box Menus 459 Fax Settings Purpose To specify the fax settings Values Receive Telephone Sets the default fax receiving mod
82. Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site 4 If ordering by phone call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading Storing Print Media To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality there are several things you can do 614 Maintaining Your Printer e Toachieve the best possible print quality store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf rather than directly on the floor e If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl Do not place anything on top of the print media packages Storing Consumables Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them Do not store consumables in Temperatures greater than 40 C 104 F e An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature e Direct sunlight e Dusty places e Acar fora long period of time e Anenvironment where corrosive gases are present e A humid environment Replacing the Toner Cartridges A CAUTION Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell You can order cartridges online at http www dell com supplies or
83. Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock to launch Dashboard Dashboard i Da 2 Click the Plus sign to display the Widget Bar 3 Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar The Printer Status window appears K NOTE If the message Select a printer is displayed select your printer in Preferences For more information on Preferences see Preferences Estimated Toner Level PP Sr Order Supplies Closing the Status Monitor Widget 1 Click the Close x button in the upper left corner of the Printer Status window Understanding Your Printer Software 567 Printer Status Window When the Status Monitor Widget is activated the Printer Status window appears on Dashboard Estimated Toner Level Printer Status Message Area Displays a message of the current printer status K NOTE The Status Monitor Widget automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in Preferences Also the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard is launched or Preferences is closed K NOTE If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer the message Cannot get printer information is displayed K NOTE When the printer is connected via USB cable you cannot check the status of the printer during a print or scan job Printer Status Image Area Displays the image of printer condition e Estimated Toner Level image Displays the estimated toner level of
84. Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values 2 Sided Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Multiple Up Off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for Reduce Enlarge Margin Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm Top Bottom 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch Margin Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm Left Right 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Fax Defaults Purpose To create your own default Fax settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 203 Resolution Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail The su
85. Does not send or receive faxes manually On Sends or receives faxes manually Delayed Start Purpose Understanding the Printer Menus 549 To send a fax at a later time Values Off Does not send a fax at a later time On Sends a fax at a later time K NOTE A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Polling Receive Purpose To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it Values Off Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive On Receives faxes using Polling Receive Fax Cover Page Purpose To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes Values Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes On Attaches a cover page to faxes Print from USB Menu NOTE Print from USB Menu feature is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the USB port Document Purpose To specify the document stored in the root file or folder in a USB memory 550 Understanding the Printer Menus Select Tray Purpose Values Tray 1 Tray 2 1 SSF l This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed SSF Paper Size Purpose Values mm series A4 AS B5 Letter Folio Legal I Denotes country specific factory default values inch series Letter Folio Legal A4 A
86. Easy Setup Navigator Welcome Easy Setup 2 Osuidea Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Instali print driver and supporting software 2 Click Guided Setup 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 o Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Language English sai Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Product Features Troubleshooting Guide Easy Setup Navigator Welcome Easy Setup oO Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Instali print driver and supporting software Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Language English is Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Product Features Troubleshooting Guide 3 Click Connect Your Printer Installing Optional Accessories 73 Adobe Flash Player 9 _ Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Home gt Guided Setup gt Remove Tape EJ Remove Tape H Remove PHD Ribbons EJ Set Toner Cartridges E install Optional Accessories aof Load Paper E Check Setup Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer f Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Home gt Guided Setup gt Connect Your Printer EJ Remove Tape H Remove PHD Ribbons Ef Set Toner Cartridges Sele
87. Edition 1 Inthe Easy Setup Navigator window click Software Installation to launch the installation software Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 129 130 Select Network Installation and then click Next Select the model name of your printer and then click Next Select Remote Installation and then click Next a Enter the computer name user ID and password and then click Add b Click Next K NOTE Windows Security Alert may appear on Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 or Windows 7 64 bit Edition In this case select Unblock Allow access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 and then continue the procedure Select a printer from the printer list and then click Next If the target printer is not displayed on the list click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually You may specify the IP address and port name at this point Z NOTE When using AutolP 0 0 0 O is displayed in the installer Before you continue you must enter a valid IP address Specify the printer settings and then click Next a Enter the printer name b Ifyou want other users on the network to access this printer select the Share this printer with other computers on the network and then enter a share name that users can identify c If you want to set the printer as default select
88. Filter feature enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the Subnet Mask in the Address Mask field Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field is appended to the current value IP Filter Setup Procedure You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority When setting multiple filters enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address a longer address and so on Enabling Printing From a Specified User The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the 192 168 100 10 IP address 1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1 2 Enter 192 168 100 10 in the Address field and 255 255 255 255 in the Address Mask field 3 Select Permit 4 Click Apply New Settings Disabling Printing From a Specified User The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the 192 168 100 10 IP address Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool jl e227 6 7 Click the first column of the Access List row 1 Enter 192 168 100 10 in the Address field and 255 255 255 255 in the Address Mask field Select Reject Click the first column of the Access List row 2 Enter 0 0 0 0 in the Address field and 0 0 O O in the Address Mask field Select Permit Click Apply New Settings Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses You can enable printing from the 192 168 network address and disable pr
89. Guided Setup gt Remove Tape Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer gam 3 Click Connect Your Printer Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn EJ Remove Tape H Remove PHD Ribbons oE Set Toner Cartridges f E Install Optional Accessories Ed Check Setup 4 Select Wireless Connection and then click the Next button Installing Optional Accessories 71 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 _ Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Home gt Guided Setup gt Connect Your Printer E Remove Tape Select your type of connection and then 2 Remove PHD Ribbons She Neal a E Set Toner Cartridges 9 USB Connection E install Optional Accessories H Connect Your Printer Gj Load Paper Wireless Connection Check Setup Ethernet Connection The Wireless Connection window appears 5 Select Wizard and then click the Next button The instruction video starts Follow the on screen instructions to configure wireless settings Using Advanced Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter You can configure the wireless adapter with the following connection methods e Network Cable e WPS PIN e WPS PBC e Operator Panel e Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically 72 l Installing Optional Accessories 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 oo
90. Height 413 mm 16 26 inches Width 436 mm 17 16 inches Depth 451 mm 17 75 inches Weight not including cartridge and PHD unit 15 0 kg 32 47 1b Memory Base memory 256 MB Maximum memory 768 MB 256 MB 512 MB Connector 144 pin EP2 2100 DDR2 SDRAM 32b SO DIMM DIMM Size 512 MB Speed EP2 2100 Specifications 605 Page Description Language PDL Emulation Operating System and Interface PDL Emulations PCL 6 PCL5e HBPL XPS Host Based Operating Microsoft Windows XP XP x64 Server 2003 Server 2003 Systems x64 Server 2008 Server 2008 x64 Server 2008 R2 x64 Vista Vista x64 7 7 XPS Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client x86 and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 x86 Interfaces Standard local USB 2 0 Standard network 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet Optional network IEEE 802 11b 802 11g 802 11n Wireless MIB Compatibility Management Information Base MIB is a database containing information about network devices such as adapters bridges routers or computers This information helps network administrators manage the network analyze performance traffic errors and so on Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer complies with standard industry MIB specifications allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network management software systems Environment Operation Temperature 10
91. Host or Printer from the Device menu and click Continue b Type the IP address of the printer in Device URI c Format lpd xxx xxx xxx xxx the IP address of the printer For USB connections with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS a Select USB Printer 1 from the Device menu For USB connections with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Client a Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP USB 1 or Dell 2155cdn Color MFP from the Device menu Select Dell from the Make menu and click Continue Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP from the Model menu and click Continue The message Printer xxx has been added successfully appears The setup is complete Printing From the Applications When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box 148 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information on specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue 1 2 su Select Applications System Tools Terminal Type the following command in the terminal window Type the administrator password lpadmin d Type the queue name Specifying the Printing Options Y
92. However pou can enable Setup Wizard to protect your computer temote access and safely share files by unning the x Network Setup Wizard sharing Recommended Leam more about sharing and security K NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created For example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name My Pic Third level Scanning 353 folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory For Microsoft Windows XP Professional 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare and double click the folder 2 Select Folder Options from Tools File Edit View Favorites Map Network Drive ww J B Disconnect Network Drive 7 Synchronize File and Folder Tasks Folder Options 9 Make a new folder Publish this folder to the Web EZ Share this Folder 3 Click View tab and then deselect the check box of Use simple file sharing Recommended Folder Options a General View File Types Offline Files Folder views n You can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that i you are using for this folder to all folders Apply to All Folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings Do not show hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders Hide extensions for known file types Hide protected operating system files Recommended Launch folder window
93. IPv4 IP Address Sets the method for acquiring the IP Mode address Manual IP When an IP address is being set manually Address the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address ManualSubnet When an IP address is being set manually Mask the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255 255 255 255 255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask Manual When an IP address is being set manually Gateway the gateway address is specified using the Address format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address 224 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool IPv6 Enable Select the check box to enable the stateless Stateless address Address Use Manual Select the check box to set the IP address Address manually Manual Sets the IP address To specify an IPv6 Address address enter the address followed by a slash and then 64 For details consult your system administrator Manual Sets the gateway address Gateway Address DNS DNS Domain Sets the DNS do
94. If the envelope the four edges of the envelope wrinkle is is 220 mm or considered longer C5 or normal Your Envelope 10 printer is notat go to action 3a fault If the envelope is shorter than 220 mm Monarch or DL go to action 3a or 3b 2b Execute the Paper Wrinkle Check Mode Contact Dell Contact Dell to a Launch the Tool Box and click Paper replace fuser Wrinkle Check Mode on the Diagnosis tab b Click the Start button Is the paper wrinkled 708 l Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 3a Load the envelopes in the standard 250 sheet tray The task is in the short edge feed orientation with the flap complete closed and print side up For details see Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Does this solve your problem Contact Dell 3b Load the envelopes in the standard 250 sheet tray The task is in the long edge feed orientation with the flap complete open and print side up For details see Monarch or DL Does this solve your problem Contact Dell Damage on the leading edge of paper Sarna ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 When you use the SSF reverse the paper and The task is then try again complete When you use any of the trays change the paper and then try again Does this solve your problem SSF Go to action 2 trays Contact Dell 2 Change the paper with another one
95. Lighter 3 Lighter 2 Lighter 1 Makes the documents lighter than the original Works well with dark print Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darker 1 Darker 2 Darker 3 Makes the documents darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Delayed Start 00 00 23 59 21 00 Sets the fax transmission start time in 24 hour format when sending a fax at a specified time 01 00 12 AM Sets the fax transmission start time in 12 hour format 59 PM when sending a fax at a specified time 9 00 PM Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes I This item is available only when Time Format is set to 24H in the Date amp Time page 2 This item is available only when Time Format is set to 12H in the Date amp Time page Understanding the Tool Box Menus 457 Print from USB Defaults Purpose To create your own settings for Print from USB Defaults Values Color Black amp White Prints in black and white mode Color Prints in color mode Select Tray Tray 1 The paper is fed from the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 1 The paper is fed from the optional 250 sheet feeder SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Size
96. Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Purpose To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin Menu and Report List menu Values off Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt On 5 Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator 1 10 108810 USB Settings Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port Understanding the Printer Menus 521 USB Port Purpose To specify whether to enable the USB port The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Disable Disables the USB interface Enable Enables the USB interface Defaults Settings Use Defaults Settings to modify the COPY SCAN or FAX menu defaults Copy Defaults Purpose To modify the COPY menu defaults Copy Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the COPY menu Color Purpose To select color or black and white copying Values Black amp White Prints in black and white mode Color Prints in color mode Auto Expo Level Purpose To specify the default background suppression level Values 522 l Understanding the Printer Menus Normal Sets the background suppression level to Normal Higher 1 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 1
97. Media 273 2 Adjust the paper guides K NOTE Extend the rear side of the tray when you load Legal size paper 3 Before loading the print media flex the sheets and fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface 274 Loading Print Media 4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up K NOTE Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams 5 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper K NOTE When loading user specified print media adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper 6 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted insert the tray into the printer Loading Print Media 275 7 On the operator panel press or button until the desired paper size is highlighted and then press the Set button 8 Press Sw or a button until the desired paper type is highlighted and then press the Set button Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Use the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the standard 250 sheet tray and optional 250 sheet feeder K NOTE If you do not load envelopes in the standard 250 sheet tray and optional 250 sheet feeder right after they have been removed from the packaging they may bulge
98. Mshome 3 My Computer My Documents Shared Documents S Printers and Faxes Details Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers and Faxes folder The copy time varies based on network traffic and other factors 4 Close My Network Places 5 Print a test page to verify installation a Click start Printers and Faxes b Select the printer you just created c Click File Properties d On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer click Start Network 2 Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name 134 l Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers nH nn A UQ Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Click Install driver Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder The time this takes varies based on network traffic and other factors Print a test page to verify installation a Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound b Select Printers Right click the printer you just created and click Properties d On the General ta
99. PIN code displayed on the step 7 into the wireless LAN access point Registrar K NOTE For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN connection setting is completed WPS PBC You can start Push Button Control only from the operator panel K NOTE WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration is a 76 method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS Press the E Menu button Press w button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Network is highlighted and then press the V Set button Installing Optional Accessories 10 Press button until Wireless Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until WPS is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Push Button Control is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until Start is highlighted and then press the V Set button Ensure that the message PLease wait
100. Phone Number Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page FAX Group Top Page Purpose To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page Values ID Displays a fax group ID Name Displays the assigned group name Not in Use is displayed when there is no registration Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID Confirm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID FAX Group Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page or create anew entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the FAX Group top page Values Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool it e255 FAX Group ID Displays the selected group ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID or enter a new group name Delete Click this button to delete the current entry FAX Speed Dial Speed Dial List Selecting each button displays a list of entries for to the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button Speed Dial Displays the speed dial code Select the check box on the left to add the
101. Print Meter 518 Initialize NIC NVM and restart printer 238 Initialize Print Meter 443 Installing optional 250 sheet feeder 59 Installing retard roller in tray 629 Installing the optional accessories 53 Installing toner cartridge 50 Installing wireless adapter 64 Index 749 Interfaces 606 Invalid Key 435 Invalid Key Tone 180 195 422 IP Address 103 162 163 169 216 225 234 239 243 244 427 446 487 IP Address Mode 427 446 IP Filter 220 244 IP filter setup 227 IPP 218 223 226 IPsec 242 IPSec Settings 220 243 IPv4 234 243 IPv6 169 217 225 234 243 J Job Completed 435 Job Completed Tone 181 196 423 Job History 194 427 470 Job List 163 178 Job Name 178 179 Job Status 178 Job Submitted Time 178 179 Job Time Out 180 195 424 437 Job Type 178 179 750 Index Junk Fax Setup 188 206 432 461 493 L Label 191 192 210 211 268 425 440 514 515 Landscape 474 Layout 183 191 431 459 553 LCD panel 287 LDAP Server 239 240 Left frame 170 Legal 270 Letter 270 Letterhead Duplex Mode 182 197 424 438 Lighter Darker 185 187 190 202 204 208 428 430 451 455 457 539 546 549 Line Monitor 188 205 431 460 49 Line Termination 183 198 479 Line Type 188 206 431 460 492 Link Channel 236 Link Quality 236 LLTD 219 223 Loading an envelope in the SSF 281 Loading letterhead
102. Printer Jobs IPAGi Link Local Location Printer Settings Contact Person Print Server Settings Printer Status Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status Refresh Address Book Printer Information Car Cartidga Lavel 0K Tray Settings Magenta Cartridge Level OK E Mail Alert Yellow Cartridge Level OK Set Password Black Cartridge Level OK Online Help E Order Supplies at Consumables Status www dell com supplies PHD unit OK Contact Dell Support at cupsortdelliconi Paper Trays Status Capacity Size 4 Cinnln Chant Enndne AAA Panne haai Done B internet a 7 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 161 To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area use the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Enter the IP address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of printing trends If you are a network administrator you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the network using your web browser To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser If you do not know the IP address of your printer print the system settings report or di
103. Printer Sharing check box and then click OK For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 1 2 3 4 126 Click Start Control Panel Select System and Security Click Windows Firewall Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 5 If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features are dimmed click Change settings 6 Check the File and Printer Sharing check box Home Work Private or Public check box is automatically selected according to your settings If the File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears click OK 7 Click OK Start Remote Registry K NOTE This procedure is required for Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Edition Click Start Control Panel Select System and Maintenance System and Security for Windows 7 Click Administrative Tools Double click Services Click Continue for Windows Vista only Right click Remote Registry and select Start Right click Remote Registry and select Properties o un Dn A U Nel Change Startup type to Automatic and then click OK Disable User Account Control NOTICE Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to virus attacks K NOTE This procedure is required for Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7
104. Printer and select Properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers dialog box Windows XP XP x64 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 1 Click start Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer follow these steps 1 Click the Options tab and then select 250 Sheet Feeder on the Items list box Installing Optional Accessories 63 2 Select Available for the optional 250 sheet feeder setting Click Apply and then click OK 4 Close the Printers and Faxes Printers or Devices and Printers dialog box Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter The wireless adapter allows you to use the printer with wireless network connection The specifications of the wireless adapter are described below Item Specification Connectivity Technology Wireless Compliant Standards IEEE 802 11b 802 11g and 802 11n Bandwidth 2 4 GHz Data Transfer Rate IEEE 802 11n 65 Mbps IEEE 802 11g 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 and 6 Mbps IEEE 802 11b 11 5 5 2 and 1 Mbps Security
105. RB Ww Nj e 0 _ Sos space amp 378 Faxing Changing Numbers or Names If you make a mistake while entering a number or name press the lt Backspace button to delete the last digit or character Then enter the correct number or character Inserting a Pause For some telephone systems it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function For example enter the access code 9 and then press the Y Redial Pause button before entering the telephone number appears on the display to indicate when a pause is entered Setting the Time and Date K NOTE It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs To set the time and date 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button 3 Press Sg button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the y Set button 5 Press button until Date amp Time is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Ensure that Set Date amp Time is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 7 Press or button until the desired time zone is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 8 Press af or Sy button or enter the date using the
106. Scalable fonts provide the flexibility of printing in many different point sizes Your printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the printer PCL 5 PCL 6 uses Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts There are thousands of different scalable fonts available in these different font formats from numerous font suppliers If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes of scalable fonts you may need to purchase additional memory for your printer 584 Understanding Fonts Resident Fonts Your printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory Different fonts are available in PCL 5 PCL 6 Some of the most popular typefaces like Courier and TimesNew are available for all printer languages The following table lists all the fonts resident in your printer See Printing Font Sample List for instructions on how to print samples of the fonts You can select the resident fonts from your software program or from the operator panel Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts PCL 5 PCL 6 CG Times CG Omega Bdlt Coronet CG Times It CG Times Bd Garamond Antiqua Marigold CG Times Bdlt Garamond Krsv Garamond Hlb Arial Univers Md Garamond KrsvHIb Arial It Univers Mdlt Arial Bd Univers Bd Courier Arial Bdlt Univers Bdlt Courier It Univers MdCd Courier Bd TimesNew
107. Scan to Network Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned document to a computer or ftp server Phone Book for Fax Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer Group Dial for Fax Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer LDAP Server Phone Book for Fax Fax numbers registered in the phone book data through the LDAP server for sending documents from your printer PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax Understanding Your Printer Software 561 Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer e PC Fax Address Book for group for Direct Fax Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books There are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books e Operator panel of the printer e Address Book Editor e Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Services Features Types of Address Entry Registration Books Operator Address Dell Printer Panelonthe Book Editor Configurati Printer on Web Tool Scan E mail Address Book o e Email Group e Server Address Book LDAP server Network Address Book Fax Fax Phone Book Group Dial Server Phone Book LDAP server Direct Fax PC Fax Address e Book PC Fax Address o Book group Using Operator Panel of the Printer You can direct
108. Select Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder K NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name 7 Permissions for New Folder x Share Permissions Group or user names A Everyone Myself XXXX Add Bemove _ Permissions for Karin Allow Deny Full Control cai a Change V A Read E m Learn about access control and permissions Cancel Apy 11 Click OK K NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created For example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name My Pic Third level 358 Scanning folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory For Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 1 Select Go from the Finder menu and then click Home 2 Double click Public 3 Create a folder Example of folder name MyShare 4 Open System Preferences and then click Sharing 5 Select the Personal File Sharing check box and Windows Sharing check box For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare 2 Select the created folder and then select Get Info from the File menu 3 Select the Shared Folder check box 4 Open System Preferences and then click Sharing 5 Select the File Sharing check box and then click Options 6 Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes 7 Click Done
109. Select the No Proxy check box if you do not want to use a proxy e Select the Auto detect proxy settings for this network check box e Select the Manual proxy configuration check box and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy servers If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box e Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box After setting the language and proxy type lt http nnn nnn nnn nnn gt the IP address of the printer in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Up From Operator Panel You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable the factory default on the operator panel Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For more information see Understanding the Printer Menus Page Display Format The layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below e Top Frame Left Frame e Right Frame Top Frame The top frame is located at the top of all pages When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page The following items are displayed in the top frame 168 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Fle Edt view Favorites Tools Hel
110. Settings TCP IP SMB E Mail Alert Bonjour mDNS SNMP Scan to PC LLTD Wireless LAN and Reset Print Server pages Basic Information Purpose To configure basic information of the printer Values System Settings Printer Name Sets the name of the printer Location Sets the location of the printer Contact Person Sets the contact name number and other information of the printer administrator and service center Administrator Sets the contact address of the printer administrator E Mail Address and service center Asset Tag Enters the asset tag number for the printer Number EWS Settings Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages Auto Refresh Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of Interval the status display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds K NOTE The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame Printer Status page Job List page and Completed Jobs page Port Settings Purpose To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features Values 222 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Ethernet Ethernet Settings Auto Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings automatically 10BASE T Half Duplex Selects 10Base T Half Duplex as the default value 10BASE T Full Duplex Selects 10Base T Full Duplex as the default value 100BASE TX H
111. Sound Printers Start gt Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer In the list of available printers select the one you want to use and then click Next K NOTE In the list of available printers the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http IP address ws Z NOTE If no WSD printer is displayed in the list enter the printer s IP address manually to create a WSD printer To enter the printer s IP address manually follow the instructions below For Windows Server 2008 R2 to create a WSD printer you must be a member of Administrators group 1 Click The printer that I want isn t listed 2 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and click Next 3 Select Web Services Device from Device type 4 Enter the printer s IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next K NOTE Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 perform one of the following e Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer e Add the printer driver to your computer If prompted install the printer driver on your computer If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard and then click Finish
112. Start button c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound d Repeat steps b and c to perform Dispense Motor Check for the rest of the toner cartridges Z NOTE You can perform Dispense Motor Check for CMYK in any order you desire Does the dispense motor function properly Contact Dell 9 If printing many low density images execute the The task is Toner Refresh Mode complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Refresh Mode on the Diagnosis tab b Click the Yellow button under Toner Refresh Mode c Repeat step b for Magenta Cyan and Black buttons A CAUTION Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner d After you complete the Toner Refresh Mode select Chart Print from the list on the Diagnosis tab e Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Go to action 10 Troubleshooting Guide 691 Action Yes No 10 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Toner smears or print comes off ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 The print media surfac
113. To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Values 6 Sets the interval in increments of 1 second 0 255 Auto Rec Ans Fax Purpose To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Values 21 Sets the interval in increments of 1 second 0 255 Line Monitor Purpose To set the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Values off Turns off the volume of the line monitor Low Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low Understanding the Printer Menus 491 Medium Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium High Sets the volume of the line monitor to High Ring Tone Volume Purpose To set the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Values Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone Low Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low Medium Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium High Sets the volume of the ring tone to High Line Type Purpose To select the default line type Values PSTN Uses PSTN PBX Uses PBX Tone Pulse Purpose To select the dialing type Values
114. To specify the temperature settings value for the fuser Values Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within the range of 2 to 2 Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper within the range of 2 to 2 210 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within the range of 2 to 2 Covers Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick cover paper within the range of 2 to 2 Label Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the range of 2 to 2 Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within the range of 2 to 2 Coated Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick coated paper within the range of 2 to 2 Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the range of 2 to 2 Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within the range of 2 to 2 Auto Registration Adjustment Purpose To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment Color Registration Adjustments Purpose To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved K NOTE The Color Registration Adjustments feature c
115. UNTE andthe Replace the PHD unit Toner Cartridg Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 921 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact Customer Support Multifunction Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the printer error Check operator panel TREAPHD Unit andthe Replace the PHD unit Toner Cartridg Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 922 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contact Customer Support An internal Please wait for a while until falling in temperature temperature of th printer became a high temperature 042 700 is displayed on the Status Monitor Contacting Service When you call for printer service be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message that appears You need to know the model type and service tag of your printer See the label located inside the side door of your printer 732 Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide 733 734 l Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide lv 735 736 l Troubleshooting Guide Appendix 737 738 Appendix Dell Technical Support Policy Technician assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system software program and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell as we
116. Univers MdCdIt Courier BdIt TimesNew It Univers BdCd TimesNew Bd Univers BdCdIt LetterGothic TimesNew Balt LetterGothic It AntiqueOlv LetterGothic Bd Symbol AntiqueOlv It AntiqueOlv Bd Albertus Md Wingdings Albertus XBd CG Omega CG Omega It Clarendon Cd CG Omega Bd Understanding Fonts 585 Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts PCL 5 PCL 6 Times Roman Palatino Roman N C Schbk Roman Times It Palatino It N C Schbk It Times Bd Palatino Bd N C Schbk Bd Times Bdlt Palatino Bdlt N C Schbk Bdlt Helvetica ITCBookman Lt ITC A G Go Bk Helvetica Ob ITCBookman LtIt ITC A G Go BkOb Helvetica Bd ITCBookmanDm ITC A G Go Dm Helvetica BdOb ITCBookmanDm It ITC A G Go DmOb CourierPS HelveticaNr ZapfC Madlt CourierPS Ob HelveticaNr Ob CourierPS Bd HelveticaNr Bd ZapfDingbats CourierPS BdOb HelveticaNr BdOb SymbolPS Symbol Sets A symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special characters available in the font you select Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific applications such as math symbols used for scientific text In PCL 5 PCL 6 a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard or more specifically for each code point Some applications require different characters at some code points To support multiple applications and languages your printer has 36 symbol sets f
117. amp Photo Photo Item Description Scanning method Charge coupled device CCD module Scanner Specifications Item Description Compatibility TWAIN Windows Image Acquisition WIA Scan Resolution Optical 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1 200 dpi x 1 200 dpi Enhanced 9 600 dpi x 9 600 dpi Gray and Color only in TWAIN Color bit depth 24 bit WIA TWAIN Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art 8 bit for Gray scale Effective scanning length Document glass 297 mm ADF 355 6 mm Effective scanning width 215 9 mm Scan speed Text mode Monochrome 665 us line 600 dpi 1330 ps line 1200 dpi Color 1330 ps line 600 dpi 2660 us line 1200 dpi Facsimile Specifications Item Description Compatibility ITU T Super G3 ITU T G3 ECM ITU T G3 Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN behind Private Automatic Branch Exchange PBX or Leased line 3 4 KHz 2 wire Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG Max modem speed 33 6 Kbps Transmission speed Approx 3 seconds page Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU T No 1 Chart Specifications 609 Item Description Scanning speed Document glass approx 3 seconds A4 at standard fax resolution mode ADF approx 5 seconds Letter at standard fax resolution mode 7 5 seconds Letter at fine fax resolution
118. an e mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention To set up e mail alerts 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 2 Click E Mail Alert link 3 Under E Mail Server Settings enter the Primary SMTP Gateway Reply Address and your or key operator s e mail address in the e mail list box 4 Click Apply New Settings K NOTE Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network Before Installation Before you start remote installation perform the following procedures 124 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections K NOTE This procedure is required for Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Edition For Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 1 5 6 Open the Run dialog box For Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 click start All Programs Accessories Run For Windows Vista click Start Run Type goedit msc and then click OK Click Computer Configuration Administrative Templates Printers Right click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Properties On the
119. and Cautions 27 As for RSA BSAFE RSA BSAFE software produced by RSA Security Inc has been installed on this printer RESTAN SECURED UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 1i of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 and in applicable FAR provisions Dell Inc One Dell Way Round Rock Texas 78682 USA September 2010 Rev A01 28 Notes Notices and Cautions Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide Click the links to the left for information on the features options and operation of your printer For information on other documentation included with your printer see Finding Information To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell K NOTE For Macintosh start the Status Monitor Widget and then select Order Supplies button to open Order window 1 Double click the icon on your desktop If you cannot find the icon on your desktop follow the procedure below a Click DLRMM EXE under x abc Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Reorder where x abc is the location where the printer software is installed b Click File on the toolbar and click Create Shortcut on the drop down menu c Right click the shortcut icon d Ch
120. and then press the y Set button Please Enter Name appears Enter the sender name and then press the V Set button Connecting Your Printer 101 The printer automatically restarts after resetting your regional clock and registering the fax information 102 Connecting Your Printer Setting the IP Address K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Assigning an IP Address An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section for example 111 222 33 44 You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack IPv4 and IPv6 If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6 select Dual Stack Select the IP mode of your environment and then set IP address subnet mask for IPv4 only and gateway address NOTICE Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues K NOTE Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator When Using the Easy Setup Navigator 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically 2 Click Advanced Tools on the Easy Setup Navigator window The Advanced Tools window opens Setting the IP Address 103 3 4 Adobe Flash Player 9 EDR
121. and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk Understanding the Printer Menus 509 Recurrence Daily Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAN disk daily Weekly Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk weekly Monthly Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print monthly Weekly Settings Monday Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Tuesday Secure Print Friday Saturday Sunday Monthly Settings 1 Day Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as 2 28 Day Secure Print in the RAM disk ColorTrack Mode Purpose To specify who has access to color printing Values Off Does not limit access to color printing On Limits access to color printing No Account User Print Purpose To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information Values off Does not permit non account user to print the data On Permits non account user to print the data 1 Set No Account User Password using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 510 Understanding the Printer Menus Color Track Error Rep Purpose To specify whether to automatically print error related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an erro
122. answer the call and hear fax tones the printer will answer the fax call if you Set OnHook to On you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine and then press the gt Start button and hang up the receiver OR Press the two digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver Faxing 415 Using a Computer Modem OCO AM a oF Ba To the Computer Printer Line Telephone Phone Internet Answering Device If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial up internet connection connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above e Set your printer to the Ans Machine Fax and set Auto Rec Ans Fax to specify the time for the TAD Turn off the computer modem s fax receive feature Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax e Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem Printing a Report The following reports may be useful when using fax K NOTE For more information on other reports see Reports e Speed Dial e Address Book e Server Address e Fax Activity e Fax Pending e Print Meter 416 Faxing Speed Dial This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of your printer as speed dial numbers You can print this Speed Dial list from the operator panel For de
123. appears Locating the IP Address Setting of Your Computer You can locate the IP address of your computer by the following operations 1 Click Start Run For Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start Run For Windows Vista Windows 7 Click Start gt All Programs Accessories Run Type cmd in the text field and click OK A command prompt window will open 3 Type ipconfig and press Enter 360 Scanning 4 Write down the IP Address xxx xxx XxX XXX Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Open a web browser 2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and press the Enter key The web page of the printer appears K NOTE For details on how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer 3 Click Address Book If a security login dialog box appears type in the correct User Name and Password K NOTE The default user name is admin and the default password is left blank NULL File gdt view Favorites Tools Help Q O x A seach groes R BE Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 TJE JIE Jh ed Printer Jobs IPv6 Link Local tet s Eii aA Location Printer Settings Contact Person lt gt Print Server Settings Diera Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Inform Print Volume Printer Information Refr Address Book Dell Service Tag Number
124. cable and if the IP address of the server is correct Understanding Printer Messages 595 031 578 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if login name user name and password are correct 031 579 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if storage location is correct 031 580 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check server access right 031 581 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Change file name and forwarding destination folder or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder 031 582 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location Check if storage location has free space 031 584 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location Check if the folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists 031 585 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 031 587 recover Check server access rights 031 588 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if storage location has free space 031 590 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the p
125. change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next 11 Ifyou do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it 12 Click Next Installation starts 122 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 13 14 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page Click Finish Windows 7 or Windows 7 64 bit Edition 1 na A UO N 10 11 12 13 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start Devices and Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Select printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 8 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 6 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or host name and then click Next Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Yes otherwise contact your administrator to continu
126. connect an external telephone to the phone connector on the back of your printer If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your printer hears a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive a fax K NOTE If you have set your printer to Ans Machine Fax and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to your printer your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector on the back of your printer You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to go to the printer When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones press the two digit keys on the external telephone or set OnHook to Of f and then press the gt Start button The printer receives the document Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing the two digit keys once again The remote receive code is set to Of f at the factory You can change the two digit number to whatever you choose For details on changing the code see Available Fax Settings Options K NOTE Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF Faxing 405 Receiving Faxe
127. docu ment name is not specified Secure Receive K NOTE Before enabling Secure Receive ensure that Panel Lock Set is enabled Purpose To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes and to set or change the password Values Password Enters the password to access the confidential job Copy Menu Use the COPY menus to configure a variety of copy features K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Select Tray Purpose To specify the input tray 534 Understanding the Printer Menus Values Tray1 The paper is fed from the standard 250 sheet tray Tray2 The paper is fed from the optional 250 sheet feeder SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder I This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed SSF Paper Size K NOTE SSF Paper Size feature is available only when print media is inserted in the single sheet feeder Purpose To specify the default paper size of the single sheet feeder Values mm series Aa A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env DL Env C5 Env l Denotes country specific factory default values inch series Letter Understanding the Printer Menus l 535 Folio Legal A4 A5 B5 Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env DL Env C5 En
128. document glass 724 Troubleshooting Guide Message appears on your computer screen Device can t be set to the H W mode you want Port is being used by another program Port is Disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed There may be a copying or printing job in progress When the current job is complete try the job again The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the port is properly connected and the power is turned on Then restart your computer Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly The printer does not properly transfer scan data to a specified destination via the Scan to E mail or Scan to Network feature Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Scan to Network Check the following settings under Address Book gt Server Address e Server Address Share Name e Server Path e Login Name Login Password Scan to E mail Check the following setting under Address Book gt E Mail Address e Address Troubleshooting Guide 725 Cannot scan using WIA ona Enable WIA on
129. e CUPS Common Unix Printing System Installing the Status Monitor Console 1 Activate the terminal and log in as a super user 2 Type the following rpm command in the terminal window rpm ivh Type the package file name 572 Understanding Your Printer Software Starting the Status Monitor Console 1 Click Dell Printers Status Monitor Console The Printer Selection window appears For more information on Printer Selection window see Printer Selection Window 2 Select your printer The Printer Status window appears For more information on Printer Status window see Printer Status Window e You can order supplies from the Dell Supplies Management System window See Dell Supplies Management System Window Printer Selection Window PrintenSelection Printer Name Status Model Name URI Ready Dell 215Scdn Color MFP pd E SS Sal ea Se Settings Details Refresh Close Printers list All the printers registered in the CUPS Common UNIX Printing System are displayed in a list e Status icons Ready 4 Unknown Offline Toner Low Paper Low E3 Door Open Paper Jam No Toner Out Of Paper Settings button Click this button to open the Settings window Understanding Your Printer Software 573 Details button Click this button to open the Printer Status window If a non supported printer is selected it opens the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For details
130. e Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 e Microsoft Windows 7 e Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 Procedures For FTP 1 Setting a Destination Using an Address Book 2 Sending the Scanned File on the Network For SMB 1 Setting a Login Name and a Password SMB Only 2 Creating a Shared Folder SMB Only 3 Setting a Destination Using an Address Book 4 Sending the Scanned File on the Network Setting a Login Name and a Password SMB Only The Scan to Network feature requires a user login account with a valid and non empty password for authentication Confirm a login user name and password 350 Scanning For Microsoft Windows Log On to Windows Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corporation User name Password If you do not use a password for your user login you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the following procedure For Windows XP 1 Click start Control Panel User Accounts 2 Click Change an account 3 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account For Windows Vista and Windows 7 1 Click Start Control Panel 2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety 3 Click User Accounts 4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account For Windows Server 2008 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Double click User Accounts 3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for
131. each color if the printer is functioning properly ae GZ NOTE If the utility does not receive a response from the printer the Unknown toner image is displayed 568 Understanding Your Printer Software e Printer error image Displays an indication image when an error occurs Yi An error has occurred and the printer requires your attention to correct a problem An error has occurred and the printer cannot be used am An unknown error has occurred and the printer cannot be used Order Supplies button Click this button to display the Order window To hide the Order window click Order Supplies again Info i button Click this button to open Preferences Z NOTE The info i button appears on the lower right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window The info i button is a standard used across all widgets Order Window This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site To open the Order window 1 Click the Order Supplies in the Printer Status window The Order window appears K NOTE The Order window appears when low toner is detected Understanding Your Printer Software 569 Order Online oe Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site a ee http Accessories us dell com sna PrinterSeg aspx iE Order By Phone To order Dell printer supplies by phone call the following o 877 INK 2YOU U
132. emitted when the operator panel input is correct Off indicates that the tone is disabled Invalid Key Tone Understanding the Tool Box Menus Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect Off indicates that the tone is disabled Machine Ready Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready Off indicates that the tone is disabled Copy Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete Off indicates that the tone is disabled Job Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than copying is complete Off indicates that the tone is disabled Fault Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally Off indicates that the tone is disabled Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs Off indicates that the tone is disabled Out of Paper Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper Off indicates that the tone is disabled Low Toner Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low Off indicates that the tone is disabled Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear Off indicates that the tone is disabled Base Tone
133. enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name Myself Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Erom this location Locations Enter the abject names to select examples Myself Check Names Canc Click OK K NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name Scanning 355 12 Click on the user login name that you have just entered Select Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder Permissions for MyShare Share Permissions Group or user names Ef Everyone G Myself XXXX m Permissions for Karin Allow Deny Full Control 7 Change Read 13 Click OK K NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created For example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name My Pic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory For Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Zz 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare 2 Right click on the folder and then select Properties The Properties dialog box appears 356 Scanning New Folder Properties General Sharing Security Previous Versions Cust
134. express service code number Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of your printer Printer Type Displays the type of printing for the printer Color Laser is displayed normally Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of your printer Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity Understanding the Tool Box Menus 421 Processor Speed Displays the processing speed Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version MCU Firmware Version Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit MCU firmware Printing Speed Color Displays the speed for color printing Printing Speed Displays the speed for monochrome printing Monochrome Menu Settings Purpose To display the menu settings of the printer Values System Settings Power Saver Timer Sleep Displays the amount of transition time 422 to the Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job Power Saver Timer Deep Displays the amount of transition time Sleep between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode Power Saver Wake Up Displays whether to wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is Off Auto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made Control Panel Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is
135. is complete the window is automatically closed 150 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser Type the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Printer Printer setup Autodetected printers is activated For network connections a Click Add b Select Network Printers as Printer Type and click Next c Select the Print via LPD Style Network Server as Printer Type and click Next d Type the IP address of the printer in Host name of the printer server e Type the name of the printer queue in Name of the remote queue and click Next f Type the printer name in Name for printing K NOTE The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified g Select the Do Local Filtering check box and click Next h Select DELL as Select manufacturer Select 2155cdn Color MFP as Select Model and click Next i Confirm the settings in Edit configuration and click OK For USB connections a Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP on USB Dell 2155cdn 20Color 20MFP or dev usblp as Available are and click Configure b Confirm the settings in Edit configuration and click OK 5 Click Finish Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Comp
136. is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press or W button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the y Set button Inch series Auto Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 A4 210 x 297mm A5 148 x 210mm B5 182 x 257mm Executive 7 3 x 10 5 mm series Auto A4 210 x 297mm 322 Copying A5 148 x 210mm B5 182 x 257mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 3 x 10 5 Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Original Type To select the copy image quality 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the BB Copy button Press button until Original Type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press gy or Sy button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Set button Text Used for documents with text Text amp Photo Used for documents with both text and photos Photo Used for documents with photos Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Lighter Darker
137. l Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Goto action 2 Contact Dell Configuration Chart a Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does the output match with the pattern for auger mark 2 Execute the Clean Developer The task is Go to action 3 a Launch the Tool Box and click Clean complete Developer on the Diagnosis tab b Click the Start button c After you execute the Clean Developer click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab d Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem 3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD complete Unit and Installing a PHD Unit Does this solve your problem Wrinkled Stained paper Troubleshooting Guide 707 J TI ai moss nii le Action Yes No 1 Verify that the correct print media is being used The task is Ifprinting on an See Supported Paper Types If not use the print complete envelope go to media recommended for the printer action 2a Does this solve your problem If printing on print media other than envelopes go to action 2b 2a Check the wrinkle Is the wrinkle within 30 mm of This type of
138. mail Alert SMTP Server Displays the status of the SMTP server connection Connection 230 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool E Mail Alert E Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e mail Settings addresses for the E Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive List 1 an E Mail Alert for consumables Paper Handling Select the check box to receive Alerts an E Mail Alert for paper handling Service Call Select the check box to receive an E Mail Alert for Service Calls E Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e mail addresses for the E Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive List 2 an E Mail Alert for consumables Paper Handling Select the check box to receive Alerts an E Mail Alert for paper handling Service Call Select the check box to receive an E Mail Alert for Service Calls l This item is available only when POP before SMTP Plain or POP before SMTP APOP for E Mail Send Authentication is selected Bonjour mDNS Purpose To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour Host Name Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and dash The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 231 Printer Name Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characte
139. millimeter as the default measurement unit Inches Selects inch as the default measurement unit K NOTE The default for mm inch varies depending on other settings such as Country and Document Size Default Print Paper Size Purpose To specify the default paper size Values mm series Aq Letter l Denotes country specific factory default values inch series A4 Letter l Denotes country specific factory default values Auto Log Print Purpose To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs Values Off Does not automatically print a job history report On Automatically prints a job history report Print logs can also be printed using the Admin Reports menu 506 Understanding the Printer Menus Print ID Purpose To specify a location where the user ID is printed Values off Does not print the user ID Top Left Prints the user ID on the top left of the page Top Right Prints the user ID on the top right of the page Bottom Left Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page Bottom Right Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page K NOTE When printing on DL size paper a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly Print Text Purpose To specify whether the printer outputs PDL data which is not supported by the printer as text when the printer receives it Text data is printe
140. numerical value that can be changed e An On or Off setting Press ig or button until the desired value is highlighted and then press the Set button K NOTE Some menu items require you to use the numeric key pad to enter the value Press the Cancel or lt button to return to the previous menu To continue setting other items select the desired menu To quit setting new values press the Cancel button Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings If your printer is connected to the network you can change the printer settings from your web browser If you are a network administrator you can clone the system settings of one printer to one or all the printers on the network 306 Printing Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser Choose Printer Settings from the topics list and then select the System Settings you want to change To change the paper type and size choose Tray Settings from the topics list To change the Color Track settings choose Print Volume from the topics list and then select the Dell Color Track tab To copy your system settings to another printer on the network choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list and then type the other printer s IP address If you do not know your printer s IP address see the system settings
141. of high density magenta 428 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Color Balance Cyan Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density cyan Color Balance Cyan Middle Dens Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan Color Balance Cyan High Dens Displays the color balance level of high density cyan Color Balance Black Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density black Color Balance Displays the color balance level of medium density Black Middle black Dens Color Balance Displays the color balance level of high density black Black High Dens 2Sided Displays whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper Multiple Up Displays whether the Multiple Up feature is enabled Margin Displays the value of the top and bottom margins Top Bottom Margin Displays the value of the left and right margins Left Right Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin Scan Defaults Scan To Displays whether to save scanned documents on a Network network server or on a computer File Format Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white Color Button Displays whether to scan in black and white or in Set Black amp grayscale when Black amp White is selected for a color White Button mode Understanding the Tool Box Me
142. on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Refresh button Click this button to update the information of printers Close button Click this button to close the Printer Selection window Printer Status Window When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window the Printer Status window appears Printer Status for dell Printer Status for dell D LL Printer Status Estimated Toner Level Estimated Toner Level Ready to print eas m siii con B 2 c magenta MD magenta v viw viw E Replace the toner cartridge Order Online Yay Order Supplies Online ga _ Refesh Close Retesh Close Printer Status Message Area Displays a message of the current printer status K NOTE The Status Monitor Console automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in the Settings window Also the printer status is refreshed when the Refresh is clicked K NOTE If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer the message Cannot get printer information is displayed 574 Understanding Your Printer Software Printer Status Image Area e Current Toner Status icons Displays icons of the current status of each toner S The toner level is more than 30 The toner level is less than 29 E3 The toner level is less than 9 G The toner level is unknown Estimated Tone
143. on the network Using the setup disk that you have created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver e Install the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the same operating system Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems Software Update The firmware and or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web site located at support dell com 558 Understanding Your Printer Software Printer Settings Utility You can open the Status Window Tool Box Updater Troubleshooting Address Book Editor ScanButton Manager and Dell ScanCenter using the Quick Launch Utility window K NOTE Quick Launch Utility is only supported on Windows To use the Quick Launch Utility select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software For information about installing the software see Setting Up for Shared Printing To open the Quick Launch Utility window 1 Click Start gt All Programs Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Quick Launch Utility Quick Launch Utility DOLL Status Window Tool Box Updater Troubleshooting Settings Quick Launch Utility Support Tools AIO Utility o Address Book ScanButton Editor Manager nie S
144. page Values Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button ID Displays the server ID Name Displays the file directory name Not in Use is displayed in Name when there is no registration Server Address Displays the address of the file directory Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID Confirm Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected Change server ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID Server Address Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page or create anew entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the Server Address top page Values Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool jt 253 ID Displays the selected server ID Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID or enter a new server name Server Type Allows you to view the server type if you click the Confirm Change button Allows you to edit the server type if you click the Create button FTP Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol SMB Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message Block SMB protocol Server Address
145. print mix sized documents Using Booklet Print Dell 2155cn and 2155cdn Models To use the booklet print feature select Booklet Creation in the Booklet Poster Mixed Document dialog box displayed by clicking the Booklet Poster Mixed Document button Flip on Long Edge binding position is selected by default If you want to change the position select Flip on Short Edge from the Duplex menu in the printer properties dialog box K NOTE For Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer select Paper Source or Auto to use the booklet printing feature For Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer select Paper Source You cannot select Auto or SSF for booklet printing K NOTE When XPS driver is used booklet print is not available Flip on Long Edge Assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation The following illustration shows long edge binding for portrait and landscape pages Portrait Landscape 296 Printing Flip on Short Edge Assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation The following illustration shows short edge binding for portrait and landscape pages Portrait Landscape Using the Stored Print Function When you send a job to the printer you can specify in the driver that you want the printer to store the job in the memory When you are ready to pri
146. regular printing items can be configured using the printer driver K NOTE Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus Enabling the Panel Lock 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Understanding the Printer Menus 553 K Press Sg button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press gf button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press button until Enable is highlighted and then press the V Set button Enter the new password and then press the Set button NOTICE Be sure to remember the password The procedure described below allows you to reset the password but the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared Turn off the printer Then while holding the Ej Menu button turn on the printer Perform steps 8 and 9 Re enter the password to confirm the password that you entered and then press the Set button The password has been changed NOTE If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable perform steps 1 to 5 above Press button until Change Password is highlighted and then press the vA Set button
147. report or display the TCP IP settings When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the A Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs gt Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple Pp p printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open 3 Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page appears Printing 307 Resetting Defaults After resetting defaults and rebooting the printer all the menu parameters except the parameters for the network are reset to their default values When Using the Operator Panel 1 2 Press the Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press g button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the V Set button
148. resident fonts in PCL 5 PCL 6 See Resident Fonts for a listing of all resident fonts Weight and Style Typefaces are often available in different weights and styles These variations modify the original typeface so you can for example emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles The different weights and styles are designed to complement the original typeface Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters Thicker lines result in darker characters Some words commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold medium light black and heavy Style refers to other typeface modifications such as tilt or character width Italic and oblique are styles where the characters are tilted Narrow condensed and extended are three common styles that modify the character widths Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications for example Helvetica BdOb A group of several weight and style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family Most typeface families have four variations regular italic oblique bold and bold italic bold oblique Some families have more variations as the following illustration for the Helvetica typeface family shows Understanding Fonts 581 Helvetica ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOabcdefghijkimno1 234567890 Helvetica Oblique ABCDEFGHIUKLMNOabcdefgnijkimno 1234567890 Helvetica Bold ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOabcdefghijkimno1234567890 Helvetica Bold Oblique ABCDEFGH
149. selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly you can avoid paper jams See the following instructions on loading print media e Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Loading Print Media in the SSF e Avoiding Jams If you encounter a paper jam see Clearing Jams Printing 291 Sending a Job to Print To support all of the printer features use the printer driver When you choose Print from a software program a window representing the printer driver opens Select the appropriate settings for the specific job that you are sending to print Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings you can change If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window open the online Help for more information To print a job from a typical Microsoft Windows application 1 Open the file you want to print 2 From the File menu select Print 3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box Modify the system settings as appropriate such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies 4 Click Preferences to adjust system settings that are not available from the first screen and then click OK 5 Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer C
150. server check box K NOTE When using AutolP O O O O is displayed in the installer Before you can continue you must enter a valid IP address K NOTE In some cases Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 or Windows 7 64 bit Edition In this case select Unblock Allow access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 and then continue the procedure 6 Specify the printer settings and then click Next a Enter the printer name b Ifyou want other users on the network to access the printer select Share this printer with other computers on the network and then enter a share name that users can identify c Ifyou want to set the printer as the default printer select the Set this printer as default check box d Ifyou want to restrict color printing select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option Enter the password when Color Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack e Ifyou want to install the Fax Driver select the Fax Driver check box 7 Select the software and documentation you want to install and then click Install If you want to change the installation destination click Browse and specify a new location 8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations screen appears To print a test page click Print Test Page Installing Printer Drive
151. signed certificate on the Gen erate Self Signed Certificate page 2 3 Enable This button is grayed out after you generate the self signed certificate on the Gener ate Self Signed Certificate page This button is available only when HTTP SSL TLS Communication is set to SSL TLS Generate Self Signed Certificate Purpose To generate a self signed certificate Values Generate Size of Public Key Sets the size of public key Self Signed Certificate Issuer Sets the issuer of the self signed certificate Generate Signed Certificate Click this button to generate the signed certificate Back Click this button to go back to the previous page Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 241 SSL TLS Certificate Details Purpose To refer to the contents of the certificate or delete the certificate Values Certificate Category Displays the category of the device to certificate Details Issued To Displays the device to certificate Issuer Displays the issuer of the self signed certificate Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device Size of Public Key Display the size of public key Valid From Displays the time the certificate is valid Valid Until Displays the time the certificate is invalid Status Displays whether the certificate is valid or not Certificate Purpose Displays the purpose of certificate Certificate Selection Displays the
152. the Address Book menu to view or edit the e mail address server address and fax number entries in the Address Book or to register new entries K NOTE You must log in as an administrator to use this feature Printer Information Use the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls inventory reports or the status of current memory and engine code levels Tray Settings Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray 164 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool E Mail Alert Use the E Mail Alert menu to receive e mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention To be notified type your name or the name of the key operator in the e mail list box Set E mail Alert also when using the Scan to E mail feature Set Password Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected K NOTE You must log in as an administrator to use this feature Online Help Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website Order Supplies at www dell com supplies Contact Dell Support at support dell com Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool0 Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser befo
153. the jammed paper from the inside of the printer 664 Clearing Jams b gt ray 2 Remove the standard 250 sheet tray from the printer and then pull out the jammed paper remaining inside the printer If no jammed paper can be found or you are unable to remove the paper go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer Clearing Jams 665 3 Push the side button to open the front cover 4 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer Pri g a Z AN Clearing Jams 667 7 Insert the standard 250 sheet tray into the printer and push until it stops NOTICE Do not use excessive force on the tray Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard 250 Sheet Tray NOTICE Protect the drums of the Print Head Device PHD against bright light If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer carefully Hold the tray with both hands lift the front slightly and remove it from the printer 668 Clearing Jams 3 Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it If you are still unable to remove the pap
154. the printer 6 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90 degrees clockwise to lock the PHD unit 624 Maintaining Your Printer 7 Remove the front protective cover from the PHD unit NOTICE Ensure that you do not hit the belt unit when removing the front protective cover Maintaining Your Printer 625 9 Close the front cover 626 Maintaining Your Printer Replacing the Retard Roller Keeping the retard roller in the paper tray clean helps ensure the best possible copies It is recommended to clean the retard roller at regular intervals A CAUTION To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance A CAUTION Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide Dell retard rollers are available only through Dell To order by phone see Contacting Dell Maintaining Your Printer 627 It is recommended to use Dell retard rollers for your printer Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell Removing the Retard Roller in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray 1 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the standard 250 sheet tray with both hands and remove it from the printer K NOTE Ensure that you remove all the paper from the standard 250 sheet
155. the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes Reset Defaults Purpose To initialize wired network data stored in non volatile memory NVM After executing this function and rebooting the printer all wired network settings are reset to their default values Values Reset System Initializes the system parameters Defaults Section User Fax Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book Section User Scan Initializes the e mail and server address entries in the Section Address Book 442 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Non Dell Toner NOTICE Using a non Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non Dell toner cartridges Purpose To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer Values Non Dell off Disables the use of another manufacturer s toner Toner cartridge On Enables the use of another manufacturer s toner cartridge Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new Click this button to restart the printer and apply the settings changes Initialize Print Meter Purpose To initialize the Print Meter When the print meter is initialized the meter count is reset to 0 Values Initialize Print Meter Click Start to i
156. the width of custom size paper The available range is from 77 mm 3 0 inch to 215 mm 8 5 inch Orientation Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font Font Size Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts Font Pitch Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 197 Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page Quantity Sets the number of copies to print Image Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature Enhancement Hex Dump Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem With Hex Dump selected all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation Control codes are not executed Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode Line Sets how to handle line terminations Termination Default Color Sets the print color mode as Color or Black This setting is used for print jobs without a specified color print mode PDF Settings Purpose To change the PDF settings Values Quantity Sets the number of copies 2 Sided Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Print Mode Sets a print mode PDF Password Sets a password Re enter PDF Password Confirms the set password Collated Sets whether to sort the output Out
157. type of device certificate you Status selected Delete Click this button to delete the self signed certificate Back Click this button to go back to the previous page IPsec Purpose To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol IPsec for encrypted communication to the printer Values 242 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol IKE Sets IKE authentication IKE is fixed to Pre Shared Key Pre Shared Key Sets a shared key Up to 255 alphanumeric characters periods and hyphens can be used Re enter Pre Enters the shared key again to confirm it Shared Key IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28 800 minutes IPsec SA Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2 880 Lifetime minutes DH Group Sets the DH group PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting Remote peers Sets the IP address to connect to IPv4 address Remote peers Sets the IP address to connect to IPv6 address Non IPsec Allows communication with a device which communication does not support IPsec policy K NOTE If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings you must disable it using the Reset IPsec menu on the operator panel 802 1x Purpose To specify the settings for IEEE 802 1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer Values Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 24
158. variable value between 0 and 65 535 Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap l The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool SNMP v3 Purpose To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol To enter this page click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page Values 234 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Administrator Account Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the administrator account User Name Enters the user name of the administrator account Authentication Password Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Re enter Authentication Password Confirms the set password Privacy Password Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Re enter Privacy Password Confirms the set password Print Drivers Account Remote Client Enabled Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account Account Reset to default Password Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account to default Scan To PC Purpose To specify the client when scanning data Values FTP Client Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 60 Time Out seconds FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Pa
159. verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version This page can also be displayed by clicking on the Printer Information tab in the left frame Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 177 Values Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell service tag number Express Service Code Displays Dell express service code Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity Processor Speed Displays the processing speed Printer Revision Firmware Version Displays the revision date revision level Levels Network Displays the revision date revision level Firmware Version Printer Jobs The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs Job List Purpose To confirm the print jobs that are being processed Click the Refresh button to update the screen Values ID Displays the job ID Job Name Displays the file name of the job being printed Owner Displays the name of the job owner Host Name Displays the name of the host computer Job Status Displays the status of the job being printed Job Type Displays the type of the job Host I F Displays the status of the host interface Job Submitted Time Displays the da
160. will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Read Write Community is private Re enter Enters the community name to access read and Community write data again to confirm it Name Read Write Community Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 Name Trap alphanumeric characters The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for Community Name Trap in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Trap Community is NULL Re enter Enters the community name used for trap again to Community confirm it Name Trap Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 233 Trap Trap Address Notification 1 4 Type Trap Address Port Number Notify Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence In this case specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format IPv4 Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn nnn nnn nnn mmmmm format Each section of nnn is a variable value between 0 and 255 Note that values 127 and 224 254 are not valid for the first three digits only IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65 535 IPv6 Specify the IP address and IP socket in the XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX MMM mm format Each section of xxxx is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff IP socket mmmmm is a
161. your user login account For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Control Panel Scanning 351 Select User Accounts Click User Accounts Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account For Mac OS X 10 3 9 1 Click System Preferences Accounts 2 Enter a password for your user login account in Password 3 Re enter the password in Verify For Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 1 2 3 4 Click System Preferences Accounts Select Change Password Enter a password for your user login account in New password Re enter the password in Verify Creating a Shared Folder SMB Only Create a shared folder to store the scanned document from your printer For Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition 1 352 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare Right click on the folder and then select Properties The Properties dialog box appears Click on the Sharing tab and then select Share this folder on the network Enter a shared name in the Share name box K NOTE Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure Scanning MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security To share this folder with other users of this computer ID rly draa k to the Shared Documents folder To make this folder and its subfolders private so that only you have access s
162. 0 110 5000 65535 POP User Name ae POP User Password ee Re enter POP User Password Reply Address Cee Gent with every E Mail SMTP Server Connection Connection pending until printer sends an alert 2 Specify the settings for E Mail Alert as follows Primary SMTP Gateway Enter the IP address of the e mail server E Mail Send Authentication Specify Invalid to enable the e mail server K NOTE Ifan error message including 016 506 or 016 764 is displayed contact your server administrator for the settings for E Mail Send Authentication 3 Click the Apply New Settings button Registering a New User 1 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Address Book and then click the E Mail Address tab 2 Click the Create button The E Mail Address page for registering a new user appears Scanning 371 4 rinter Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 os i Printer Jobs IPV6 Link Local umi n a Location Printer Settings Contact Person wi t gt e Print Server Settings eTe z cy Copy Printer Settings EMail Address E Mail Group Default Setup Print Volume E Mail Address Address Book gt O01 Now Ragictration Name Printer Information AS Tray Settings Criw Settings Restore Setings E E Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at www dell comisupplies Contact Dell Support at support dell com a
163. 0 sheet tray 024 947 Insert the optional 250 sheet feeder 026 721 Check your USB memory e If the file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB memory If your USB memory is write protected 027 452 Change IP address to avoid duplication Turn off the printer and turn it on 027 446 oe 031 521 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Confirm login able computer with your system administrator 031 522 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if login name domain name and user name and password are correct 031 523 Press the V Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the share name you specified 031 524 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the number of users who use the server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit 031 525 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage location 031 526 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check DNS connection or check if forwarding destination server is registered with DNS 031 527 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Set DNS address or set forwarding destination server address as IP address Understanding Printer Messages 593
164. 0M4B increments of 50 MB K NOTE Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu Substitute Tray Purpose Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job Values 508 Understanding the Printer Menus Off No tray size substitute accepted Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size When there is no larger paper size the printer substitutes paper of nearest size Nearest Size Substitutes paper of nearest size Set Available Time Purpose Sets the available time for the Print Copy Scan and Fax services Values x Off Does not set the time when printing is available On Sets the time when printing is available Start Time Sets the start time of the available time End Time Sets the end time of the available time Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting K NOTE Set Available Time can be configured when Print Copy Scan or Fax is set to On Secure Job Expiration K NOTE Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to Enable Purpose To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk Values Expiration Mode Off Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk On Sets the date
165. 18 point 12 point 10 point The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the bottom of the lowest character in the font Due to the definition of point size different fonts printed at the same point size may appear quite different in size This is because there are other font parameters that affect how the font looks However the point size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of a font The following examples illustrate two very different proportional fonts at 14 point ITC Avant Garde abcdefghABCDEFGH ITC Zapf Chancery abcdefgh ABCDEFGH Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts The printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a specific size style and resolution The following illustration shows an example of a character from a bitmapped font Understanding Fonts 583 Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts Scalable fonts also called outline fonts are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the characters in the font Each time you print characters from a scalable font the printer creates a bitmap of the characters at the point size you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory P Ppp These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the printer
166. 192 425 443 518 Numeric keypad 286 0 OCR 263 One Touch Dial button 285 OnHook 549 Online Help 165 171 Operation 606 Operator panel 41 Operator Panel Buttons 285 Optical character recognition 263 Optional 250 sheet feeder 40 660 Order Supplies at 165 171 752 Index Ordering supplies 44 614 Orientation 182 197 474 Original Type 202 428 450 539 OS 606 OS compatibility 605 Other problems 730 Out of Paper 436 Out of Paper Alert Tone 423 Out of Paper Tone 181 196 Output Color 183 Output Result 179 Output Size 183 Output Tray 177 Owner 178 179 P Page display format 168 Page orientation 266 279 Panel 487 Panel Language 182 197 424 439 530 Panel Lock Set 184 199 519 Panel Settings 194 426 469 Panel Settings page 194 287 Paper 261 Characteristics 261 Curl 261 Fiber content 262 Grain direction 262 Moisture content 262 Smoothness 262 Weight 261 Paper Density 191 209 425 513 Paper jam location 660 Paper Size 182 197 466 472 Paper Tray 182 Paper Type 271 466 Paper Used 246 Parts name 39 Password 227 235 238 240 244 PCL 472 Font 475 PCL 5 PCL 6 585 PCL Fonts List 194 426 469 PCL Macro List 194 427 469 PCL printer driver 115 118 PCL Settings 182 197 PDF Fonts List 194 427 PDL 606 Peer to Peer 136 Phone Book 249 471 Phone connector 41 92 95 607 Pitch Configurat
167. 210 x 297 mm FAX Setting Transmission image quality High Quality Transmission report Output for non transmission Fax Cover Page Settings Address Book Printer Status Restore Defaults OK Cancel ll Help For Apple Macintosh Transmission image quality High Quality Transmission report Output for non transmission Fax Cover Page Settings _ Fax Cover Page None Sender According to Printer Settings Sender Name Address Book Restore Defaults a Transmission image quality Purpose To set the output quality Values Faxing 399 Standard For documents with normal sized characters High Quality For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super high image For documents containing extremely fine detail The super fine quality mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution See the notes below Denotes the factory default setting K NOTE Faxes printed in the Super high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device b Transmission report Purpose To specify whether to print a fax transmission result Values Output regularly Prints a transmission result after every fax transmission Output for non Prints a transmission
168. 25x 9 5in Y N Y N N N N Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in ye N Y N N N N DL 110 x 220mm y N Y N N N N C5 162 x 229mm Y N Y N N N N Custom Y Y Y N N N N 1 Custom width 76 2 mm 3 0 inch to 215 9 mm 8 5 inch length 127 0 mm 5 0 inch to 355 6 mm 14 00 inch 2 Monarch LEF and DL LEF are not available 270 Print Media Guidelines Supported Paper Types Paper type Single sheet Standard Optional Duplexer feeder 250 sheet 250 sheet tray feeder Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Plain Light Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Normal Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Thick Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Covers Normal Y Y N N Thick Y Y N N Coated Normal Y N N N Thick Y N N N Label Normal N Y N N Thick N Y N N Envelope Y Y N N Recycled Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Letterhead Y Y Y Y Preprinted Y Y Y Y Prepunched Y Y Y Y Color Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N K NOTE For Plain and Label paper you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density Light or Normal under Printer Maintenance from the operator panel Tool Box or Dell Configuration Web Tool Once you set the Paper Density settings the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper Paper Type Specifications Paper type Weight g m Remarks Plain 60 90 Plain Thick 80 90 105 Recycled 60 105 Print Media Guidelines 271
169. 28Bit is highlighted and then press the y Set button b Enter the WEP key and then press the vA Set button c Select the transmit key from WEP Key 1toWEP Key 4 To use WPA PSK TKIP or WPA PSK AES encryption a Press button until WPA PSK TKIP or WPA PSK AES is highlighted and then press the Set button b Enter the passphrase and then press the vA Set button Select the encryption type from No Security WEP 64Bit andWEP 128Bit When you do not set security for your wireless network a Ensure that No Security is highlighted and then press the Y Set button To use 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption a Press Sg button until WEP 64Bit orWEP 128Bit is highlighted and then press the Set button b Enter the WEP key and then press the vA Set button c Select the transmit key from WEP Key 1toWEP Key 4 When the operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN connection setting is completed Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser Click Print Server Settings Click Print Server Settings tab Click Wireless LAN and then enter the SSID Installing Optional Accessories Select the network type from Infrastructure and Ad Hoc 6 Select the encryption type from No Security WEP WPA PSK AES and WPA PSK TKIP and then set each item fo
170. 3 Configure Enable IEEE Select the check box to enable IEEE 802 1x 802 1x 802 1x authentication Authentication EAP MD5 Selects the authentication method to Method EAP MS Se for IEEE 802 1x authentication CHAPv2 PEAP MS CHAPv2 Login Name Sets the login name device name for IEEE 802 1x Device Name authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters Password Sets the login password for IEEE 802 1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters Re enter Confirms the set login password Password IP Filter IPv4 Purpose To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer Values Access List Address Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field Address Mask Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field Active Mode Reject Rejects printing from specified network address Permit Permits printing from specified network address Disabled Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address 244 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Copy Printer Settings The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages Copy Printer Settings Purpose To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model
171. 4 9 8 7 1 Data LED 2 Ready Error LED 3 J button 4 A W button 5 o Set button 6 X Cancel button 7 gt Start button 8 lt gt Backspace button 9 AC All Clear button 10 Back button 11 LCD panel 12 Menu button l The Error LED is on the right and blinks when an error occurs 2 Displays up to 4 line by 16 character messages when an error occurs Understanding Printer Messages 589 Error Code What you can do 004 310 Turn off the printer Confirm that the optional 250 sheet feeder is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 004 311 Turn off the printer Confirm that the duplexer is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 004 312 Turn off the printer and turn it on again Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 005 110 Remove the remaining documents from the ADF 005 121 005 124 009 360 Turn off the printer Confirm the yellow cartridge is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 009 361 Turn off the printer Confirm the magenta cartridge is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 009 362 Turn off the printer Confirm the cyan cartridge is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer suppor
172. 439 Time Zone 192 425 440 Time Out 226 227 240 503 Tone Pulse 188 206 431 461 492 Toner access cover 40 Toner cartridge 50 Index 757 Toner Refresh 212 Toner Refresh Mode 467 Tool Box 560 Top frame 168 Trap Notification 234 Tray Custom Size X 193 259 426 445 Tray 1 Custom Size Y 193 259 426 445 Tray Display Popup 259 426 445 Tray l Paper Size 193 259 426 444 Tray Paper Type 193 259 426 444 Tray 2 Display Popup 259 426 445 Tray 2 Paper Size 259 426 445 Tray 2 Paper Type 259 426 445 Tray Settings 164 171 193 259 426 526 Troubleshooting 560 685 Typeface 581 U Unacceptable paper 263 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS 28 Update 560 Cc pdate Address Book 219 223 227 pper Limit for Color Print 247 mo ce pper Limit for Monochrome Print 248 USB 607 USB Port 182 197 USB port 41 92 93 USB printing 115 User Registration 246 U ser setup disk creating tool 558 Cc sing Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 163 V Verifying IP settings 106 W Wall jack connector 41 92 94 607 Warranty 740 Warranty information 32 Web Link Customization 193 214 Web Services on Devices 601 Weekly Settings 201 WEP 237 Index 758 White sheet 641 Width guide 110 275 WINS 217 226 Wired Network Ethernet 482 IP Filter 489 Protocol 487 Reset LAN 489 TCP IP 486
173. 5 440 Shared printing 131 Sharpness 185 190 202 208 428 430 451 455 540 546 Side button 40 Single Sheet Feeder 661 Single Sheet Feeder SSF 40 slow scan 644 645 SMB 219 223 MB Client 220 235 NMP 219 223 NMP Configuration 232 NMP UDP 488 S S S S Index 756 Software update 558 Speed Dial 194 SSF Paper Size 185 191 201 317 428 431 448 458 535 SSF Paper Type 185 191 201 318 428 431 449 459 536 SSID 236 SSL TLS 220 241 Standard 250 sheet tray 0 661 Start 465 466 Start Time 200 Status Monitor Console 557 Status Monitor Console for Linux 571 Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh 565 Status of printer supplies 613 Status Window 560 Storage 607 Storage humidity range 607 Stored Documents 194 427 471 Storing consumables 615 Storing print media 269 291 614 Straightest lines 644 Subnet Mask 427 446 487 Substitute Tray 182 196 424 438 508 509 Supported print paper 270 SUSE 605 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 150 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 154 Symbol Set 182 197 476 586 For PCL 5 PCL 6 586 System Settings 180 194 195 222 422 426 469 System Settings page 194 System settings report 56 61 67 T TCP IP 224 TCP IP Settings 216 224 Telephone 205 Telephone Fax 205 Telnet 219 223 227 Temperature 606 TIFF File Format 190 208 430 456 Time Format 192 425
174. A driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software K NOTE The Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver is supported only on Windows To scan an image from the drawing software 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document 2 Start the drawing software such as Microsoft Paint for Windows K NOTE When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft Paint 3 Click File gt From Scanner or Camera Paint button From scanner or camera for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 The Scan using Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner window appears 346 Scanning G I gt Scan using LAN Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner What do you wantto scan laannan q Paper source Flatbed Select an option below for the type of picture you want to scan BAL Color picture th Grayscale picture g Black and white picture or tet p Custom Settings You can also Adjust the quality of the scanned picture K NOTE The screen image may vary depending on the operating system 4 Select your desired type of picture that you want to scan and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the Advanced Prop
175. A4 A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive inch series Auto Letter Folio 538 Understanding the Printer Menus Legal A4 A5 B5 Executive I Denotes country specific factory default values K NOTE When Auto is selected the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray or single sheet feeder Original Type Purpose To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document Values Text Used for documents with text Text amp Photo Used for documents with both text and photos Photo Used for documents with photos Lighter Darker Purpose To make the copy lighter or darker than the original Values Lighter3 Works well with dark print Lighter2 Lighter1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Darker3 Understanding the Printer Menus 539 Sharpness Purpose To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original Values Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the copy softer than the original Color Saturation Purpose To adjust the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter than the or
176. Box Menus 437 438 Substitute Tray Off No tray size substitute accepted Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size When there is no larger paper size the printer substitutes paper of nearest size Nearest Size Substitutes paper of nearest size mm inch Millimeters mm Selects millimeter or inch as the default Inches measurement unit Default Print Aq Sets the default print paper size Paper Size Letter ColorTrack off Does not automatically print error Error Report related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error On Automatically prints error related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error Letterhead Disable Does not prints on both sides of a sheet Duplex Mode of letterhead paper Enable Prints on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper Low Toner Alert On Shows the alert message when the toner Msg is low Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low Email From Field Enable Displays whether to enable editing of Disable the transmission source when you use Scan to E mail Server Address On Enables the server address book Book off Disables the server address book Server Phone On Enables the server phone book Book off Disables the server phone book Understanding the Tool Box Menus Panel Language English Sets the language to be used on the operator panel Frenc
177. Canada only e Anonymous file transfer protocol FTP ftp dell com Log in as user anonymous and use your e mail address as your password Warranty and Return Policy Dell Computer Corporation Dell manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry standard practices For information about the Dell warranty for your printer see support dell com Recycling Information It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware monitors printers and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products components and or materials For specific information on Dell s worldwide recycling programs see www dell com recyclingworldwide Contacting Dell You can access Dell Support at support dell com Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses World Wide Web 740 Appendix www dell com www dell com ap Asian Pacific countries only www dell com jp Japan only www euro dell com Europe only www dell com la Latin American and Caribbean countries www dell ca Canada only Anonymous file transfer protocol FTP ftp dell com Log in as user anonymous and use your email address as your password
178. Change printer settings 306 Changing the settings of menu item 172 Clean Developer 212 467 Clear Storage 213 Clearing jam 659 From ADE 661 From duplexer 676 From fuser 672 From optional 250 sheet feeder 677 From SSE 664 From standard 250 sheet tray 668 Clock Settings 192 Coated 191 192 210 211 514 515 Coated Thick 191 192 210 211 514 515 Collated 183 185 201 428 449 Color 185 190 191 201 208 427 429 431 448 454 458 Color Balance 428 429 452 Color Button 190 208 Color Button Set 454 Color Button Set Black amp White Button 429 Color Button Set Color Button 430 Color Mode 466 Color Mode Limitation 247 Color Reg Adjust 515 Color Regi Chart 212 Color Registration Adjustments 211 212 Color registration chart 643 Color Saturation 185 202 428 451 540 Color Test Page 194 427 470 ColorCount Limit 247 ColorTrack Error Report 193 246 424 438 ColorTrack Mode 193 246 Community Name 232 233 Completed Jobs 163 179 Confidential jobs 531 Configure 802 1x 244 configuring wireless adapter 69 Index 745 Connecting local printer 92 Connecting printer 91 Connecting to the Network 94 Connection specification 91 607 Connection type 91 607 Conserving supplies 613 Contact Dell Support at 165 171 Contact Person 169 Contacting service 732 Contrast 190 208 430 455 546 Control board 41 Control board cove
179. Check the light fatigue pattern using the Pitch Go to action 2 Contact Dell Configuration Chart a Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does the pattern on the output match with that on the Pitch Configuration Chart 702 l Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 2 Execute the PHD Refresh Mode The task is Go to action 3 a Launch the Tool Box and click Refresh complete Mode on the Diagnosis tab b After you start the Drum Refresh Mode click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem 3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD complete Unit and Installing a PHD Unit Does this solve your problem Fog ABG DIETE Action Yes No 1 Execute the PHD Refresh Mode The task is Go to action 2 a Launch the Tool Box and click Refresh complete Mode on the Diagnosis tab b After you start the Drum Refresh Mode click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 703 Action Yes No 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Conta
180. Click Continue Installation to continue the installation When the Install Succeeded screen appears click Logout to complete installation Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers l 141 Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 When Using a USB connection 1 2 Turn on the printer Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer When Using IP Printing 1 2 y AU RA W 10 Turn on the printer Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Fax Click the Plus sign and click IP Select Line Printer Daemon LPD for Protocol Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP for Print Using K NOTE When printing is set up using IP printing the queue name is displayed as blank You do not need to specify it Click Add Specify the options that have been installed on the printer and then click Continue Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print amp Fax dialog box When Using Bonjour 142 1 2 Turn on the printer Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connecte
181. Click Next to start scanning Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Scanning to Network K NOTE This feature does not require a network scan driver 348 Scanning Overview The Scan to Network feature allows you to send the scanned documents to a computer or FTP server Computer s s FTP Server D Scan G Using FTP E Using SMB mE Required operating systems Lae For FTP K NOTE For information on how to configure the FTP service refer to the manual provided with the software K NOTE Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows XP Windows Vista Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 support IPv4 only e Microsoft Windows XP Professional FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5 1 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6 0 e Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2008 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7 0 Scanning 349 e Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7 5 e Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 FTP service of Mac OS X For SMB K NOTE Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows XP Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 support IPv4 only e Microsoft Windows XP e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 e Microsoft Windows Vista e Microsoft Windows Server 2008
182. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings 031 547 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings 031 548 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings 031 549 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover On server security settings check access permission of null password user 031 550 031 551 Press the v Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check append access right to the file Check if server supports SMB append command 031 552 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Change the file name that already exists on FTP server 031 574 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check DNS connection or check if name of forwarding destination server is registered with DNS 031 575 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Set DNS address or set forwarding destination server address as IP address 031 576 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server For example check connection of network
183. Contrast Press button until OnHook is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press 4 or w button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the remote fax machine s fax number using the numeric keypad If the document is loaded on the ADF press the gt Start button If the document is not loaded on the ADF press the gt Start button press or W button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the V Set button Faxing K NOTE You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by pressing the Cancel button K NOTE Pressing the gt Start button does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax service is locked For details see Set Available Time for the Available time and Function Enabled for the Fax service Confirming Transmissions When the last page of your document has been sent successfully the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode If something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display If you receive an error message press the Cancel button to clear the message and try to send the document again You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission For further details see Printing a Report Automatic Redialing If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the printer wi
184. Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Darker3 Denotes the factory default setting 392 Faxing Sending a Fax Automatically 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Press the amp Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution For adjusting the contrast see Adjusting the Document Contrast To select a fax number do one of the followings e Ensure that Fax to is highlighted and then press the va Set button Press g button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the V Set button e Press the One Touch Dial button and go to step 6 You need to register a speed dial number before you can use the One Touch Dial button For details see Setting Speed Dial e Press the m Contacts button and select one of the followings All Entries Displays a list of registered fax numbers e Group Dial Displays a list of registered group dial numbers e Search Local Searches a fax number from the local Phone Book e Search Server Searches a fax number from the LDAP server This item is displayed when Server Phone Book is On e Press the Y Redial Pause button to redial and go to s
185. Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide www dell com support dell com Contents Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide 1 Before Beginning 25 A Notes Notices and Cautions 1 Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide 29 2 Finding Information 31 3 Product Features 5 cine te poe a Rae Pow 35 4 About the Printer 39 Front and Rear View ooa 40 Front View 2 2 0 ee ee 40 Rear View 0000 4 41 Space Requirements 41 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 42 Operator Panel cerise dendei eee ene ed 43 Securing the Printer 20 0 c ee eee eee 43 Contents 1 Ordering Supplies 0 0 e cece eee eee 43 Setting up the Printer Printer Setup 47 5 Preparing Printer Hardware 49 Removing Tape 49 Removing the Print Head Device PHD Ribbons 50 Installing the Toner Cartridges 50 6 Installing Optional Accessories 53 Installing the Optional Memory Module 53 Printing System Settings Report 56 Updating Your Driver to Detect Memory Module 58 Installing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder 59 Printing System Settings Report 61 Updating Your Driver to Detect 250 Sheet Feeder 63 Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter 64 Verifying the Contents of the Box
186. Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu Off indicates that the tone is disabled Fault Time out Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally Understanding the Tool Box Menus 423 424 Job Time out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer Panel Language Displays the language that is used on the operator panel screen Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL Page Description Language data which is not supported by the printer as text when the printer receives it Banner Sheet Insert Displays where to insert the banner Position sheet Banner Sheet Specify Displays the banner sheet tray Tray RAM Disk Displays whether to allocate RAM for the disk file system for the Secure Print and Proof Print features Substitute Tray Displays an indication to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job mm inch Displays the measurement unit used on the operator panel Default Print Paper Size Displays the default print paper
187. Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Option Description Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 0 second Auto Rec Tel Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 6 seconds Auto Rec Ans Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 21 seconds Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Line Type You can select the default line type PSTN PBX
188. E Favorites B Scanner Defaults Delete Saye Defaults J Defaut al Size 24 0 MB Preview Scan Close For Apple Macintosh e Basie Scanning Image Quality Image Options Pixels are aJa Scan from Cad Betis mea tH B Document Glass Z H i Image Type 24 bit Full Color f H Scan Size H Letter 8 5 x 11 B Resolution i A 300 FA dpi i Reduce Enlarge i 100 FR x H a a a i Be or Bi Default All Ww 2550 H 3300 Size 24 1MB Settings C About ___ Preview Scan Close K NOTE The screen image may vary depending on the operating system 7 Inthe Basic Scanning tab set the desired preferences and click Preview to display the preview image 8 Adjust the settings in the Image Quality and Image Option tabs Scanning 341 9 Click Sean to start scanning 10 When the scanning is completed click Close to exit the window 11 Click Done to close the PaperPort Scan window The scanned image is automatically saved in the specified location If you want to scan more pages follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Scan Setting Tool You can check the IP address of the printer or set the password using the Scan Setting Tool To open the Scan Settings To
189. Env DL Env L C5 Env Custom Size Understanding the Printer Menus 527 Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick Label Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Recycled S2 Color S2 Display Popup Off Does not display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray On Displays a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray I Denotes country specific factory default value Ty sp y K NOTE For more information on supported paper sizes see Supported Paper Sizes Tray 2 K NOTE Tray 2 feature is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed 528 Understanding the Printer Menus Purpose To specify the paper loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Values Paper Size mm series inch series A4 A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Letter Folio Legal A4 A5 B5 Executive Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Recycled S2 Color S2 Understanding the Printer Menus 529 Display Popup Off Does not display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in t
190. IJKLMNOabcdetghijkimno1234567890 Helvetica Narrow ABCDEFGHUKLMINOabcdefghijkimno 1234567890 Helvetica Narrow Oblique ABCDEFGHIJKLMN Oabodefghijkimno 1234567890 Helvetica Narrow Bold ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOabcdefghijkimno1234567890 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOabcdefghijkimno 1234567890 Pitch and Point Size The size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size depending on whether the font is fixed space or proportional In fixed space fonts each character has the same width Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts It is a measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type For example all 10 pitch fonts print 10 characters per inch cpi and all 12 pitch fonts print 12 cpi Courier 10 Pitch 1234567890 Courier Bold 10 Pitch 1234567890 Courier 1 Pitch 173456789012 Courier Bold 12 Pitch 123456789012 4 1 inch In proportional or typographic fonts every character can have a different width Since proportional fonts have characters with different widths the font size is specified in point size not pitch Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font A point is defined as 1 72 inch The characters in a font printed at 24 point will be twice as large as the characters in the same font printed at 12 point The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes 582 Understanding Fonts 48 point 36 point 24 point
191. If you set 0 this mode is disabled LDAP Server Purpose To specify the settings of the LDAP server Values Server IP Address Sets IP address or the host name and the port Information Host Name amp address The port address must be 389 3268 or for Server Port between 5 000 and 65 535 Address Phone Backup IP Sets backup IP address or the host name and the Book Address Host port address The port address must be 389 3268 or Name amp Port between 5 000 and 65 535 LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 239 Optional Search Enters the search directory root Information Directory Root for Server Login Name Enters the login name of the administrator Address Phone Password Enters the administrator password using to 127 Book alphanumeric characters If the password is left blank NULL you cannot log in to a server Re enter Enters the administrator password again to confirm Password it Search Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time Time Out specified by the LDAP server Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds Search Name Sets the search order Order Server Address Select the check box to enable the server address Book book Server Phone Select the check box to enable the server phone Book book K NOTE Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the
192. K NOTE Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL This may damage the printer To use a DSL you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter Contact your service provider for the DSL filter 1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the wall jack connector and the other end into an active wall jack 94 Connecting Your Printer Wall jack connector To the wall jack 2 Remove the Blue plug from the phone connector Phone connector Blue plug PHONE G 3 To connect a telephone and or answering machine to your printer plug the telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector T Connecting Your Printer Phone connector To an external telephone or answering machine PHONE S If the phone communication is serial in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland and that you are supplied with a Yellow terminator insert the Yellow terminator into the phone connector Phone connector Yellow terminator PHONE G 96 l Connecting Your Printer Turning on the Printer A CAUTION Do not use extension cords or power strips A CAUTION The printer should not be connected to a UPS system 1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of the printer and then to a power source 2 Turn on the printer When the printer is connected via a USB Uninterruptible Power Supply cab
193. Media 273 Capacity 2 tenes ee a eed Mi acl tte hy Boa 4 273 Print Media Dimensions 273 Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder spiras bog sande deere 273 Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder 276 Loading Letterhead Pre Printed and Pre Punched Paper 278 Loading Print Media in the SSF 280 Loading an Envelope inthe SSF 281 Using the SSF 002 283 Linking Trays ee 284 16 Operator Panel 3 220544 s4e55445 43 285 Using the Operator Panel Buttons 285 Contents Printing a Panel Settings Page 287 When Using the Operator Panel 287 When Using the Tool Box 2 2 287 Printing Copying Scanning and Faxing 289 Ly PHOUNS 3 4 24 4 hie Soke EER eR EE RS 291 Tips for Successful Printing 2 291 Tips on Storing PrintMedia 291 Avoiding Paper Jams 291 Sending a Job to Print 002 292 Canceling a Print Job 0 00 e ee eee 292 Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel 292 Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows 293 Duplex Printing 293 Duplex Printing With Duplexer Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Only 294 Duplex Printing Without Duplexer Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Pri
194. Modem Speed Displays the modem speed Country Displays the country where the printer is used Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and out going fax communications Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Fax Protocol Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 189 190 Scan Defaults Scan To Network Displays whether to save scanned documents on a network server or on a computer File Format Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white Black amp White Displays whether to scan in black and white or in Button grayscale when Black amp White is selected for a color mode Color Button Displays whether to scan in color or in color Photo when Color is selected for a color mode Resolution Displays the default scan resolution Document Size Displays the paper size of the original Lighter Darker Displays the default scan density level Sharpness Displays the defa
195. NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page The System Settings page appears Select the desired language from Panel Language and then press the Apply New Settings button Printing 309 310 Printing Copying Loading Paper for Copying The instructions for loading documents are the same whether you are printing faxing or copying For more details see Print Media Guidelines Selecting Paper Tray After loading the print media for copy output select the desired paper tray to be used for the copy job To select the tray 1 Press the gt Copy button 2 Ensure that Select Tray is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press or button until the desired tray is highlighted and then press the Set button You can select Tray 1 Tray 2 or SSF Tray 2 is only available when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed Preparing a Document You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder ADF to load an original document for copying scanning and sending a fax You can load up to 35 sheets of
196. Optional Memory Module A CAUTION When you remove the optional memory module be sure to turn off the printer unplug the power cable and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off and unplug all the cables including the power cable from the back of the printer 2 Turm the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise 3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer Removing Options 649 4 Open the control board cover completely 5 Push the clips on both sides of the slot outward to raise the memory module up 650 Removing Options 6 Hold the memory module and pull it straight out 7 Close the control board cover and then slide it towards the front of the printer Removing Options 651 8 Turn the screw clockwise 9 Turn on the printer Removing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder AN CAUTION When you remove the optional 250 sheet feeder be sure to turn off the printer unplug the power cable and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable Then disconnect all cables from the back of the printer 2 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 3 Remove the two screws joining the printer and the optional 250 sheet feeder by u
197. Prefix Dial Num Purpose To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number dials before any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Purpose To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the output paper Values Off Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it On Discards any excess images or text Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size ECM Purpose To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode ECM To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM Values Off Disables the ECM On Enables the ECM Modem Speed Purpose To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Values 2 4 Kbps 498 Understanding the Printer Menus 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 14 4Kbps 33 6 Kbps Country Purpose To select the country where the printer is used Values Algeria Hungary Puerto Rico Australia Iceland Romania Austria Ireland Russia Belgium Italy Saudi Arabia Bulgaria Jamaica Slovakia Canada Jordan Slovenia Colombia Latvia South Africa Costa Rica Liechtenstein Spain Cyprus Lithuania Sweden Czech Republic Luxembourg Switzerland De
198. Press button until Reset Defaults is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press ig or button until the desired value is highlighted and then press the Set button The Are you sure message appears on the operator panel Press y button to highlight Yes and then press the Y Set button The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings When Using the Tool Box EZ 1 308 NOTE Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box Z NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page The Reset Defaults page appears Select the desired option button l Printing The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings Adjusting the Language To display a different language on the operator panel Using the Operator Panel 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press Sw button until Panel Language is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until the desired language is highlighted and then press the Y Set button When Using the Tool Box K
199. Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD 601 Adding Roles of Printer Services Printer Setup 2 2 0 20 0 0000 602 Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 602 27 SPSCitications y 4 h ocho Gh dea eee eS 605 Operating System Compatibility 605 Power Supply 000 605 Dimensions 4 i pag ww eae gh ag Gu 605 Memory vy ge bee ee Pere ce eh et 605 Page Description Language PDL Emulation Operating System and Materace 1 28 sa cbse Ee Atiran a EAE E 606 Contents 19 MIB Compatibility 606 Environment 2 0 606 Operation ses er Ae Soe a RO aS 606 Print Quality Guarantee 606 Storages a wi is Ao SPF ah ek A SA 607 Altitude 2 0 0 00 2 0000 607 Cables testi 4 oe Re ee hag 607 Copier Specifications 608 Scanner Specifications 609 Facsimile Specifications 609 Maintaining Your Printer 611 28 Maintaining Your Printer 613 Determining the Status of Supplies 613 Conserving Supplies 0 00 c ee eee eee 613 Ordering Supplies 00 ce eee eee eee 614 Storing Print Media 0 000 c eee eee 614 Storing Consumables 0 00000 e eee 615 Replacing the Toner Cartridges 0 615 Removing the Toner Cartridge 616 Installing a Toner Cartridge 617 Replacing the Print Head D
200. Replace Soon Black Cartridge Level Replace Now Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now Consumables Status OK Indicates that the status of PHD unit is OK for use Replace Soon Indicates that the PHD unit needs to be replaced soon Replace Now Indicates that the PHD unit needs to be replaced now 176 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Paper Trays Status OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown Add Indicates that there is no paper in the tray Paper Paper Indicates that paper is running low in the tray Low Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray Size Displays the size of paper in the tray Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available Full Indicates that the tray is not available Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed Open Indicates that the cover is open Printer Type Displays the type of the printer Color Laser is displayed normally Printing Speed Displays the printing speed Printer Events Purpose When faults occur such as Out of Paper or Cover is Open the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page Values Location Displays the location where a fault occurred Details Displays the details of the fault Printer Information Purpose To
201. Report List menu to print various types of reports and lists System Settings Purpose To print a list of the current user default values the installed options the amount of installed print memory and the status of printer supplies Panel Settings Purpose To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus PCL Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of the available PCL fonts See also Understanding Fonts Printing Font Sample List PCL Macro List Purpose Understanding the Printer Menus 469 To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro PDF Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of the available PDF fonts Job History Purpose To print a detailed list of the print copy fax or scan jobs that have been processed This list contains the last 20 jobs Error History Purpose To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors Print Meter Purpose To print the reports for the total number of pages printed Color Test Page Purpose To print a page for testing colors Protocol Monitor Purpose To print a detailed list of monitored protocols Speed Dial Purpose To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers Address Book Purpose 470 Understanding the Printer Menus To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information Server Address Purpose To print the list of all members stored as Server Address in
202. S B5 Understanding the Printer Menus 551 1 Denotes country specific factory default values SSF Paper Type Purpose Values Plain Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick Coated Coated Thick Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Recycled S2 Color S2 2Sided K NOTE 2Sided feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Purpose To print on both sides of a sheet of paper Values 1 gt 1Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper 552 Understanding the Printer Menus Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge Layout Purpose To specify the output layout Values 1Up Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper 2Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper 4Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper PDF Password Purpose To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job Values Enter PDF Password Enter the password to print the secure PDF job Panel Lock This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator For regular printing items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged For
203. S Communication Port SSL TLS Number Communication Port Number IPsec Settings Protocol Displays the protocol status IKE Displays IKE authentication 802 1x Enable IEEE Displays the status of IEEE 802 1x 802 1x Authentication Displays the setting of authentication method for Method IEEE 802 1x IP Filter Access List Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted dPv4g or denied access to the printer 2 3 4 5 6 7 This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network This item is displayed when IPv4 Mode is selected This item is displayed when IPv6 Mode is selected This item is displayed only when Use Manual Address is set to Enable This item is displayed only when an IP address has been assigned This item is available only when using IPv6 dual mode 8 This item is available only for LPD or Port9100 E Mail Alert Setup Page Purpose To verify the current settings of SMTP POP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Post Office Protocol used for the e mail feature and E Mail Alerts feature In this page you can only verify the settings of items If you want to change the settings go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab Values 220 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool E Mail Server Port Status Displays the port status Settings Primary SMTP Display
204. Setting a Destination Using an Address Book You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor Before beginning to setup a destination make sure you have the IP addresses you need such as printer and computer Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer To setup the server address book through the network you will first need to locate the IP address of the printer You can obtain this IP address from the system settings report by performing the following steps Scanning 359 When Using the Operator Panel 1 2 Press the Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple Pp p printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Ensure that the Printer Settings Reports tab is open Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page
205. Setting tab select Enabled and then click OK Restart the computer For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 1 Open the Run dialog box For Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start Run For Windows 7 click Start All Programs Accessories Run Type goedit msc and then click OK Click Computer Configuration Administrative Templates Printers Right click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Edit Select Enabled and then click OK Restart the computer Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 125 Share the Firewall File and Printer K NOTE This procedure is required for Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Edition For Windows XP 1 2 3 4 Click start Control Panel Select Security Center Click Windows Firewall On the Exceptions tab select the File and Printer Sharing check box and then click OK For Windows Vista 1 Dn nA A W N Click Start Control Panel Select Security Click Windows Firewall Click Change settings Click Continue On the Exceptions tab select the File and Printer Sharing check box and then click OK For Windows Server 2008 A WwW N Click Start Control Panel Double click Windows Firewall Click Change settings On the Exceptions tab select the File and
206. Settings e Print Server Settings e Copy Printer Settings e Print Volume e Address Book e Printer Information e Tray Settings e E Mail Alert Set Password e Online Help e Order Supplies at e Contact Dell Support at Printer Status Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status When a toner cartridge is running low click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge Printer Jobs Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 163 These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job Printer Settings Use the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely Print Server Settings Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communications Copy Printer Settings Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by typing the IP address of each printer K NOTE You must log in as an administrator to use this feature Print Volume Use the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing such as paper usage the types of jobs being printed limit to which users can use the color mode and the maximum number of pages they can print Address Book Use
207. Settings Using the Easy Setup Navigator You can specify the country line type tone pulse receive mode DRPD pattern fax header name and fax number 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically 2 Click Advanced Tools on the Easy Setup Navigator window The Advanced Tools window appears Adobe Flash Player 9 E raaa ae DLL Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Welcome Language English Easy Setup Advance Setup Perey O Guided setup instructions tose More Information optionat accessories setup O Software Installation Users Guide Install print driver and supporting software troubleshooting Guide Product Features Click Fax Configuration 4 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen Available settings are e Country e Line Type e Tone Pulse Faxing 375 e Receive Mode e DRPD Pattern This setting is available only when a distinctive ring service is installed on your telephone line by your telephone company e FAX Header Name FAX Number K NOTE To make initial settings from the printer operator panel see Setting Your Country Setting Your Country Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press f
208. To print samples of all the fonts currently available for your printer When Using the Operator Panel 1 2 Press the Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press Sw button until PCL Fonts List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The PCL fonts list is printed Printing 303 When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open 3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears 4 Click the PCL Fonts List button The PCL fonts list is printed The message Send Printer Information appears while the page prints The printer returns to the standby mode after printing the font sample list Printer Settings You can change most of the system settings from your software program If your printer is attached to the network you can change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool type the printer s IP address in your
209. Troubleshooting Guide 685 Basic Printer Problems 2 685 Display Problems 685 Printing Problems 686 Print Quality Problems 2 688 The output istoolight 689 Toner smears or print comesoff 692 Random spots Blurred images 693 The entire output is blank 2 694 Streaks appear on the output 2 2 696 Part or the entire output is black 2 2 697 Pitched color dots 698 Vertical blanks 2 2 0 2 699 Ghosting e tanun a ee a h 701 Light induced fatigue 702 OB ee seh ote Cag th A di Se ie ae BR 703 Bead Carry Out BCO 704 Jagged characters 705 Banding 706 Auger mark 000 706 Wrinkled Stained paper ooa a 707 Damage on the leading edge of paper 709 Jam Alignment Problems 00005 710 22 Contents The top and side margins are incorrect 710 Color registration is out of alignment 710 Images areskewed 0 712 Standard 250 Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam 712 SSF MisfeedJam 714 Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam 716 Regi Jam Exit SensorOnJAM 717 Exit Jam Exit Sensor OffJAM 717 Standard 250 Sheet Tray Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Multi feed Jaa Sleek tod ech eee awe Se Te 718 SSF Multi feedJam 00
210. V file WAB file MAPI or a LDAP server For details on LDAP server see LDAP Server and Server Phone Book K NOTE Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the fax service is locked with a password To lock the fax service with a password 1 2 8 Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press Sg button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until Function Enabled is highlighted and then press the Set button Press Sg button until Fax is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until On Password is highlighted and then press the V Set button Enter a password and then press the Y Set button To check whether the fax has been sent 1 Press the E Menu button Faxing 403 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the y Set button 4 Press button until Job History is highlighted and then press the V Set button The job history report is printed Receiving a Fax About Receiving Modes K NOTE To use the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine Fax connect an answering machine to t
211. When wireless ad hoc mode is set to the printer Select Computer to Computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer Select Access point Infrastructure networks only and close the Advanced dialog box g Click Add to display Wireless network properties h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Property dialog box For Windows Vista i Open Control Panel Select Network and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center st d Select Connect to a network e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area Installing Optional Accessories 83 g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Sharing Center c Select Connect to a network d Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 a Open Control Panel b Select Ne
212. Wireless Setting is displayed and start the WPS PBC on the wireless LAN access point Registrar within two minutes of the step 7 operation K NOTE For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN connection setting is completed Operator Panel 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press g button until Network is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until Wireless Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Manual Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Enter the SSID and then press the Y Set button Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad hoc depending on your environment When you select Infrastructure proceed to step 9 When you select Ad hoc proceed to step 10 Select the encryption type from No Security WEP 64Bit andWEP 128Bit Installing Optional Accessories 77 10 When you do not set security for your wireless network a Ensure thatNo Security is highlighted and then press the V Set button To use 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption a Press button until WEP 64Bit orWEP 1
213. YY South Africa 2 00 A4 DD MM YY Spain 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Sweden 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Switzerland 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Tunisia 1 00 A4 DD MM YY Turkey 2 00 A4 DD MM YY United Arab 4 00 A4 DD MM YY Emirates United Kingdom 00 00 A4 DD MM YY United States 5 00 Letter MM DD YY Unknown 00 00 Letter DD MM YY 3 Please Select Time Zone appears Press or 4 button until the desired time zone is highlighted and then press the vA Set button TC 12 00 TC 11 00 TC 10 00 TC 09 00 TC 08 00 TC 07 00 TC 06 00 TC 05 00 TC 04 00 TC 03 30 TC 03 00 TC 02 00 TC 01 00 E 1 Sy Se eS ENE ie EE Ee 100 Connecting Your Printer TC 00 00 TC 01 00 TC 02 00 TC 03 00 TC 03 30 TC 04 00 TC 04 30 TC 05 00 TC 05 30 TC 05 45 TC 06 00 TC 06 30 TC 07 00 TC 08 00 TC 09 00 TC 09 30 TC 10 00 TC 11 00 TC 12 00 G e ere eee eevee ere ea are ea are are TC 13 00 pos Please Enter Date appears Specify the date and then press the Y Set button Please Enter Time appears Specify the time and then press the y Set button This ends the basic printer settings Press the vA Set button to set Fax settings or press the gt Start button to end the initial setup Please Enter Fax Number appears Enter the fax number of the printer
214. ab is open 3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears 4 Click the System Settings button The system settings report is printed Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel When you first browse through the menus from the operator panel you see some menu items are highlighted These highlighted items are the factory default and original system settings K NOTE Factory defaults may vary for different countries When you select a new setting from the operator panel the item selected is highlighted to identify it as the current user default menu setting Printing 305 These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored To select a new value as a setting 1 2 Press the Menu button Press or 4 button until the desired menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press Sa or button until the desired menu or menu item is highlighted and then press the va Set button e Ifthe selection is a menu the menu is opened and the first system setting in the menu appears e Ifthe selection is a menu item the default menu setting for the menu item appears The current user default menu setting is highlighted Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item A value can be A phrase or word to describe a setting e A
215. ady to Start appears press the V Set button to start diagnosing the FAX connection One of the following diagnosing result is displayed Diagnosing result Description Connection not Detected The telephone line cord is not connected Make Please Reconnect sure that the telephone line cord is securely connected Telephone Lin 388 Faxing Cable Connected Wrongly The telephone line cord is connected to the wrong connector Make sure that the telephone line cord is connected at one end to the wall jack connector jj of your printer and at the other end to an active wall jack If you use a telephone or answering machine connect to the phone connector Reconnect Telephon Line from Wall Jack to Line Connection Fax Connection OK The telephone line cord is properly connected Check the Tone Pulse setting For information on Tone Pulse setting see Available Fax Settings Options Please Check Setting of Tone Pulse in Admin Menu after Restart Printer Sending a Fax You can fax data from your printer You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a Microsoft Windows operating system Loading an Original Document You can use the ADF or the document glass to load an original document for faxing Using the ADF you can load up to 35 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper at a time Using the document glass you can load one sheet at a time K NOTE To g
216. ain paper Plain Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for thick plain paper Covers Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for cover paper Covers Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for thick cover paper Label Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for labels Coated Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for coated paper Coated Thick Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for thick coated paper Envelope Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for envelopes Recycled Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for recycled paper Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 191 Adjust Fuser Plain Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for plain paper Plain Thick Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for thick plain paper Covers Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for cover paper Covers Thick Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for thick cover paper Label Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for labels Coated Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for coated paper Coated Thick Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for thick coated paper Envelope Displays th
217. aking Copies From the ADF 2 Press the pe Copy button 3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad 4 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Copying 315 Color To select mode for color or black and white copying 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the 8 Color Mode button to switch between Color and Black and White modes 3 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Select Tray To select a tray 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the lt B Copy button 3 Ensure that Select Tray is highlighted and then press the va Set button 4 Press button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Tray 1 The paper is fed from the tray 1 Tray 2 The paper is fed from the tray 2 SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder Denotes the factory default setting K NOTE Tray 2 is only available when the optional 250 sheet feeder is ins
218. alf Duplex Selects 100Base TX Half Duplex as the default value 100BASE TX Full Duplex Selects 100Base TX Full Duplex as the default value 1000BASE T Full Duplex Selects 1000Base T Full Duplex as the default value Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of the Ethernet MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer Port Status LPD Sets whether to enable LPD Port9100 Sets whether to enable Port9100 IPP Sets whether to enable IPP WSD Sets whether to enable WSD Network Sets whether to enable Network TWAIN TWAIN SMB Sets whether to enable SMB Bonjour Sets whether to enable Bonjour mDNS mDNS E Mail Alert Sets whether to enable E Mail Alert Telnet Sets whether to enable Telnet SNMP Sets whether to enable SNMP Update Sets whether to enable Update Address Book Address Book LLTD Sets whether to enable LLTD l This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool jt 8223 K NOTE The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted When you change or configure the settings click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings TCP IP Purpose To configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address of the printer Values TCP IP IP Mode Sets the IP mode Settings Host Name Sets the host name
219. an Defaults Purpose To create your own default Scan settings V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 207 208 Values Scan To Network Computer Stores scanned documents on a computer using the Network Server Message Block SMB protocol Server FTP Stores scanned documents on a server using the FTP protocol File Format Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white Black amp White Displays whether to scan in black and white or in grayscale when Button Black amp White is selected for a color mode Color Button Displays whether to scan in color or in color Photo when Color is selected for a color mode Resolution Sets the default scan resolution Document Size Sets the paper size of the original Lighter Darker Sets the default scan density Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level Contrast Sets the default contrast level Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Auto Exposure Level Sets the default background suppression level Margin Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm Top Bottom 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch Margin Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range o
220. an be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off Values Auto Correct Click the Start button to automatically perform color registration correction Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 211 Color Regi Click the Start button to print a color registration chart The color Chart registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow magenta and cyan lines On the chart look at the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors If the value for this line is 0 color registration adjustment is not required If the value for this line is any value other than 0 specify the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustments Color Sets lateral perpendicular to paper feed direction and process paper Registration feed direction color adjustment values individually for Yellow Adjustments Magenta and Cyan within the range of 9 to 9 Clean Developer Purpose To clean each toner cartridge or PHD unit or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Values Clean Developer Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge Yellow Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge Magenta Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge Cyan Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge Black Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge Drum Refresh Cleans the sur
221. anceling a Print Job There are several methods for canceling a job e Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel e Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel To cancel a job after it has started printing 1 Press the Cancel button 2 Fromthe Job List press or button until Print is highlighted and then press the va Set button Printing is canceled only for the current job All the following jobs will continue to print 292 Printing Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows Canceling a Job From the Taskbar When you send a job to print a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of the taskbar 1 Double click the printer icon A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 2 Select the job you want to cancel 3 Press Delete on the keyboard Canceling a Job From the Desktop 1 Click Start Printers and Faxes For Windows XP Click start Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows Server 2008 Click Start Control Panel gt Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Click Start Devices and Printers A list of available printers appears 2 Double click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 3 Select the job you want to cancel 4 Press Delete on the keyboard Duplex Pri
222. and then press the V Set button Press button until the desired number is highlighted and then press gt button to select the speed dial numbers Press the VA Set button to confirm Press button until Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button When a message prompting you to apply settings press button to select Yes and then press the V Set button To store more group dial numbers repeat steps 6 to 11 To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Editing Group Dial You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group 410 1 2 Press the Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button l Faxing 10 11 Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Group Dial is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the y Set button Enter a new name and then press the Y Set button Press g button until Speed Dial No is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press g button until the speed dial numb
223. and then try The task is Go to action 3 again complete Does this solve your problem 3 Use any of other tray in place of the SSF The task is Contact Dell Does this solve your problem complete Troubleshooting Guide 709 Jam Alignment Problems K NOTE Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool see Understanding the Tool Box Menus and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool e The top and side margins are incorrect e Color registration is out of alignment e Images are skewed Standard 250 Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam SSF Misfeed Jam e Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam e Regi Jam Exit Sensor On JAM Exit Jam Exit Sensor Off JAM e Standard 250 Sheet Tray Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Multi feed Jam e SSF Multi feed Jam The top and side margins are incorrect ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the The task is Contact Dell application being used complete Does this solve your problem Color registration is out of alignment 710 Troubleshooting Guide ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Execute auto color registration adjustment The task is Go to action 2 a On the operator panel press the E Menu complete button and select System Setup Adm
224. are updated it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Macintosh and the printer Understanding Your Printer Software 565 Status Monitor Widget Feature e Monitoring Dell Printers Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Macintosh e Receiving Alerts Alerts you to problems such as paper jams or low toner e Ordering Supplies Allows you to access the web site to order supplies Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget Operating systems e MacOSX 10 4 11 e Mac OS X 10 5 e MacOSX 10 6 Network protocols and interfaces e LPR e Socket 9100 e Bonjour e USB 2 0 and 1 1 When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB cables only the printer recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor Widget Installing the Status Monitor Widget 1 Double click the Status Monitor Installer icon in the Finder window 2 Follow the on screen instructions When the Install Succeeded screen appears the installation is complete Z NOTE Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation process 566 Understanding Your Printer Software Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget Opening the Status Monitor Widget 1
225. ared Folder SMB Only 352 Setting a Destination Using an Address Book 359 Sending the Scanned File on the Network 368 Scanning to a USB Memory 368 Types ofa USB Memory 369 Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image 369 Inserting and Removing a USB Memory 370 Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image 370 Setting an E Mail Alert aaa aaa 370 Registering a New User oaoa aaa 371 Sending an E mail With the Scanned File 372 OTE GRAS aet Se te p NEEE E a die A 375 Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Easy Setup Navigator 375 Setting Your Country 376 Setting the Printer ID o oa 376 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters 377 Keypad Letters and Numbers 378 Changing NumbersorNames 379 Inserting a Pause 379 Setting the Time and Date 379 Changing the Clock Mode 380 Setting Sounds oa a a 380 Speaker Volume o o aaa 380 Ringer Volume oaaao 381 Specifying the Fax Settings Options 381 Contents 11 Changing the Fax Settings Options 381 Available Fax Settings Options 382 Advanced Fax Settings 386 Sending a Fax aaa 389 Loading an Original Document 389 Adjusting the Document Resolution 391 Adjusting the Document Contrast 392 Sending a Fax Automatically 393 Sending a Fax Manuall
226. aring Center Select Connect to a network Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer a b Press the Menu button Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Network is highlighted and then press the Set button Press button until TCP IP is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until IPv4 is highlighted and then press the V Set button Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHOP Installing Optional Accessories 81 i Wireless Network Connection Status R Germa Suar Connection status E Address Type Automatic Private Address P IP Address 169 254 209 169 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Defaut Gateway Windows did not detect problems with this Renar connection I ou cornat connect cick Repair 4 Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser F https 37 de Svietee MH Microsoft Internet Explorer Fle Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay address 3 hetpst f i 2w at amen in Eco Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 3 et ee Printer Jobs IPx6 Link Local 00
227. art All Programs Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Dell Supplies Management System The Dell Supplies Management System window appears 2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list 3 If you are ordering from the web Understanding Your Printer Software 557 a When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two way communication a window prompting you to type the Service Tag appears Type the Service Tag of your Dell printer in the field provided Your Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer b Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list c Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site 4 Ifyou order by phone call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section User Setup Disk Creating Tool The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings A driver installation package can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as e Print orientation and Multiple Up document settings e Watermarks Font references If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple computers running the same operating system create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server
228. art again Does this solve your problem Images are skewed ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Adjust the paper guides properly The task is Contact Dell complete Does this solve your problem Standard 250 Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam 712 l Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the standard 250 sheet tray is properly inserted Does this solve your problem The task is complete Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used e Thick 2a Thin 2b e Coated 2c e Envelope 2d If performing manual duplex printing go to action 2e If using paper other than the above or if not performing manual duplex printing go to action 2f 2a Use thick paper that is 216 g m or less Does this solve your problem The task is complete Go to action 3a 2b Use thin paper that is 60 g m or more Does this solve your problem The task is complete Go to action 3a 2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time Does this solve your problem The task is complete Go to action 3b 2d Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the The task is Standard 250 sheet tray as instructed in Loading complete Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 713 Go to action 3c Action Yes No 2e Ensu
229. art to make adjustments 1 Click Start All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select Color Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed Select the value with the straight line and then click the Apply New Settings button Maintaining Your Printer 647 5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart The color registration chart is printed with the new values 6 Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of 0 Show image of before and after adjustment will help After printing the color registration chart do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running K NOTE If 0 is not next to the straightest lines determine the values and adjust the printer again 648 Maintaining Your Printer Removing Options If the printer location needs to change or the printer and print media handling options need to be shipped to a new location all print media handling options must be removed from the printer For shipping pack the printer and print media handling options securely to avoid damage Removing the
230. ation Connection Network name SSID dell_device Wireless network key This network requires a key for the following Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Property dialog box For Windows Vista a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Internet Installing Optional Accessories 85 c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select dell_ device from the network items listed in Connect to a network f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network a d Select dell_ device from the network items listed in Connect to a network e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect 2 Check the IP address on your computer 86
231. ation Web Tool 169 Left Frame The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters The following menus are displayed in the left frame F https 1 P8 Pet ADe pates New Microsoft Internet Explorer EES File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Address 4 https lh 20th apa Sanies Aa JIPE n on Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP J 1Pva K3 Dub 3da 54 Printer Jobs IPx6 Link Local WAD it Sth Pai Nd Location 4 sT Contact Person Syel Printer Settings Print Server Settings i Printer Status Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status Refresh 7 Address Book Printer Information p Cyan Cartridge Level Ok a L ol Tray Settings Magenta Cartridge Level OK ae oe eres A Mail Alert Yellow Cartridge Level OK tee el 10 ear toaewers Black Cartridge Level OK 11 K Online Help aes 12 Order Supplies at Consumables Status 43 we www dell com supplies PHD unit J omar reo ce Sy l 14 ol i Sy saa al El one B internet 1 Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu 2 Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu 3 Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu 4 Print Server Links to the Pr
232. b click Print Test Page O When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 1 2 On the Windows desktop of the client computer click Start gt Network Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Click Install driver Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder The time this takes varies based on network traffic and other factors Print a test page to verify installation a Click Start Control Panel b Select Printers c Right click the printer you just created and select Properties d On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer click Start your user name Network Start Network for Windows Server 2008 R2 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 135 Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Click Install driver Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer and for a new printer obje
233. ble time period for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting Secure Job Expiration K NOTE Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed Purpose To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk Values Expiration Mode Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the optional 512 MB memory module Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the optional 512 MB memory module Recurrence Sets the period to repeat the setting Weekly Settings Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting Monthly Settings Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting Copy Defaults Purpose To create your own default Copy settings Values Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white Select Tray Sets the default input tray SSF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder Collated Sets whether to sort a copy job Reduce Enlarge Sets the default reduction enlargement ratio Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 201 202 Custom Reduce Enlarge Sets the custom reduction enlargement ratio Document Size Sets the paper size of the original Or
234. button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press Sg button until Country is highlighted and then press the V Set button Select the country where the printer is used The printer must be rebooted after you set the country settings When a message prompting you to reboot the printer select Yes After the reboot the top menu is displayed on the operator panel Z NOTE In case of either one when you configure the country setting the information which is registered to the device is initialized Setting the Printer ID In most countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send The printer ID containing your telephone number and name or company name will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer 376 Press the Menu button l Faxing 2 Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button 3 Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press w button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the V Set button 5 Press button until Fax Number is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad and then press the vA Set button K NOTE If you make a mistake while entering numbers press the lt Backspace button to delete the last digit 7 Press af or button until Fax Header Name is
235. by phone To order by phone see Contacting Dell It is recommended to use Dell toner cartridges for your printer Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell A CAUTION Never throw used toner cartridges into fire The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries A CAUTION Do not shake the used toner cartridge This may cause toner spills Maintaining Your Printer 615 Removing the Toner Cartridge 1 Open the toner access cover 2 Push the latch es backwards to pop open the toner cartridge s that you want to replace 3 Pull the cartridge holder until it clicks and then pull out the toner cartridge 616 Maintaining Your Printer A CAUTION Do not shake the toner cartridge as it may cause toner spills Installing a Toner Cartridge 1 Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it Shake the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly Maintaining Your Printer 617 2 Insert the toner cartridge into the associated cartridge holder and then slide the latch of the toner cartridge 3 Close the toner access cover 618 Maintaining Your Printer Replacing the Print Head Device PHD Unit A CAUTION Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safet
236. by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper 6 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted insert the tray into the printer K NOTE Select the paper type from the operator panel if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper Loading Paper 111 112 l Loading Paper Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Identifying Printer Driver Pre install Status Before installing the printer driver on your computer check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the following procedures Z NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer e When Using the Operator Panel e When Using the Tool Box When Using the Operator Panel Press the Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the y Set button The system settings report is printed 5 Look under the TCP IP heading on the system settings report If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Colo
237. c keypad or the address book or phone book Address Books Address Book Address Book simplifies the recipient specification You can use the address book on the printer as well as on the server Select the desired address or fax number from the address book when using the Scan to E mail or Scan to SMB FTP feature or sending faxes Product Features 37 38 Product Features About the Printer This chapter provides an overview of your Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer K NOTE In this manual Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer is referred to as the printer K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer About the Printer 39 Front and Rear View Front View 12 E i gt N nN iw j 7 1 Automatic Document Feeder 7 Duplexer 2155cdn only ADF 2 Side Button 8 Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Power Switch 9 Standard 250 Sheet Tray 4 Toner Access Cover toner 10 Single Sheet Feeder SSF cartridges inside 5 Fuser 11 Front Cover NOTE You can open the front cover by pushing the side button 2 40 About the Printer 6 Belt Unit 12 Operator Panel NOTICE To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer avoid placing the printer in direct sunlight with the single sheet feeder opened Rear View 1 Automatic Document Feeder ADF
238. cations registered between 001 and 009 Group Dialing Ifyou frequently send the same document to several destinations you can create a group of these destinations and set them under a one digit group dial location This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in the group K NOTE You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number Setting Group Dial 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press Sw button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Faxing 409 10 Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press button until Group Dial is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted and then press the y Set button If a number is already stored in the location you chose the display shows the number to allow you to change it To start over with another group dial number press the D Back button Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the y Set button Enter the name that you want to store using the numeric keypad and then press the va Set button For details about how to enter names see Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters Press g button until Speed Dial No is highlighted
239. cause of the problem using the Ghost Proceed tothe Contact Dell Configuration Chart action a Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print Corresponding on the Diagnosis tab to the type of b Click the Ghost Configuration Chart ghosting button Positive ghost The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed 2a Is the type of the problem identified oa ghost 2a Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem 2b If you are using non recommended print media Go to action 3 Go to action 2a use the print media recommended for the printer Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 701 Action Yes No 3 Adjust the transfer bias The task is Contact Dell a On the operator panel press the E Menu complete button and select System Setup gt Admin Menu Maintenance Adjust BTR b Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used c Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab d Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Light induced fatigue Action Yes No 1
240. cess the Copy Scan Fax and Print from USB services Re enter Confirms the set password Password Secure Receive Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 199 Purpose Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes When the Secure Receive feature is enabled the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings Values Secure Receive Set Enables Disables password protection for all incoming faxes New Password Sets a password for incoming faxes Re enter Password Confirms the set password Login Error Purpose To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock Function Enabled and Secure Receive Values Login Attempts Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock Function Enabled and Secure Receive Set Available Time Print Copy Fax Scan Purpose To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services Values Set Available Time Allows you to set the available time period for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services Start Time Sets the start time of the available time period for the Print Copy Fax and Scan services 200 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool End Time Sets the end time of the availa
241. convenient time from the operator panel A print job is stored until you delete it from printer memory on the operator panel or turn off the printer You cannot use the password function with this feature This function does not require a password to print a stored job K NOTE Public MailBox Print is available when using the PCL driver Proof Print When you specify multiple copies for a collated job this feature allows you to print only the first set for checking before proceeding to print the remaining copies at the printer K NOTE Ifa print job is too large for the memory available the printer may display error messages Z NOTE If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver the job s name will be identified using the printer s time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name K NOTE Proof Print is available when using the PCL driver 298 Printing Storing Print Jobs When you select a job type other than Normal Print in the Paper Output tab of the printer driver the job will be stored in temporary memory until you request to print it from the operator panel or turn off the printer K NOTE Secure Print and Private MailBox Print require specifying a password for confidentiality Printing the Stored Jobs Once jobs are stored you can use the operator panel to specify printing Select the job type you are using from Secure Print Private Mai
242. ct Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Bead Carry Out BCO Action Yes No 1 Ifthe printer is installed in a high altitude The task is Go to action 2 location set the altitude of the location complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Adjust Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab b Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer is installed Does this solve your problem 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD complete Unit and Installing a PHD Unit Does this solve your problem 704 l Troubleshooting Guide Jagged characters ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Set Screen to Fineness in the printer driver The task is Go to action 2 a On the Advanced tab set Screen under complete Items to Fineness Does this solve your problem 2 Set Print Mode to High Quality in the printer The task is Go to action 3 driver complete a On the Graphics tab select High Quality from Print Mode Does this solve your problem 3 Enable Bitmap Smoothing in the printer driver The task is Go to act
243. ct to be added to the Devices and Printers folder The time this takes varies based on network traffic and other factors Print a test page to verify installation a Click Start Devices and Printers b Right click the printer you just created and select Printer properties c On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Peer to Peer If you use the peer to peer method the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer Network clients retain control of driver modifications The client computer handles the print job processing Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 Click start Printers and Faxes Click Add a Printer Click Next 2 3 4 136 Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer and then click Next If the printer is not listed type the path to the printer in the text box Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Add Printer Wizard Specify a Printer If you don t know the name or address of the printer you can search for a printer that meets your needs What printer do you want to connect to Browse for a printer Connect ta this nrinter for ta browse for a orinter_select this option and click Next SAserver printer Erampie vw aver printer Connect to a printer chh the Intenet or on a home or office network Exampl
244. ct your type of connection and then click Next USB Connection E install Optional Accessories E Connect Your Printer Ethernet Connection of Load Paper Wireless Connection Check Setup The Wireless Connection window appears For Network follow the on screen instructions to configure wireless settings 1 Select Network Cable and then click the Next button The instruction video starts Follow the on screen instructions to configure wireless settings and then click the Next button The Advanced Configuration Tool starts 74 Installing Optional Accessories 2 Select the printer and then click the Next button Wireless Network Settings screen appears K NOTE Ifthe printer cannot detect your printer and your printer is not listed click Enter IP Address button and enter the IP address of your printer and then click the OK button 3 Set the wireless network settings and then click the Next button IP Address Settings screen appears Z NOTE For details on each item see Assigning an IP Address 4 Set the IP address of the printer and then click the Next button Confirm the settings screen appears 5 Confirm the settings and then click the Apply button Complete configuration screen appears 6 Click the Next button For WPS PIN WPS PBC Operator Panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool follow the on screen instructions to configure wireless settings To configure wireless set
245. d If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers o n nn A Q 9 If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Fax Click the Plus sign and click Default Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list Name and Print Using are automatically entered Click Add Specify the options that have been installed on the printer and then click Continue Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print amp Fax dialog box Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10 4 11 When Using a USB Connection 1 2 o ny AU A Turn on the printer Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer Start Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer list Name and Print Using are automatically entered Click Add When Using IP Printing 1 2 Turn on the printer Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is co
246. d by using the corresponding buttons on the operator panel To create your own default settings 1 Press the Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Copying 331 Press g button until Defaults Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Set button Press or w button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the V Set button Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Setting the Power Saver Timer Option You can set the power saver timer for the printer The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain period of time To set the power saver timer 1 2 332 Press the Menu button Press Sg button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press Sg button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until the desired setting is highlighted and then p
247. d for Authority as the Printer Administrator 153 Uninstalling the Printer Driver 2 153 Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 154 Setup Overview 154 Installing the Printer Driver 154 Setting Up the Queue 154 Setting the Default Queue 156 Specifying the Printing Options 156 Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 157 Uninstalling the Printer Driver 2 2 157 Using Your Printer 159 13 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 161 OVEDVIEW ouort dai i a e a aga E e a a a E 161 When Using the Operator Panel 2 162 When Using the Tool Box aaa 162 Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 163 Printer Status 2 2 2 m y o 163 Printer Jobs 0 163 Printer Settings 164 Print Server Settings 0 00 2 164 Copy Printer Settings 164 Print Volume occ pro og pees hee 164 Address Book 164 Printer Information 2 2 2 164 Tray Settings 00 164 Contents 5 Set Password serodia n Eea ae hak es 165 Online Help i nb poe Ge Se Bs 165 Order Supplies at 2 aaa 165 Contact Dell Support at aaa 165 Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool0 165 Setting Up From Web Browser 165 Setting Up From Operator Panel 168 Page Display Format
248. d on A4 or Letter size paper Values Off Does not print the received data On Prints the received data as text data Banner Sheet K NOTE Banner Sheet feature is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Purpose To specify the position of banner sheet and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded Values Understanding the Printer Menus 507 Insert Position Off Does not print the banner sheet Front Inserted before the first page of every copy Back Inserted after the last page of every copy Front amp Back Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy Specify Tray Tray 1 The banner sheet is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder RAM Disk K NOTE RAM Disk feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed on the printer Purpose To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print Mailbox Print and Proof Print features The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Disable Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system Secure Print and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log Enable 300MB Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in 50 50
249. d or Remove Programs on your computer and then re install it again Failed to execute ScanButton Manager Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re install it again An unexpected error occurred on ScanButton Manager Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re install it again Troubleshooting Guide 729 Other Problems Problem Action Condensation has occurred inside the printer This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter This also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches 85 or more Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate environment CTD Sensor Error Error 009 340 Code xx Restart Printer Check CTD Unit 092 910 Clean CTD Sensor or Check CTD Unit 092 310 is displayed Clean the CTD sensor See Cleaning the CTD Sensor No Documents is displayed on the operator panel when you are selecting a file for Printing from USB Memory feature Confirm that there are files with the supported file formats PDF TIFF or JPEG in the USB memory If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB memory move the file to the root directory on your computer Shorten the target file name in the USB memory on your computer and try printing again 730
250. d then press the Y Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Press button until Panel Settings is highlighted and then press the V Set button The panel settings page is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start gt All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box Operator Panel 287 K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer 288 drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click Ok The Tool Box opens Ensure that the Printer Settings Reports tab is open Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears Click the Panel Settings button The panel settings page is printed Operator Panel Printing Copying Scanning and Faxing 289 290 This chapter covers tips for printing how to print certain information from your printer and how to cancel a job K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Tips for Successful Printing Tips on Storing Print Media Store your print media properly For more information see Storing Print Media Avoiding Paper Jams NOTICE Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first By
251. d to the default setting Soft Normal Loud Emits a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting Fault Time out 0 436 3 300 seconds 60 seconds Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job when the job stops abnormally Understanding the Tool Box Menus Job Time out 0 5 300 seconds 30 seconds Sets the amount of time the printer waits for additional data from the computer before it cancels the job Ex Auto Log Print Off Does not automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs On Automatically prints a job history report after every 20 jobs Print ID off Does not print the user ID Top Left Prints the user ID on the specified Top Right location Bottom Left Bottom Right Print Text off Does not print the received PDL data as text data On Prints the received PDL data as text data Banner Sheet Insert off Does not insert the banner sheet Position Front Sets where to insert the banner sheet Back Frot amp Back Specify Tray1 Sets the tray for the banner sheet Tray Tray2 RAM Disk 4 Disable Does not allocate RAM for the disk file system Secure Print and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log 50 500 MBytes 300MBytes Allocates RAM for the disk file system automatically in 5OMBytes increments Understanding the Tool
252. ddress Book is setto Off Server Phone Book Purpose To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server Values Off Does not search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server On Searches the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server K NOTE You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Server Phone Book is set to Off Power on Wizard Purpose To perform initial setup for the printer Values Yes Performs the initial setup for the printer 512 Understanding the Printer Menus No Does not perform the initial setup for the printer Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV non volatile memory configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings and configure the security settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings F W Version Purpose To confirm the current F W version Service Tag Purpose To confirm the service tag Express Code Purpose To confirm the express service code Paper Density Purpose To specify paper density settings Values Plain Light Normal Label Light Normal Adjust BTR K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item Understanding the Printer Menus 513 Purpose To specify the transfer roller voltage adjustment for
253. derstanding the Printer Menus 400 x 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi Document Size Purpose To specify the default paper size Values mm series Av AS B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive I Denotes country specific factory default values inch series Letter Folio Legal A4 AS B5 Executive L Denotes country specific factory default values Understanding the Printer Menus 545 Lighter Darker Purpose To adjust the density to make the scanned image lighter or darker than the original Values Lighter3 Works well with dark print Lighter2 Lighter1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Darker3 Sharpness Purpose To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original Values Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original Normal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original Contrast Purpose To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original Values High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original 546 Understanding the Printer Menus Medium Does not adjust the amou
254. dialog box Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10 3 9 When Using a USB connection 1 2 3 6 Turn on the printer Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer Start Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add Select USB from the menu The Printer Model is automatically selected Click Add When Using IP Printing 1 2 o n AU A Turn on the printer Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Start Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add in the Printer List dialog box Select IP Printing from the menu Select LPD LPR for Printer Type Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area Select Dell for Printer Model and select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP K NOTE When printing is set up using IP printing the queue name is displayed as blank You do not need to specify it Click Add Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers 145 When Using Rendezvous Bonjour 1 2 ND NN Ff Turn on the printer Ensure that Macinto
255. dress Search Time 4 Seconds Community Name public e Subnet Address Enter the subnet address IPv4 Broadcast Address such as 192 168 1 255 e IPv6 Multicast Address such as ff02 1 e Search Time Specify a time period for searching a scanner e Community Name Enter the SNMPv1 v2 community name The default community name is public 344 Scanning Password Setting In the Password Setting tab you can input the password that is set for your scanner to access from your computer to the printer For Microsoft Windows Scan Settings Tool IP Address Settings Password Setting If a password has been set for the scanner you need to enter the password before scan jobs can be run Password for Scanner About K Cancel For Apple Macintosh i IP Address Settings Password Settings If a password has been set for the scanner you need to enter the password before scan jobs can be run Password for Scanner C aed o EE a ee Settings C About C Preview Scan 3E Close Password for Scanner Enter the password Scanning 345 Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition WIA Driver Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WI
256. e Pulse OPPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse 10PPS Pulse 20PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse 20PPS Resend Delay 3 255 Sets the interval between transmission attempts within 3 the range of 3 to 255 seconds Redial 0 13 Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the Attempts 3 destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 13 Redial Delay 1 15 Sets the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes 1 Junk Fax On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by Setup accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book off Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers Remote On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the Receive external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone off Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone Remote Rev 00 99 Sets the tone to start Remote Receive Tone 00 Fax Header On Prints the information of the sender on the header of faxes Off Does not print the information of the sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Name Sets the sender s name to be printed on the header on faxes Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover On Attaches a cover page to faxes Page Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern 1 7 Provides a separate numb
257. e htt server printers myprinter printer lt Back I Next gt Cancel For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process Click Browse for a printer and then click Next If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a printer driver If no system driver is available you need to specify the path to available drivers Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer and then click Next If you want to verify installation click Yes to print a test page Click Finish When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 2 3 Click Start Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and then click Next If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that I want isn t listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 137 E ap Add Printer Find a printer by name or TCP IP address Browse for a printer Select a shared printer by name comp
258. e value using the numeric keypad and then press the V Set button If necessary repeat steps 5 and 6 To return to the top screen of the I Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Available Fax Settings Options You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system Option Description Receive Mode 382 Faxing You can select the default fax receiving mode e Fax automatic receive mode Telephone manual receive mode Automatic fax reception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code or by setting ONHOOk to On you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine and then pressing the f Start button Telephone Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec Fax Tel1 and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans Machine Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine In this mode the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the
259. e Server Address page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the Server Address top page Values ID Displays the selected server ID Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Phone Book The Phone Book page includes the following subpages FAX Speed Dial Allows you to view edit or create speed dial entries FAX Group Allows you to view edit or create fax group entries FAX Speed Dial Top Page Purpose To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page Values Speed Dial List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button Speed Dial Displays the speed dial ID Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 255 Name Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID Phone Number Displays the speed dial code IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Delete Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code Confirm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code FAX Speed D
260. e When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL Click this button to open the Service Tag window e When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL Click this button to open the procurement and support web site e Select Reorder URL Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies Select a URL address to use when the Order Supplies Online button is clicked e Regular URL http Accessories us dell com sna PrinterSeg aspx e Premier URL http premier dell com Order by Phone e To order Dell printer supplies by phone call the following 576 Understanding Your Printer Software Select your country with phone number from the list and call the displayed telephone number to order supplies Close button Click this button to close the Dell Supplies Management System window Service Tag Window Dell 2155cdn Color MFP For the best service enter your Dell printer Service Tag l Cancel 1 Enter the Dell printer service tag A NOTE For information on the service tag see Express Service Code and Service Tag Settings Window To open the Settings window 1 Click the Settings button in the Printer Selection window The Settings window appears Understanding Your Printer Software 577 Settings Update of status M Printer Status is regularly updated Update Interval 30 sec 15 600 Port Number Settings Set TCP IP port number Available port
261. e may be uneven Try The task is Go to action 2 changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete driver For example change the plain paper to thick a On the Paper Output tab change the Paper Type setting Does this solve your problem 2 Verify that the correct print media is being used The task is Go to action 3 See Supported Paper Types If not use the print complete media recommended for the printer Does this solve your problem 692 Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit test print your document again Does this solve your problem Random spots Blurred images ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed The task is Go to action 2 correctly See Installing a Toner Cartridge complete Does this solve your problem 2 Ensure that the PHD unit is installed correctly The task is Go to action 3 See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD Unit complete and Installing a PHD Unit Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 693 Action Yes No 3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD U
262. e power switch off and then on again Advanced Fax Settings K NOTE The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users Incorrect settings on the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer may damage the device 386 Faxing If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly To enter the Diagnostic Menu Customer Mode follow the instructions 1 Turn off the printer 2 Disconnect all network phone line and USB cables from the device 3 Turn on the printer while holding down and w buttons to start in Customer Mode After all the advanced fax settings have been made you will need to turn off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective Fax Data Encoding Method Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG data encoding method You may experience fax send or receive errors due to this data encoding method You can disable the JBIG and select the Modified Huffman MH Modified Read MR or Modified Modified Read MMR encoding with the following instructions You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions 1 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode 2 Press button to select Fax Scanner Diag and then press the y Set button 3 Press g button until Parameter appears and
263. e receive code on the external telephone Remote Rev Tone Purpose To specify the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive Fax Header Purpose To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes Values Off Does not print the sender s information on the header of faxes On Prints the sender s information on the header of faxes K NOTE IfUnited States is selected for the setting of Country this option does not appear on the menu The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed For information on the country setting see Setting Your Country Fax Header Name Purpose To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes Fax Number Purpose 494 Understanding the Printer Menus To set the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of a fax message K NOTE Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup Fax Cover Page Purpose To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes Values Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes On Attaches a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Purpose To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern Values Understanding the Printer Menus 495 Pattern1 7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone company The patterns provided with your printer are shown below Pattern 1 Pattern 2
264. e send attempts Redial Sets the number of redial attempts 0 13 to make if the destination Attempts fax number is busy If you enter 0 the printer will not redial Redial Delay Sets the interval 1 15 minutes between redial attempts Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the Phone Book Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Receive Sets a 2 digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On Tone Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes Name Fax Number Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD setting from Pattern to Pattern7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies Duplex Print Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination Fax Forward Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which Number incoming faxes will be forwarded Prefix Dial Sets whether to set a prefix dial number Prefi
265. e system settings report is printed 2 Verify the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under Network Wired Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command Ping the printer and verify that it responds For example at a command prompt on a network computer type ping followed by the new IP address for example 192 168 0 11 ping 192 168 0 11 If the printer is active on the network you will receive a reply Setting the IP Address 107 108 Setting the IP Address Loading Paper K NOTE To avoid paper jams do not remove the tray while printing is in progress K NOTE Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper in your printer 1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 2 Adjust the paper guides Loading Paper 109 K NOTE Extend the rear side of the tray when you load Legal size paper 3 Before loading the print media flex the sheets and fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface 4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up K NOTE Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams 5 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper 110 Loading Paper K NOTE When loading user specified print media adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray
266. e temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for envelopes Recycled Displays the temperature setting of the fuser 2 to 2 for recycled paper Auto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed Non Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer Clock Settings Date Format Displays the default date format Time Format Displays the default time format 24H or 12H Time Zone Displays the default time zone Set Date Displays the date setting Set Time Displays the time setting 192 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Web Link Select Reorder Displays a link used for ordering consumables Customization URL which can be accessed from Order Supplies at in the left frame Regular Displays the regular URL http accessories us dell com sna that can be linked to Order Supplies at Premier Displays the premier URL http premier dell com that can be linked to Order Supplies at Dell ColorTrack ColorTrack Displays whether to enable the ColorTrack Mode No Account User Displays whether to permit the printing of data Print without authentication information ColorTrack Displays whether to print the error report on the Error Report ColorTrack mode Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Si
267. e the desired action Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 123 14 Click Next Installation starts 15 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page 16 Click Finish Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk You can view and or change the printer settings monitor toner level and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies K NOTE The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool type the printer s IP address in your web browser The printer configuration appears on the screen You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you
268. e to Telephone Mode Fax Sets the default fax receiving mode to Fax Telephone Fax Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone Fax Ans Sets the default fax receiving mode to Ans Machine Fax Machine Fax DRPD Sets the default fax receiving mode to DRPD Auto Rec Fax 0 255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax 0 receive mode after receiving an incoming call in 0 255 seconds Auto Rec 0 255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax Fax Tel 6 receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call in 0 255 seconds Auto Rec 0 255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax Ans Fax 21 mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call in 0 255 seconds Line Monitor Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Low Medium High Sets the volume of the line monitor Ring Tone off Volume Turns the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Low Medium High Sets the volume of the ring tone Line Type PSTN 460 Sets the default line type to PSTN PBX Sets the default line type to PBX Understanding the Tool Box Menus Tone Pulse Tone Sets the dialing type to Ton
269. e vA Set button to save all the settings PY PM PC 9 to 9 K NOTE Ensure that you remove the paper from the single sheet feeder before performing Auto Correct Clean Developer Purpose To stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Values 516 Understanding the Printer Menus Yes Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge No Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Toner Refresh Purpose To clean the toner in each toner cartridge Values Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Yes Cleans the toner in the selected toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in each toner cartridge Drum Refresh Purpose To clean the surface of the PHD unit Values Yes Cleans the surface of the PHD unit No Does not clean the surface of the PHD unit Reset Defaults Purpose To initialize the non volatile NV memory After executing this function and rebooting the printer all the menu parameters are reset to their default values Values User Fax Section Yes Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book No Does not initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book User Scan Section Yes Initializes the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book No Does not initialize the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book Understanding the Printer Menus 517 System Section Yes Initializes the system paramete
270. each paper type Values Plain 0 6 to 6 Plain Thick 0 6 to 6 Covers 0 6 to 6 Covers Thick 0 6 to 6 Label 0 6 to 6 Coated 0 6 to 6 Coated Thick 0 Sets the transfer roller voltage in increments of 1 The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types If you see mottles on the print output try to increase the voltage If you see white spots on the print output try to decrease the voltage K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for 6 to 6 Envelope 0 6 to 6 Recycled 0 6 to 6 Adjust Fuser this item Purpose To adjust the fuser temperature setting for each paper type Values 514 Understanding the Printer Menus Plain 0 Sets the fuser temperature in increments of 1 The default Kin 16 Settings may not give the best output on all paper types When the printed paper has curled try to lower the Plain Thick 0 temperature When the toner does not fuse on the paper 6 to 6 properly try to increase the temperature Covers 0 6 to 6 Covers Thick 0 6 to 6 Label 0 6 to 6 Coated 0 6 to 6 Coated Thick 0 6 to 6 Envelope 0 6 to 6 Recycled 0 6 to 6 Auto Reg Adjust Purpose To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment Values Off Does not automatically perform color regis
271. earch box type firewal11 and then press the Enter key In the list click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the instructions on the screen Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD 1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer and click setup_assist exe to start Easy Setup Navigator K NOTE Ifthe CD does not launch automatically follow the procedure below For Windows XP Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click start Run enter D setup_assist exe where D is the CD drive letter in the Run dialog box and then click OK Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers For Windows Vista and Windows 7 Click Start gt All Programs Accessories gt Run enter D setup_assist exe where D is the CD drive letter in the Run dialog box and then click OK Direct Connection Setup For installing PCL printer driver 1 In the Easy Setup Navigator window click Software Installation to launch the installation software Select Personal Installation and then click Next Select the model name of your printer and then click Next Follow the on screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable and then turn the printer on The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically K NOTE If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next page click Install Select either Typica
272. eception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external phone and then pressing the remote receive code or by setting OnHook to On you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine and then pressing py Fax Automatically receives faxes Telephone Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec Tel Fax and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine In Machine Fax this mode the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones If the phone communication in your country is serial this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Auto Rec Fax Purpose 490 Understanding the Printer Menus To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call Values 0 Sets the value in increments of 1 second 0 255 Auto Rec Tel Fax Purpose
273. ect print media is being used The task is Go to action 6 See Supported Paper Types If not use the print complete media recommended for the printer Does this solve your problem 6 Ensure that eight yellow ribbons are correctly The task is Go to action 7 removed from the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit If not remove the ribbons Does this solve your problem 7 Ensure that the developer motor functions Go to action 8 Contact Dell properly a Launch the Tool Box and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab b Select Main Motor Operation Check from the drop down list box and click the Start button c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound Does the motor function properly Troubleshooting Guide 695 Action Yes No 8 Ensure that the dispense motor for each toner Go to action 9 Contact Dell cartridge functions properly a Launch the Tool Box and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab b Select Dispense Motor Check Yellow Dispense Motor Check Magenta Dispense Motor Check Cyan or Dispense Motor Check Black from the drop down list box and click the Start button c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound d Repeat steps b and c to perform Dispense Motor Check for the rest of the toner cartridges Z NOTE You can perform Dispense Motor Check for CMYK in any order you desire Does the dispense m
274. ed and then press the Set button 6 Press button until Color Reg Chart is highlighted and then press the y Set button 7 Press button to highlight Yes and then press the Y Set button The color registration chart is printed Maintaining Your Printer 643 When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab 3 Select Color Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed 4 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart The color registration chart is printed Determining Values On the color registration chart there are two types of charts Chart 1 fast scan and Chart 2 slow scan The Chart 1 is used to adjust the color registration for the fast scan direction which is vertical to paper feed direction The Chart 2 is used to adjust the color registration for the slow scan direction which is horizontal to paper feed direction The following sections explain how to determine the adjustment values for the fast scan and the slow scan using Chart 1 and Chart 2 Fast Scan On
275. ed when a job ends abnormally Off indicates that the tone is disabled Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs Off indicates that the tone is disabled Out of Paper Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted Tone when the printer runs out of paper Off indicates that the tone is disabled Low Toner Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low Off indicates that the tone is disabled Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear Off indicates that the tone is disabled Base Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel screen is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu Off indicates that the tone is disabled All Tones Displays the volume of all the alert tones Off indicates that all the tones are disabled mm inch Displays the measurement unit that is used on the operator panel screen Default Print Displays the default print paper size Paper Size Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 181 Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL Page Description Language data which is not supported by the printer as tex
276. eiving mode your printer stores it into memory and the JOB STATUS screen displays Secure Receiv to let you know that there is a fax stored To print received documents 1 2 Press the Menu button Press button until JOB STATUS is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press button until Secure Receive is highlighted and then press the V Set button Enter the password and then press the Y Set button The faxes stored in memory are printed To turn the secure receiving mode off 1 414 Follow the same steps from 1 to 6 in To turn the secure receiving mode on and select Secure Receive Set Press or w button to select Disable and then press the vA Set button To return to the top screen of the I Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Faxing Using an Answering Machine s 4 S gt To the Printer Line Telephone Phone wall jack Answering Device You can connect a telephone answering device TAD directly to the back of your printer as shown above e Set your printer to the Ans Machine Fax and set Auto Rec Ans Fax to specify the time for the TAD e When the TAD picks up the call the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax e Ifthe answering device is off the printer automatically goes into the Fax after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time e If you
277. elect the following check box Network sharing and security To share this folder with both network users and other users of this computer select the first check box below and type a share name V Share this folder on the network Share name Mysi hare Allow network users to change my files Learn more about sharing and security Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings f 0K Cancel Apply Select the Allow network users to change my files check box and click OK K NOTE When the following screen appears click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard click here then select Just enable file sharing and then click OK MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security ig To share this folder with other users of this computer only drag it to the Shared Documents folder To make this folder and its subfolders private so that only you have access select the following check box Enable File Sharing Make this folder private If you enable sharing on this computer without using the Network Network sharing and security Setup Wizard the computer could be vulnerable to attacks from As a security measure Windows has disabled remote the Intemet We strongly recommend that you run the Network access to this computer
278. ell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Letterhead enters Face down the printer first NOTE Set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead Preprinted or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper 266 Print Media Guidelines Print media source Print side Page orientation Single sheet feeder Face down Letterhead enters SSF the printer first Envelopes Depending on the envelopes it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media See Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder or Loading an Envelope in the SSF for instructions on loading an envelope When printing on envelopes Use only high quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers Set the print media source to the single sheet feeder or the standard 250 sheet tray Set the paper type to Envelope and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver Use envelopes made from 75 g m 20 lb bond paper You can use up to 105 g m 28 lb bond weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 or less Envelopes with 100 cotton content must not exceed 90 g m 24 lb bond weight Use only freshly unpackaged undamaged envelopes Use envelopes t
279. emory module is firmly fixed in the slot and does not move easily 7 Close the control board cover and slide it towards the front of the printer Installing Optional Accessories 55 8 Turn the screw clockwise 9 Turn on the printer 10 Print the system settings report to confirm that the newly installed memory is detected by the printer Printing System Settings Report When Using the Operator Panel a Press the E Menu button b Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the va Set button c Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 56 l Installing Optional Accessories d Ensure that System Setting is highlighted and then press the V Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box 11 12 K NOTE a Click Start All Programs Dell Printers gt Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears d Click the System Settings button The system settings report is printed Confirm the amount of Memory Capacity listed in the system setti
280. en press the Set button 6 Press the gt Start button Other Ways to Fax Using the Secure Receiving Mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended In the secure fax mode all incoming faxes will go in memory When the mode turns off any faxes stored will be printed K NOTE Before operation ensure Panel Lock is enabled To turn the secure receiving mode on 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press g button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press Sw button until Secure Receive is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press or button to select Enable and then press the y Set button Faxing 413 8 Enter a four digit password using the numeric keypad and then press the V Set button Ensure that Enable is highlighted and then press the Set button To return to the top screen of the Menu menu press the AC All Clear button When a fax is received in the secure rec
281. en by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode Power Saver Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Wake Up Sleep mode when OnHook is Off OffHook Wake Up Auto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made Fault Time Out Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally Job Time Out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer Control Panel Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted Tone when the operator panel input is correct Off indicates that the tone is disabled Invalid Key Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect Off indicates that the tone is disabled Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Machine Ready Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready Off indicates that the tone is disabled Copy Completed Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted Tone when a copy job is complete Off indicates that the tone is disabled Job Completed Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted Tone when a job other than a copy job is complete Off indicates that the tone is disabled Fault Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitt
282. encil markings Darker 3 Sharpness Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the copy softer than the original Color Saturation High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy Normal The color saturation is the same as the original Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy Auto Exposure On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Off Does not suppress the background Auto Expo Level Normal Sets the background suppression level to Normal Higher 1 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 1 Higher 2 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 2 Understanding the Tool Box Menus 451 Color Balance 452 Yelow 3to3 Sets the color balance level of low density Low 0 yellow Dens Yellow 3 to3 Sets the color balance level of medium Middle 9 density yellow Dens Yellow 3to3 Sets the color balance level of high density High 0 yellow Dens Magenta 3 to3 Sets the color balance level of low density Low magenta Dens Magenta 3 to3 Sets the color balance level of medium Middle density magenta Dens Magenta 3 to3 Sets the color balance level of high density High 0 magenta Dens Cyan 3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density Low 0
283. ent Fax Fwd is set to off Ensure that Junk Fax Setup is set to off Ensure that Secure Receive Set is set to disabled Execute Reset Defaults 722 l Troubleshooting Guide Scanning Problems Problem Action The scanner does not work Ensure that you place the document to be scanned facing down from the document feeder glass or facing up in the ADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly Ensure that the USB or Ethernet cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable If using the network TWAIN WIA driver check that the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the IP address of the printer is set correctly To check the IP address see Verifying the IP Settings Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port Ensure that the scanner sharing feature is disabled when you use Mac OS X before you scan documents via an ICA compatible application such as Image Capture The printer does not support the scanner sharing feature of Mac OS X Select a printer which is directly connected to the computer via USB or wired wireless LAN and scan docum
284. ents The printer scans very slowly Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E mailorScan to Network feature Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low resolution Troubleshooting Guide 723 Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Check whether the ADF roller assembly is installed properly Ensure the document s paper type meets the specifications for the printer See Supported Paper Types for more information Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF Ensure that the document is not curled Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF Vertical stripes appear on the output when scanned using the ADF Clean the ADF glass A smear appears at the same location on the output when scanned using the document glass Clean the document glass Images are skewed Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned using the ADF If the document uses thick media try scanning it from the
285. er Selecting Paper Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble free printing To help avoid jams or poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading the paper identify the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed Do not mix print media sizes weights or types in the same source This may result in a paper jam Print Media Guidelines 263 Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray Flex the paper back and forth and then fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface Selecting Pre Printed Media and Letterheads When selecting pre printed and letterhead paper for the printer Use grain long paper for best results Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Select paper that absorb ink but does not bleed Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use paper printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must withstand temperatures of 225 C 437 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fuser Inks that are oxidation set or oil based should meet these requirements latex inks might not If you are
286. er go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer 4 Push the side button to open the front cover Clearing Jams 669 5 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer 6 Close the belt unit and push at the top of the unit until it clicks 670 Clearing Jams 8 Insert the standard 250 sheet tray into the printer and push until it stops Clearing Jams 671 NOTICE Do not use excessive force on the tray Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser NOTICE Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface black colored film of the belt unit Scratches dirt or oil from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality NOTICE Protect the drums of the Print Head Device PHD against bright light If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes 2 Push the side button to open the front cover 672 Clearing Jams 3 Open the belt unit k 4 Lift the levers at both ends of the fuser and remove the jammed paper If you are still unable to remove the paper go to the next step Clearing Jams
287. er 2008 R2 and Windows 7 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect f Enter the Security key and click OK if necessary Installing Optional Accessories Connecting Your Printer Your Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer interconnection cable must meet the following requirements K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Connection type Connection specifications USB USB 2 0 Ethernet 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T Wireless optional IEEE 802 11b 802 11g 802 11n Wall jack connector RJ11 Phone connector RJI1 Connecting Your Printer 91 USB port SS Wireless adapter socket o 3 Ethernet port 4 Phone connector PHONE 5 Wall jack connector LINE m Connecting Printer to Computer or Network Direct Connection A local printer is a printer which is directly connected to your computer using the USB cable If your printer is connected to a network instead of your computer skip this section and go to Network Connection The following operating systems support USB connection 92 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Serve
288. er for faxing with a Pattern Patten4 distinctive ring pattern Understanding the Tool Box Menus 461 Duplex On Prints the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper snti Print off Does not print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper Sent Fax Fwd Off Does not forward any of the incoming faxes to a specified destination Forward Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination Print and Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified Forward destination Fax Fwd Number Sets the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Prefix Dial On Sets a prefix dial number Off Does not set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number dials before any auto dial number is started A Discard Size Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it On Discards any excess at the bottom of the page Auto Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the Reduction appropriate sized paper ECM On Enables the ECM Error Correction Mode To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM off Disables the ECM Modem 2 4 Kbps Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax Speed 4 8 Kbps transmission or reception error occurs 9 6 Kbps 14 4 Kbps 33 6 Kbps 462 Fax Activity Auto Print Automatically prints a fax acti
289. er than a copy job is complete Soft Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is Normal Complete Lod Fault Tone off Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally Soft Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally Normal Loud 504 Understanding the Printer Menus Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs Soft Emits a tone when a problem occurs Normal Loud Out of Paper off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper Soft Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper Normal Loud Low Toner Alert Off Does not emit a tone when a toner is low Soft Emits a tone when a toner is low Normal Loud x Auto Clear Alert Off Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear Soft Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto Normal clear Loud Base Tone off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel display is Normal turned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu Loud All Tones Soft Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once Normal Loud off Disables all the alert tones mm inch Purpose To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel Understanding the Printer Menus 505 Values Millimeters mm Selects
290. er that you want to edit is highlighted and then press gt button to select or deselect the speed dial number Press the V Set button Press button until Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button When a message prompting you to apply settings press button to select Yes and then press the va Set button To delete an existing group dial number press the Cancel button K NOTE When you delete the last speed dial in a group the group itself is not deleted If you want to edit another group dial number repeat steps 6 to 11 To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Sending a Fax Using Group Dial Multi address Transmission You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions Follow the procedure of the desired operation For Delayed transmission see Specifying the Fax Settings Options You can use one or more group numbers in one operation Then continue the procedure to complete the desired operation Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder or on the document glass into the memory The printer dials each of the numbers included in the group Faxing 411 Printing a Speed Dial List You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list 1 2 Press the Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set butto
291. er to print the protocol monitor report which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem Values 500 Understanding the Printer Menus Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission Print On Error Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print the protocol monitor report p p p System Settings Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode warning tones time out duration device display language and job log auto print settings V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Power Saver Timer Purpose To specify the time for transition to power saver mode Values Sleep 3min Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode 1 30 min after it finishes a job Deep Sleep 10min Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep 560 min de after it has entered Sleep mode Enter 3 to put the printer in power saver mode 3 minutes after it finishes a job This uses much less energy but requires more warm up time for the printer Enter 3 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering Select a high value if your printer is in constant use In most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm up time Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for power save mode if you wa
292. erties dialog box 5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast and then click OK Click Scan to start scanning Click File Save to save your scanned document in your desired location on your computer To scan an image from Control Panel K NOTE This feature is supported on Microsoft Window Server 2003 and Windows XP only 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Scanning 347 2 Click Start gt Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware gt Scanners and Cameras Double click the scanner icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches 4 Click Next to display the Choose Scanning Preferences page Scanner and Camera Wizard amp Choose Scanning Preferences amp Choose pour scanning preferences and then click Preview to see how pour preferences affect EY the picture Picture type me Cok picture ha Grayscale picture ei O Black and white picture or text Custom Paper source Flatbed lt Z NOTE The screen image may vary depending on the operating system 5 Select your desired type of picture paper source and paper size and click Next 6 Enter a picture name select a file format and specify the desired location to save the scanned document 7
293. es the Port9100 port IPP Disable Disables IPP port Enable Enables IPP port SMB TCP IP Disable Disables SMB TCP IP port Enable Enables SMB TCP IP port SMB NetBEUI Disable Disables SMB Net BEUI port Enable Enables SMB Net BEUI port WSD Disable Disables WSD port Enable Enables WSD port Network TWAIN Disable Disables Network TWAIN Enable Enables Network TWAIN SNMP UDP Disable Disables the SNMP UDP port Enable Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP UDP port E Mail Alert Disable Disables the E Mail Alert feature Enable Enables the E Mail Alert feature EWS Disable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer Enable Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer Bonjour mDNS Disable Disables Bonjour mDNS Enable Enables Bonjour mDNS Telnet Disable Disables Telnet Enable Enables Telnet Update Addr Disable Disables Update Address Book Book Enable Enables Update Address Book LLTD Disable Disables LLTD Enable Enables LLTD 488 l Understanding the Printer Menus HTTP SSL TLS Disable Disables HTTP SSL TLS Enable Enables HTTP SSL TLS IP Filter K NOTE IP Filter feature is available only for LPD or Port9100 Purpose To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network You can set up to five IP addresses
294. ess Books Name Register Group Device Address Book se amp S Fax E E Mail Server m Fax Address Book Entry Data 30 Group Data 1 Device Address Book e Fax 564 Understanding Your Printer Software Links to the printer s Address Book for Fax feature You can register up to 200 fax numbers and 6 groups with 200 fax numbers e E Mail Links to the printer s Address Book for Scan to E mail feature You can register up to 100 e mail addresses and 10 groups with 10 e mail addresses e Server Links to the printer s Address Book for Scan to Network feature You can register up to 32 server information PC Fax Address Book You can manage the PC Fax Address Book for using Direct Fax feature on your computer You can register up to 500 fax numbers and 500 groups with 500 fax numbers Editing an entry 1 2 3 4 Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored Select an entry that you want to edit Click the Edit button and enter new information Click the Save button to save changes K NOTE When the address book entries are updated it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool You can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser K NOTE For information on how to add a new entry see Address Book K NOTE When the address book entries
295. ess from the Local Address Book Server Address Book Searches an e mail address from the Server Address Book Scan to Network Scan to Purpose To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer Values Network Computer Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block SMB protocol Network Server Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol Search Address Book Searches for a server address and specifies it as the transfer destination Scan to Application Purpose Understanding the Printer Menus 543 To save scanned data on a computer The Scan to Application feature allows you to import scanned data from the printer to a computer connected via a USB cable The computer must have ScanButton Manager installed to receive the data File Format Purpose To specify the file format to save the scanned image Values PDF MultiPageTIFF TIFF JPEG Color Mode Purpose To select color or black and white scanning Values Black amp White Scans in black and white mode Works well with texts GrayScale Scans in grayscale mode Works well with texts and photos Color Scans in color mode Works well with texts and photos Color Photo Scans in color mode Works well with photos Resolution Purpose To specify the resolution of the scanned image Values 200 x 200 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 544 Un
296. et the best scan quality especially for gray scale images use the document glass instead of the ADF To fax a document using the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Place the document s facing up on the ADF with the top edge of the documents in first Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size Faxing 389 2 Adjust the document resolution For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution To fax a document from the document glass 1 Open the document cover 2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass 390 Faxing 3 Adjust the document resolution For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution 4 Close the document cover K NOTE Ensure that no document is in the ADF If any document is detected in the ADF it takes priority over the document on the document glass K NOTE Ifyou are faxing a page from a book or magazine lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start faxing with the cover open Adjusting the Document Resolution You can improve the quality of the fax document by adjusting the resolution especially for the document in low quality or containing the photographic image 1 Press the amp Fax button 2 Press button until Resolution is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
297. ettings The Quick Launch Utility window provides seven buttons Status Window Tool Box Updater Troubleshooting Address Book Editor ScanButton Manager and Dell ScanCenter To exit the Quick Launch Utility window 1 Click the X button at the top right of the window Understanding Your Printer Software 559 For details click the Help button of each application Status Window The Status Window button opens the Printer Status window For more information about using Status Window refer to Printer Status Window Tool Box The Tool Box button opens the Tool Box For more information about using Tool Box refer to Understanding the Tool Box Menus Updater The Updater button updates the Dell software and printer firmware Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting button opens the Troubleshooting Guide which allows you to solve problems by yourself Address Book Editor The Address Book Editor button opens the Address Book Editor which allows you to register the contact information such as phone number and e mail address For more information about using Address Book Editor refer to Using Address Book Editor ScanButton Manager The ScanButton Manager button opens the ScanButton Manager which allows you to specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates USB connection only For more information about using ScanButton Manager refer to Scanning From the Operator Panel
298. ettings on the IP IPv4 Filter IPv4 page IPP Printer URI Displays the printer URI Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 1 000 seconds Time Out Port Number Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client Maximum Displays the maximum number of connections received Sessions simultaneously by the client WSD Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8 000 to 9 999 Receive Sets the receive time out period from 1 to 65 535 seconds Time Out Notification Sets the notification time out period from 1 to 60 seconds Time Out Maximum Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10 Number of TTL Maximum Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20 Number of Notification 226 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Network Connection Sets the connection time out period between 1 and 65 535 TWAIN Time Out seconds HTTP Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8 000 to 9 999 Simultaneous Displays the maximum number of simultaneous Connections connections Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 255 seconds Time Out Telnet Password Sets the password for Telnet Re enter Confirms the set password Password Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 1 000 seconds Time Out Update Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 65 535 Address Time Out seconds Book To configure the IP
299. etwork The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a printer driver If no system driver is available then you will need to provide a path to available drivers 4 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer and then click Next Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation 6 Click Finish When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start gt Devices and Printers 2 Click Add a Printer 3 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that I want isn t listed Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer in the text box and then click Next For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a printer driver If no system driver is available then you will need to provide the path to the available driver 4 Confirm the printer name and then click Next Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer and then click Nex
300. evice PHD Unit 619 Removing the PHD Unit 619 Installing a PHD Unit 622 Replacing the Retard Roller 627 20 Contents Removing the Retard Roller in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray 628 Installing a Retard Roller in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray 629 Cleaning Inside the Printer 05 631 Cleaning the Feed Roller 2 631 Cleaning the CTD Sensor 637 Cleaning the Scanner 0 00 cee eee eee 640 Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller 642 Adjusting Color Registration 0 643 Printing the Color Registration Chart 643 Determining Values 0 00000 eee 644 Entering Values 000 0 cece eee eee 646 29 Removing Options 649 Removing the Optional Memory Module 649 Removing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder 652 Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter 654 30 Clearing Jams 659 Avoiding Jams 659 Identifying the Location of Paper Jams 660 Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF 661 Clearing Paper Jams From the SSF 664 Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard 250 Sheet Tray 668 Contents Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser 672 Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer 676 Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder 677 Troubleshooting 683 31
301. f 0 mm Left Right 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm 0 0 inch to 50 mm 2 0 inch TIFF File Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2 Format Image Sets the image compression level Compression Max Email Size Sets the maximum size of e mail that can be sent within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Email From Sets whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you Field use Scan to E mail Print from USB Defaults Purpose To create your own Print from USB Defaults setting Values Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white Select Tray Sets the default input tray SSF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Type Sets the paper type loaded in the single sheet feeder 2 Sided Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Layout Sets the output layout PDF Password Sets a password Re enter PDF Password Confirms the set password l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Printer Maintenance The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density Adjust BTR Adjust Fuser Auto Registration Adjustment Color Registration Adjustments Clean Developer Reset Defaults Initialize PrintMeter Storage Non Dell Toner Adjust Altitude Clock Settings a
302. f you want to place a new document press button to select Yes and then press the y Set button Another display prompts you for placing next page Replace the document with a new document Ensure that Continue is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Margin Top Bottom To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF Copying 329 2 Press the lt B Copy button Press button until Margin Top Bottom is highlighted and then press the va Set button 4 Press a or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the y Set button 0 2 inch 4 Specify the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Margin Left Right To specify the left and right margins of the copy 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the l
303. face of the PHD unit Reset Defaults Purpose To initialize wired network data stored in non volatile memory NVM After executing this function and rebooting the printer all wired network settings are reset to their default values 212 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Reset Defaults Reset Defaults User Click the Start button to reset the fax Fax Section and restart number entries in the Address Book printer Reset Defaults User Click the Start button to reset the e Scan Section and mail and server address entries in the restart printer Address Book Reset Defaults System Click the Start button to reset the Section and restart system parameters printer Power On Wizard Power On Wizard Click the Start button to perform the initial setup for the printer Initialize PrintMeter Purpose To initialize the print meter of the printer When the print meter is initialized the meter count is reset to 0 Storage K NOTE Storage feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed Purpose To clear all files stored in the optional 512 MB memory module Values Clear Storage All Clear Click the Start button to clear all files stored as Secure Print and Proof Print in the optional 512 MB memory module Secure Click the Start button to clear all files stored as Secure Document Print in the optional 512 MB memory module Stored Click the Start button to clear a
304. facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the re Copy button 3 Press button until Auto Exposure is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press a or Sw button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying 2 Sided To make duplex copies with the specified binding position K NOTE This feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color 326 1 Printer Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF Press the gt Copy button Press g button until 2Sided is highlighted and then press the y Set button Copying 4 Press A or 9 button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Set button 1 gt 1Sided Select 1 sided or 2 sided and specify binding position for the 2 sided Long Edge copy Biding Short Edge Binding Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Copying 327 Multiple Up To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper 1
305. follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide Preparing Printer Hardware 49 Removing the Print Head Device PHD Ribbons 1 Open the toner access cover Installing the Toner Cartridges 1 Press and slide the blue latches of the four toner cartridges to the locked position 50 Preparing Printer Hardware 2 Close the toner access cover Preparing Printer Hardware 51 52 Preparing Printer Hardware Installing Optional Accessories You can make the printer more functional by installing the optional accessories This chapter describes how to install the printer s options such as the memory module and optional 250 sheet feeder K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Installing the Optional Memory Module K NOTE Your printer supports additional 512 MB memory module 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Turn the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise K NOTE Loosen the screw You do not need to remove the screw 3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer Installing Optional Accessories 53 4 Open the control board cover completely 5 Align the connector of the memory module with the slot and insert the memory module into the slot 54 Installing Optional Accessories 6 Push the memory module firmly into the slot K NOTE Ensure that the m
306. formation Fax Activity Purpose To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent Fax Pending Purpose To print the list of status of pending faxes Stored Documents K NOTE Stored Documents feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed on the printer and RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled Purpose To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print Private Mail Box Print Public Mail Box Print andProof Print inthe RAM disk Admin Menu Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features Phone Book Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings Speed Dial Purpose To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations Understanding the Printer Menus 471 Group Dial Purpose To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two digit dial code Up to six group dial codes can be registered Print Language Purpose To specify the settings for PCL or PDF PCL Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Paper Tray Purpose To specify the default paper tray Values Auto Tray 1 Tray 271 SSF l This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed Paper Size Purpose T
307. formation on modem speed see Modem Speed 035 718 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the status of the remote machine 035 720 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the features of the remote machine 035 781 Press the V Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the remote machine is busy 042 700 Wait for a while until the printer cools down 071 100 Remove the standard 250 sheet tray and jammed paper Open and close the front cover 071 920 Set side 2 of the sheet to the standard 250 sheet tray 071 921 Press the Y Set button 072 100 Remove the optional 250 sheet feeder and jammed paper Open and close the front cover 072 921 Press the V Set button 072 920 598 Set side 2 of the sheet to the optional 250 sheet feeder Understanding Printer Messages 072 101 Remove the standard 250 sheet tray or the optional 250 sheet feeder and remove the jammed paper Open and close the front cover 072 908 Remove the standard 250 sheet tray or the optional 250 sheet feeder and remove the jammed paper Open and close the front cover 075 920 Set side 2 of the sheet to the SSF 072 921 Press the Set button 075 101 Open the front cover and remove the jammed paper and the
308. ge the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 121 Installation starts 15 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page 16 Click Finish Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_ 2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter 2 Click Start Devices and Printers 3 Click Add a printer 4 Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer 5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed K NOTE When you click The printer that I want isn t listed Find a printer by name or TCP IP address screen appears Find your printer on the screen If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Continue otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action 6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box 7 Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 8 Click OK 9 Select your printer name and click Next 10 To
309. grams on your computer without first running PaperPort Dell ScanCenter runs as a separate application from the Windows start menu and displays the Dell ScanCenter bar For more information about using Dell ScanCenter refer to the PaperPort s Help menu ScanDirect Scan page to PaperPort Desktop Icons on the Dell ScanCenter bar represent the programs that are limited to PaperPort and to Dell ScanCenter To scan and send an item to a program click the program icon and then scan the item Dell ScanCenter automatically starts the selected program when the scan is complete Scanning From the Operator Panel K NOTE You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to Application feature from the operator panel Network connection is not supported K NOTE This feature is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Scanning 337 Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document 2 Press the gt Scan button Press button until Scan to Application is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Specify the scan options such as file format color mode resolution and document size For details see Scan to Application 5 Press the gt Start button K NOTE If the following dialog box appears
310. h Italian German Spanish Danish Dutch Norwegian Swedish Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes l Enter 3 to put the printer in the power saver timer mode 3 minutes after it finishes a job This uses less energy but requires more warm up time for the printer Enter 3 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering Select a high value if your printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm up time Select a value between and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm up period The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel 2 This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed 3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer 4 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed Date amp Time Purpose To specify the date and time Values Date Format Sets the date format Time Format Sets the time format in 24H or 12H
311. h pattern you need to select to use this service Receiving Faxes in the Memory Since your printer is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying printing or run out of paper or toner your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory Then as soon as you finish copying printing or re supply the consumables the printer automatically prints the fax 406 Faxing Polling Receive You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it 1 2 Press the amp Fax button Press g button until Polling Receive is highlighted and then press the Set button Press M y or w button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad and then press the vA Set button K NOTE For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine see Sending a Fax Automatically or Sending a Fax Manually Press the gt Start button Automatic Dialing Speed Dialing You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations 001 200 When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists you cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Speed Dial 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highligh
312. h the optional 250 sheet feeder 3 Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it If you are still unable to remove the paper go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer 678 Clearing Jams 4 Push the side button to open the front cover 5 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer k Clearing Jams 679 6 Close the belt unit and push at the top of the unit until it clicks S 7 Close the front cover 680 l Clearing Jams K NOTE If the paper jam message is not cleared after closing the front cover pull out the standard 250 sheet tray and check if there is a jammed paper in the opening of the tray 8 Insert the optional 250 sheet feeder into the printer and push until it stops NOTICE Do not use excessive force on the tray Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer Clearing Jams 681 682 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 683 684 Troubleshooting Guide Basic Printer Problems Some printer problems can be easily resolved If a problem occurs with your printer check each of the following The power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The printer is turned on The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker e Other electrical equipment p
313. h the stamp area on the bottom right side Using the SSF Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job To achieve the best possible print quality use only high quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer For more guidelines on print media see Print Media Guidelines Do not add or remove print media when the printer is printing from the SSF This may result in a paper jam Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of the print media going into the SSF first Do not place objects on the SSF Also avoid pressing down or apply excessive force on it The icons on the SSF show how to load the SSF with paper and how to turn an envelope for printing Loading Print Media 283 Linking Trays The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them The first tray will be utilized until the media runs out after which the next tray will be used K NOTE The print media should be the same size and type in each tray The SSF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media select the Paper Type setting in the Tray Settings component for each source tray To disable tray linking change the Paper type in one of the sources trays to a unique value K NOTE If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray the pri
314. hat can withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering check with the envelope supplier Print Media Guidelines 267 Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder insert the envelope with the flaps closed and the short edge of the envelope facing into the printer The print side must be facing down See Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder or Loading an Envelope in the SSF for instructions on loading an envelope Use one envelope size during a print job Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity more than 60 and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes For best performance do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Contain windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Use metal clasps string ties or metal folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have nicked edges or bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Labels Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers When selecting labels 268 Label adhe
315. he Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communication The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame Print Server Reports The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E Mail Alert Setup Page Print Server Setup Page Purpose To verify the current settings of TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol protocol and printing ports On this page you can only verify the settings of items If you want to change the settings go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab Values Ethernet Ethernet Displays the current settings of Ethernet Settings transmission rate and the duplex settings Current Displays the current Ethernet settings Ethernet Settings MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control Address MAC address of the printer Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 215 Wireless SSID Displays the MAC address of the printer z 2 Settings Network Type Displays the name that identifies the network MAC Address Displays the network type from either the Ad Hoc or Infrastructure mode Link Channel Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer adapter Link Quality Displays the channel number of the connection TCP IP IP Mode Displays the IP mode Settings Host Name Displays the host name Ipv4 3 IP Address Mode Displays the IP address mode IP Add
316. he Set Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears Faxing 401 For Microsoft Windows Set Check Fax Transmission New Text Document Notepad Recipient Setting Recipient List l Phone number Phone number My Phone Book file Add to Phone Book Look Up Phone Book Delayed Send Look Up Device Data C Delayed Send Minutes Hours Import and add file j e m Authorization Password Help For Apple Macintosh Recipient List Phone number My Phone Book file default dad RA Look Up Phone Book Delete Look Up Device Data 3 d Add to Phone Book _Authorization Delayed Send C Delayed Send Password Time 9 00 C StopSending __ Start Sending 9 402 Faxing 6 Enter the destination for the recipient The following procedure is for entering the destination For details on how to enter the destination please refer to the Help file for the driver a Enter the name and fax number directly b Select a fax number from a phone book Look Up Phone Book Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the file specified for My Phone Book file e Look Up Device Data Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the Phone Book on the 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Import and add file Windows only Allows you to select a source file such as a CS
317. he amount of space between each line vertical line spacing based on the Form Line and Orientation menu items Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line See also Orientation Quantity Purpose To set the default print quantity Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver Values selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel Values 1 Sets the value in increments of 1 1 999 Image Enhance Purpose To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature which makes the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance Values Off Disables the Image Enhance feature On Enables the Image Enhance feature Hex Dump Purpose To help isolate the source of a print job problem With Hex Dump selected all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation Control codes are not executed Values Disable Disables the Hex Dump feature 478 Understanding the Printer Menus Enable Enables the Hex Dump feature Draft Mode Purpose To save toner by printing in the draft mode The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode Values Disable Does not print in the draft mode Enable Prints in the draft mode LineTermination Purpose To add the line terminati
318. he first octet of the IP address and then press gt button The cursor moves to the next digit K NOTE You can only enter one octet at a time and must press gt button after entering each octet 13 Enter the rest of the octets and then press the vA Set button 14 Press the o Back button 15 Press Sg button until Subnet Mask is highlighted and then press the y Set button 16 Repeat steps 12 and 13 to set Subnet Mask and then press the Y Set button 17 Press the M Back button 18 Press button until Gateway Address is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 19 Repeat steps 12 and 13 to set the Gateway Address and then press the y Set button 20 Turn off the printer and then turn it on again When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box Z NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab 3 Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page Setting the IP Address 105 The TCP IP Settings page appears 4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode and then enter the values in IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 5 Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect You can also as
319. he host name Workgroup Displays the workgroup Maximum Displays the maximum number of sessions Sessions Unicode Displays whether to notify the host name and Support workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission Auto Master Displays whether to enable the Auto Master Mode Mode Encrypt Displays whether to encrypt the password during Password SMB transmission Job Time Out Displays the job time out period Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out Bonjour Port Status Displays the port status mDNS Host Name Displays the host name Printer Name Displays the printer name Telnet Port Status Displays the port status Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out SNMP Port Status Displays the port status Enable SNMP Displays the status of the SNMP v1 v2c feature v1 v2c Protocol Enable SNMP Displays the status of the SNMP v3 feature v3 Protocol Update Port Status Displays the port status Address Book Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out LLTD Port Status Displays the port status FTP Client Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out FTP Passive Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 219 SMB Client Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out SSL TLS HTTP Displays the status of the HTTP SSL TLS SSL TLS Communication Communication HTTP Displays HTTP SSL TL
320. he phone connector amp on the back of your printer When the memory is full the fax is received in the Telephone mode Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing faxing or copying except that faxes can only be printed on Letter sized A4 sized or Legal sized paper For details about loading paper see Loading Print Media For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray see Print Media Guidelines Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory If you receive a fax the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the fax To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call see Available Fax Settings Options Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code see Available Fax Settings Options or by setting OnHook to On you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine and then pressing the gt Start button 404 l Faxing The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is completed Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine Fax To use the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine Fax mode you must
321. he printer with a dry cloth 634 Maintaining Your Printer 8 Insert the PHD unit until it stops and then turn the four PHD lock levers 90 degrees clockwise to lock the PHD unit 9 Close the belt unit and push at the top of the unit until it clicks Maintaining Your Printer 635 11 Insert the standard 250 sheet tray into the printer and push until it stops 636 Maintaining Your Printer Cleaning the CTD Sensor Clean the Color Toner Density CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the Status Monitor or operator panel 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the standard 250 sheet tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 3 Push the side button to open the front cover Maintaining Your Printer 637 4 Open the belt unit 5 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab 638 Maintaining Your Printer 7 Close the front cover Maintaining Your Printer 639 Cleaning the Scanner Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the document cover 640 Maintaining Your Printer White Sheet NOTE Handle with care Document Cover Document Glass
322. he standard 250 sheet feeder On Displays a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet feeder I Denotes country specific factory default value Ty sp ry Panel Language Purpose To determine the language of the text on the operator panel screen Values English Frangais Italiano Deutsch Espa ol Dansk Nederlands Norsk Svenska Print Menu Use the Print Menu to print a job using the Secure Print Private Mail Box Public Mail Box and Proof Print features V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Secure Print K NOTE Secure Print feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable Purpose 530 Understanding the Printer Menus To print confidential jobs The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the password on the operator panel Values Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver All Print and Deletes all documents from print Documents Delete memory after printing them Delete Deletes all documents from print memory document n Print and Deletes the specified document from Delete print memory after printing it Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory l This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored
323. heet feeder is used SSF Paper Type Displays the default paper type when the single sheet feeder is used 2Sided Displays whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper Layout Displays the default paper layout when Multiple Up is selected l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Fax Settings Purpose To display the fax settings of the printer Values Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode Auto Rec Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call Auto Rec Fax Tel Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Rec Ans Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Volume Displays the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Line Type Displays the line type PSTN or PBX Tone Pulse Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing Understanding the Tool Box Menus 431 Resend De
324. hes away from edges Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty A CAUTION Otherwise the printer occur in a jam and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive As a result could void your printer and cartridge warranties Storing Print Media For proper print media storage the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf rather than directly on the floor Print Media Guidelines 269 e Ifyou store individual packages of print media out of the original carton ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl e Do not place anything on top of the print media packages Identifying Print Media and Specifications The following tables show print media information Supported Paper Sizes Paper size Single sheet feeder Standard 250 Optional 250 Duplexer sheet feeder sheet tray Side 1 Side 2 Side 1 Side2 Side 1 Side 2 A4 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y Y B5 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y N A5 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y N Letter 8 5 x 11 in Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Folio 8 5 x 13 in Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Legal 8 5 x 14 in Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Executive 7 25 x 10 5 in Y Y Y Y Y Y N Envelope 10 4 1
325. highlighted and then press the V Set button 8 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad including special symbols by pressing the 1 and buttons For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when you set up your printer you enter your name or your company s name and telephone number When you store speed or group dial numbers you may also need to enter the corresponding names Faxing 377 e When prompted to enter a letter press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 Each time you press 6 the display shows a different letter M N O and finally 6 To enter additional letters repeat the first step Press the Set button when you are finished Keypad Letters and Numbers Key Assigned numbers letters or characters 1 _ space amp 5 7 4 3 lt gt abc ABC2 defDEF3 ghiGHI4 k1IKLS mnoMNO6 pqrsPQRS7 tuvTUV8 wxyzWxXYZ9 SO Ol olny nD Mm
326. hine using the numeric keypad and then press the Set button You can also use speed or group dial numbers For details see Automatic Dialing Press the gt Start button to scan data Once Delayed Start mode is activated your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete the data in the memory is cleared K NOTE If you turn off and on the printer the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated K NOTE If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax service the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time For details see Set Available Time for the Available time and Function Enabled for the Fax service Sending a Fax from the Driver Direct Fax You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver K NOTE Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax 396 Faxing K NOTE If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax service the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time For details see Set Available Time for the Available time and Function Enabled for the Fax service Example Send data via the Send fax Dell 2155cedn MFP Fax driver Sending machine Dell Receiving machine fax J gt 2155cdn Multifunction ob machi
327. ial Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the FAX Speed Dial top page Values Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code Name Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code or enter a name for the new entry Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code or enter a fax number for the new entry Delete Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code This button is available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the top page l This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button FAX Speed Dial Delete Purpose 256 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the FAX Speed Dial top page Values Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code Name Displays the name registered under the speed dial code
328. ick Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers dialog box Windows XP XP x64 1 Click start Printers and Faxes Windows Server 2003 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Windows Server 2003 Color Printer and select Properties x64 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer follow these steps 1 Click the Options tab and then select Memory Capacity in the Items list box 58 Installing Optional Accessories 2 Select the total amount of the installed printer memory for the memory capacity setting Click Apply and then click OK 4 Close the Printers and Faxes Printers or Devices and Printers dialog box Installing the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder A CAUTION Ifyou install the optional 250 sheet feeder after setting up the printer be sure to turn off the printer unplug the power cable and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting this task 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off and then disconnect all cables from the back of the printer 2 Remove all packaging from the optional 250 sheet feeder Place the optional 250 sheet feeder in the location that the printer is located 4 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold
329. iginal Values High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy Normal The color saturation is the same as the original Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background to enhance text 2Sided Purpose To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position Values 540 Understanding the Printer Menus 1 gt 1Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge Multiple Up Purpose To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper Values off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size Manual Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy Values 0 2 inch 4 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Margin Left Right P
330. iginal Type Sets the type of the original Lighter Darker Sets the default copy density Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level Color Saturation Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker than the original Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Auto Exposure Level Sets the background suppression level Copy Color Balance Purpose To specify the copy color balance Values Yellow Low Dens Sets the color balance level of low density yellow Yellow Medium Dens Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow Yellow High Dens Sets the color balance level of high density yellow Magenta Low Dens Sets the color balance level of low density magenta Magenta Medium Dens Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta Magenta High Dens Sets the color balance level of high density magenta Cyan Low Dens Sets the color balance level of low density cyan Cyan Medium Dens Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan Cyan High Dens Sets the color balance level of high density cyan Black Low Dens Sets the color balance level of low density black Black Medium Dens Sets the color balance level of medium density black Black High Dens Sets the color balance level of high density black Copy Settings Purpose To configure the Copy settings
331. iguration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Part or the entire output is black Troubleshooting Guide 697 Action Yes No 1 Ensure Output Color is set to Color Auto in The task is Go to action 2 the printer driver complete a On the Graphics tab ensure that the Output Color is set to Color Auto Does this solve your problem 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Pitched color dots 698 l Troubleshooting Guide ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Proceed tothe Contact Dell Configuration Chart action a Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print corresponding on the Diagnosis tab to the location b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button of the problem The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed PHD unit 2 c Compare the pitch of the color spots on your Fuser output with that on the Pitch Configuration Contact Dell Chart and locate the cause of the problem and replace the fuser Is the cause of the problem located e Main unit of the printer Contact De
332. in Menu gt Maintenance gt Color Reg Adjustment Auto Correct Yes OR a Launch the Tool Box and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click the Start button under Auto Correct Does this solve your problem 2 Do you have a spare PHD unit Go to action 3a Go to action 3b 3a Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b Launch the Tool Box and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab c Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 711 Action Yes No 3b Print the Color Regi Configuration Chart and The task is Contact Dell manually correct the color registration complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed c Identify the offset values from the chart and enter them in Color Registration Adjustment Process and Color Registration Adjustment Left See Adjusting Color Registration for details d Click the Apply New Settings button e Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart to print the Color Regi Configuration Ch
333. in doubt contact your paper supplier Selecting Pre Punched Paper When selecting pre punched paper for the printer 264 Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre punched paper Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer This may result in a paper jam Print Media Guidelines e Pre punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper Your printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper e Weight guidelines for pre punched paper are the same as non punched paper Printing on a Letterhead Pre Printed and Pre Punched Paper Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre printed letterhead that you have selected is acceptable for laser printers Page orientation is important when printing on pre printed paper such as letterhead and pre punched paper The following table shows the orientation when loading letterheads in the tray or feeders For other pre printed and pre punched paper load the paper by reference to the following table Print Media Guidelines 265 Print media source Print side Page orientation Standard 250 sheet Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Letterhead enters tray and Optional Face up the printer last 250 sheet feeder D
334. ine if there are fax tones If the phone communication in your country is serial this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call Auto Receive Tel Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Receive Answer Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 205 Line Type Sets the default line type PSTN or PBX Tone Pulse Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing Resend Delay Sets the interval 3 255 seconds between r
335. ing and outgoing fax communications Faxing 385 Option Description Fax Transmit You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission Fax Broadcast You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple locations Fax Protocol You can set whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax transmission to monitor fax protocol problems K NOTE Prefix Dial supports only the environment where you send a fax to the external line number To use Prefix Dial you must do the following from the operator panel 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the V Set button 5 Press button until Line Type is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press f button until PBX is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until Prefix Dial is highlighted and then press vA Set button Press g button until On is highlighted and then press the V Set button 9 Press button until Prefix Dial Nun is highlighted and then press the y Set button 10 Enter a maximum of five digit prefix number from 0 9 and and then press the Y Set button 11 Reboot the printer by turning th
336. inkjet printer 150 300 dpi Images for a high resolution printer 300 600 dpi Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application If you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table you should reduce the size of the image by previewing or pre scan and cropping before scanning the image PaperPort PaperPort that comes bundled with this printer can be used to manage all your documents You can organize search and share all of your scanned documents 336 Scanning K NOTE PaperPort is supported only on Windows K NOTE You can use PaperPort s built in Optical Character Recognition OCR software to copy text from scanned documents so that you can use and edit the text in any text editing word processing or spreadsheet program The OCR process requires textual images scanned at 150 600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for graphics If you prefer to use another application such as Adobe PhotoShop you must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of available applications through the Select Software button each time you start scanning If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button PaperPort is automatically selected when you start scanning See Printer Settings Utility Dell ScanCenter Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or other pro
337. int Server Reports menu Settings 5 Copy Printer Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu Settings Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu Address Book Links to the E Mail Address menu 170 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 8 Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu 9 Tray Settings Links to the Tray Settings menu 10 E Mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu 11 Set Password Links to the Security menu 12 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website 13 Order Supplies at Links to the Dell web page 14 Contact Dell Support at Links to the Dell support page web address http support dell com Right Frame The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame For details on the items displayed in the right frame see Details of the Menu Items Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool l 171 Buttons in the Right Frame F https 8 29 Jet AOE vainas NeW Microsoft Internet Explorer i File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Go Address https 138 Swe Stim Sapam ive Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 129 249 204 54 Printer Jobs IPv6 Link Local Switt ith SPW awit Pent Location Printer Settings Contact Person Print Server Settings Print Server Reports Pri Server Seinas Security
338. inter to recover Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly 016 505 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if user name and password used for POP3 server are set correctly 016 506 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if SMTP server or POP server is set 016 507 Press the Vv Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if user name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly 016 520 Contact your system administrator 016 521 016 522 016 523 016 524 016 527 016 531 The account is not registered Contact your system administrator 016 532 016 533 016 545 016 535 016 536 Understanding Printer Messages 591 016 541 Contact your system administrator 016 542 016 543 016 700 The file size exceeds the maximum for the printer to process Print the file from your computer 016 720 The file format is not supported by the USB memory Print the file from your computer 016 750 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 016 753 recover 016 755 016 756 Contact your system administrator 016 757 The account is not registered Contact your system administrator 016 758 The function cannot be used Contact your system administrator 016 759 Printable page limit is exceeded Contact your sy
339. inting from the 192 168 200 network address The example below describes how to enable printing from the 192 168 200 10 IP address 1 2 9 10 SMB Click the first column of the Access List row 1 Enter 192 168 200 10 in the Address field and 255 255 255 255 in the Address Mask field Select Permit Click the first column of the Access List row 2 Enter 192 168 200 0 in the Address field and 255 255 255 0 in the Address Mask field Select Reject Click the first column of the Access List row 3 Enter 192 168 0 0 in the Address field and 255 255 0 0 in the Address Mask field Select Permit Click Apply New Settings Purpose To specify the setting of the Server Message Block SMB protocol 228 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Values Host Name Sets the host name of the server computer Workgroup Sets the workgroup Maximum Sessions Sets the maximum number of sessions Unicode Support Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission Auto Master Mode Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode Encrypt Password Sets whether to encrypt the password Job Time Out Sets the job time out period between 60 and 3 600 seconds Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period between 60 and 3 600 seconds E Mail Alert Purpose To configure detailed settings for the E Mail Alert This page can al
340. ion 4 a On the Advanced tab set Bitmap complete Smoothing under Items to On Does this solve your problem 4 Enable Bitmap Text Smoothing in the printer The task is Go to action 5 driver complete a On the Advanced tab set Bitmap Text Smoothing under Items to On Does this solve your problem 5 Ifusing a downloaded font ensure that the font is The task is Contact Dell recommended for the printer operating system complete and the application being used Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 705 Banding Action Yes No 1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Proceed tothe Contact Dell Configuration Chart action a Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print corresponding on the Diagnosis tab to the location b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button of the problem The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed PHD unit 2 Is the cause of the problem located Fuser Contact Dell and replace the fuser e Main unit of the printer Contact Dell 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Auger mark 706
341. ion Chart 464 Plain 191 192 210 425 440 514 515 Plain Thick 191 192 210 514 515 Play of Sound 465 Point and Print 133 Polling Receive 550 Port Settings 222 Port Status 223 Port9100 217 223 226 488 Portrait 474 Power connector 41 Power On Wizard 213 Power Saver Time 501 Power Saver Time Deep Sleep 180 195 Power Saver Time Sleep 180 195 Power Saver Timer 434 Power Saver Timer Deep Sleep 422 Power Saver Timer Sleep 422 Power Saver Wake Up 422 434 Power Saver Wake Up OffHook Wake Up 180 195 Power supply 605 Power switch 40 Prefix Dial 189 206 432 462 497 Prefix Dial Num 432 462 498 Prefix Dial Number 189 206 Premier 193 Print cartridge level 176 Index 753 Print Color Regi Chart 441 Print Drivers Remote Client Account 235 Print from USB 199 Print from USB Defaults 191 43 Print ID 182 196 424 437 507 Print media 261 614 Source 266 279 Print Meter 194 427 Print Mode 183 Print quality guarantee 606 Print Server Reports 215 Print Server Settings 164 170 215 222 447 Print Server Setup Page 215 Print side 266 279 Print Text 182 196 424 437 507 Print User Settings 247 Print Volume 164 170 245 Printer Bitmap 169 Printer Driver 147 149 Printer Events 177 Printer Information 164 171 177 Printer Jobs 163 170 178 Printer Maintenance 209 Printer Page Count 246
342. is displayed in Name when there is no registration Address Allows you to view or edit the e mail address of an entry registered under the selected user ID or enter an e mail address for the new entry Apply New Click this button to apply the new settings Settings Restore Click this button to restore the previous settings Settings Back Click this button to return to the top page l This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button E Mail Group Delete Purpose To delete the e mail group entries registered on the E Mail Group page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the E mail Group top page Values ID Displays the selected group ID Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Default Setup Purpose To set the default e mail subject and message Values 252 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e mail subject Body Text Allows you to enter the default e mail message Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Server Address Server Address Top Page Purpose To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address
343. is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media When loading paper identify the recommended print side on the paper package and load the paper accordingly See Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder and Loading Print Media in the SSF for detailed loading instructions Paper Characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability It is recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock Weight The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g m to 216 g m 16 lb to 80 Ib bond grain long The single sheet feeder automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g m to 216 g m 16 lb to 80 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib may not feed properly and could cause paper jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper Curl Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper Print Media Guidelines 261 unwrapped even in the paper tray can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity When printing on curled paper straighten the paper and then insert it into the single sheet feeder Smoothness The degree of pape
344. ived fax the printer prints the fax Select Print and Forward to forward and print incoming faxes Fax Fwd Number You enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Prefix Dial You can specify whether or not to set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number dials before any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PBX Discard Size When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper installed in your printer you can set the printer to discard any excess at the bottom of the page If the received page is outside the margin you set it will print on two sheets of paper at the actual size When the document is within the margin and Discard SizeissettoAuto Reduction the printer reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper and discard does not occur If Discard Size is set to other than Auto Reduction the data within the margin will be discarded ECM You can set whether to enable or disable the ECM Error Correction Mode Modem Speed You can set the modem speed Country You can select the country where the printer is used You can change this setting when e No jobs in operation e No fax jobs waiting in the memory Fax Activity You can set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incom
345. ivers Customer Care Contact information order status warranty and repair information Downloads Drivers Manuals Printer documentation and product specifications Go to support dell com Select your region and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information 34 Finding Information Product Features This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links Printing from USB Memory USB Direct Print SH The Print from USB Memory feature enables you to print files directly from a USB memory without requiring you to start your computer and an application Multiple Up 2 in 1 Copy You can copy documents as reduced size two page documents on one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting Multiple Up on the operator panel This feature helps save paper Multiple Up in the Layout tab N up Print The Multiple Up feature enables you to print documents as reduced size documents containing 2 4 8 16 or 32 pages on a single sheet of paper by setting from the printer driver This feature helps save paper 2 Sided Duplex Copy a A y f You can copy documents on both sides ofa sheet of paper by selecting 2Sided onthe operator panel when you make a copy This feature helps save paper Product Features 35 Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image Scan to E mail When you want to send scanned data by e mail
346. k Mode 465 Environment Sensor Info 466 Clean Developer 467 Refresh Mode 467 Resetting Defaults 0 467 When Using the Tool Box 2 467 22 Understanding the Printer Menus 469 Reports List 2 Edere tie E eB ae De ey 469 System Settings 0 469 Panel Settings 04 469 PEL Fonts List t p p64 G4 dep ek eB 469 14 Contents PCL MacroList 022 469 PDF Fonts Eisto sapre a irine a a e 470 Job History lt s p auc Ga Se eee 470 Error History oaa 470 Print Meter roc insira e a g 470 Color Test Page ealo sann a diin ai ED 470 Protocol Monitor 470 Speed Dial 2 0 470 Address Book 470 Server Address 00 0 471 Pax Activity 4 20 35 BAe Se Ray 471 Fax Pending nb at ee ee eS 471 Stored Documents 471 AdminMenu 4 471 Phone Book eot 2 6 ee ee eee 471 Print Language o csee cacans nascono eee eee ee 472 Network thi iive deeb t cay aes 482 Fax Settings 2 taste sans iota she s dae Draba 490 System Settings 0 0 e cee ee eee eee 501 Maintenance eee eee eee eee 513 Secure Settings sag eet aide sg ae aaa 519 USB Settings 00 521 Defaults Settings 2 0 2 2 000 522 Copy Defaults 2 2 2 0000000 522 Scan Defaults 22
347. k start Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers For Windows Server 2008 Click Start Control Panel Printers Printing For Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Click Start Devices and Printers Right click the printer and select Printing Preferences The Paper Output tab appears From Paper Source select Tray 1 or Tray 2 From Duplex select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge K NOTE For details on the Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge options see Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge Click OK A window that shows the instructions for manual duplex printing appears The even numbered pages are printed from the printer Clicking the OK button on your printer driver will first print the even numbered pages of your document If your document consists of six pages its even numbered pages are printed in the order of page 6 4 and then 2 After the even numbered pages are printed a message Insert Output to Tray 1 Tray 2 071 920 or 072 920 appears on the operator panel Remove the stack of output from the output tray Load the stack back into the tray without turning it over with the blank side face up A message Press V to continue printing 071 921 or 072 921 appears on the operator panel Press the vA Set button Printing 295 The odd numbered pages are printed in the order of page 1 3 and then 5 K NOTE You cannot duplex
348. l E Mail Address E Mail Address Allows you to view edit or create e mail address entries E Mail Group Allows you to view edit or create e mail group entries Default Setup Allows you to view edit or set the default e mail subject and message Server Address Server Address Allows you to view edit or create server address entries Phone Book FAX Speed Dial Allows you to view edit or create speed dial entries FAX Group Allows you to view edit or create fax group entries E Mail Address The E mail Address page includes the following subpages E Mail Address Allows you to view edit or create e mail address entries E Mail Group Allows you to view edit or create e mail group entries Default Setup Allows you to view edit or set the default e mail subject and message E Mail Address Top Page Purpose To view the e mail address entries registered on the E Mail Address page Values Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button ID Displays the user ID Name Displays the user name Not in Use is displayed in Name when there is no registration Address Displays the e mail address of the user Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 249 Confirm Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user Change ID
349. l Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out Port9100 Port Status Displays the port status Port Number Displays the port number Connection Time Out Displays the connection time out period Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 217 IPP Port Status Displays the port status Printer URI Displays the printer URI Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out Port Number Displays the port number Maximum Displays the maximum number of connections Sessions received simultaneously by the client WSD Port Status Displays the WSD port status Port Number Displays the WSD port number Receive Time Displays the receive time out period Out Notification Displays the notification time out period Time Out Maximum Displays the maximum number of TTLs Number of TTL Maximum Displays the maximum number of notifications Number of Notification Network Port Status Displays the port status TWAIN Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out HTTP Port Status Displays the port status Port Number Displays the port number Simultaneous Displays the maximum number of simultaneous Connections connections Connection Displays the connection time out period Time Out 218 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool SMB Port Status Displays the port status Host Name Displays t
350. l Installation or Custom Installation from the installation wizard and then click Install If you select Custom Installation you can select the specific software you want to install Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations screen appears To print a test page click Print Test Page USB Printing A personal printer is a printer connected to your computer or a print server using a USB If your printer is connected to a network and not your computer see Network Connection Setup For installing XML Paper Specification XPS printer driver K NOTE XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Edition Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 115 Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 O WAN DN FW NY Oo 11 12 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_ 2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a local printer Select the port connected to this product and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printe
351. l Uses 1OBASE T Full duplex 100BASE TX Half Uses 100BASE TX Half duplex 100BASE TX Full Uses 100BASE TX Full duplex 1000BASE T Full Uses 1000BASE T Full duplex 482 Understanding the Printer Menus Wireless Status K NOTE Wireless Status feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network Purpose To confirm the wireless communication status Values Connection Good Acceptable Low No Reception SSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network Encryption Type Displays the encryption type Wireless Setup K NOTE Wireless Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network Purpose To configure the wireless network interface Values Understanding the Printer Menus l 483 Manual Enter Network SSID Specifies a name to identify the wireless Setup network Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered Infra Select when you configure the wireless setting through the structure access point such as a wireless router No Security Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security method from WEP WPA PSK TKIP and WPA PSK AES WEP 64Bit Specifies the WEP 64bit key to use through the wireless network Up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered Transmit Specifies the transmit key from Key WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Ke
352. lBox Print Public MailBox Print and Proof Print Then select your user name from a list Secure Print and Private MailBox Print require the password you specified in the driver when you sent the job To print the stored documents use the procedure below 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until Job Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press Sw button until Print Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press button until the desired job type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The stored document will be printed Specifying Your Password on the Operator Panel Secure Print Private MailBox Print When you select Secure Print or Private MailBox Print from the Print Menu after selecting your user name the following prompt appears 22K ae 2 ak aK kk k Printing 299 Use the buttons on the operator panel to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver The password you entered will be displayed as asterisks to ensure confidentiality If you enter an invalid password the message Wrong Password appears Wait three seconds or press the vA Set or _ Cancel button to return to the screen for user selection When you enter a valid password you have access to all print jobs matching the user name and password you entered The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen You can then choose to print or de
353. laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers 262 Print Media Guidelines It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media When choosing any print media you should consider the weight fiber content and color Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer e Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless paper carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper e Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser e Preprinted paper that requires a registration the precise print location on the page greater than 0 09 inches such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms e Coated paper erasable bond synthetic paper and thermal paper e Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface paper or curled paper e Recycled paper containing more than 25 post consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19 309 e Multiple part forms or documents e Print quality may deteriorate blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text when printing on talc or acid pap
354. lay Displays the interval between transmission attempts Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts Redial Delay Displays the redial interval Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Rev Tone Displays the tone to start Remote Receive Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Name Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes Fax Number Displays the fax number of the printer which will be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD setting Duplex Print Displays whether to print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper Sent Fax Fwd Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination Fax Fwd Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num Displays a prefix dial number This number dials before any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Displays whether to delete tex
355. le the USB driver is automatically installed Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel You need to set the printer language country clock date and time when you turn on printer for the first time When you turn the printer on the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the operator panel Follow the steps below to set the initial settings K NOTE If you do not start configuring the initial settings Ready to Print appears on the operator panel in three minutes After that you can set the following initial setup by enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed Connecting Your Printer 97 For more information on operator panel see Understanding the Printer Menus For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Please Select Language appears Press button until the desired language is highlighted and then press the Set button English Frangais Italiano Deutsch Espa ol Dansk Nederlands Norsk Svenska 2 Please Select Country appears Press button until the desired country is highlighted and then press the vA Set button The default time zone paper size and display format are automatically set when you select a country Country Default Time Default Display Format Zone Setting Paper Size Algeria 1
356. led if the time out time is exceeded Values Off Disables the job time out On 30sec Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the 5 300 sec Computer Date amp Time Purpose To specify the date and time formats Values Set Date amp Time Sets the time zone Time Zone Set Date Sets the date depending on the Date Format settings Set Time Sets the time Date Format Sets the date format Time Format 12H Sets the time in 12 hour format 24H Sets the time in 24 hour format Audio Tone Purpose To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears Values Understanding the Printer Menus 503 k Control Panel off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct Normal Loud Invalid Key off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect Normal Loud Machine Ready Off Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job Soft Normal Loud Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job Copy Completed Off Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete Soft Normal Loud Emits a tone when a copy job is complete Job Completed Off Does not emit a tone when a job oth
357. lete jobs matching the password you entered See Printing the Stored Jobs for more information Deleting Stored Jobs With Secure Print a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time if entered on the operator panel or at turning off the printer For other jobs these jobs remain stored until you delete them on the operator panel or turn off the printer Printing from USB Memory The Print from USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory by operating from the operator panel NOTICE To prevent damage to your printer DO NOT connect any device other than USB memory to the USB port of the printer NOTICE DO NOT remove the USB memory from the USB port until the printer has finished printing The USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2 0 devices You must use only an authorized USB memory with an A plug type connector Use only a metal shielded USB memory A plug type 300 Printing Supported File Formats Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB memory PDF TIFF e JPEG To print a file ina USB memory 1 Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the printer 2 Ensure that Print from USB Memory is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 3 Press button until the desired file is highlighted and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Only the following characters are displayed on the operator panel
358. lick Drum to clean the drum Mode Resetting Defaults After executing this function and rebooting the printer all the menu parameters except the parameters for the network are reset to their default values When Using the Tool Box K NOTE Understanding the Tool Box Menus 467 468 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple pp p printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Ensure that the Printer Maintenance tab is open Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page The Reset Defaults page appears Click System Section button The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings Understanding the Tool Box Menus Understanding the Printer Menus When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users the access to the Admin Menu can be limited This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user default that has been set by the administrator However you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Report List Use the
359. ll 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Vertical blanks Troubleshooting Guide 699 Bi DE IJ Action Yes No 1 Ensure the light path is not covered The task is Go to action 2 a Remove the PHD unit and keep it in the dark complete place See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD Unit b Check the light path and then remove the shielding c Re install the PHD unit See Installing a PHD Unit d Launch the Tool Box and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab e Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem 700 Troubleshooting Guide Ghosting Action Yes No 1 Locate the
360. ll as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell installed hardware In addition to this technician assisted technical support online technical support is available at Dell Support Additional technical support options may be available for purchase Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell installed software and peripherals Support for third party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer including those purchased and or installed through Software amp Peripherals DellWare ReadyWare and Custom Factory Integration CFI DellPlus Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites www dell com www dell com ap Asian Pacific countries only www dell com jp Japan only www euro dell com Europe only www dell com la Latin American and Caribbean countries www dell ca Canada only You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e mail addresses e Dell Support websites support dell com support jp dell com Japan only support euro dell com Europe only Appendix 739 Dell Support e mail addresses mobile_support us dell com support us dell com la techsupport dell com Latin America and Caribbean countries only apsupport dell com Asian Pacific countries only e Dell Marketing and Sales e mail addresses apmarketing dell com Asian Pacific countries only sales_canada dell com
361. ll automatically redial the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts see Available Fax Settings Options K NOTE The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered Sending a Delayed Fax The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time to take advantage of lower long distance rates 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover Faxing 395 10 For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Press the amp Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution For adjusting the contrast see Adjusting the Document Contrast Press g button until Delayed Start is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press or w button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press af or W button and then press the va Set button Press a or g button until Fax to is highlighted and then press the YW Set button Ensure that Keypad is highlighted and then press the y Set button Enter the number of the remote mac
362. ll files stored in the Document optional 512 MB memory module Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 213 Non Dell Toner Purpose To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer NOTICE Using a non Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non Dell toner cartridges Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used Clock Settings Purpose To specify the clock settings Values Date Format Sets the date format yy mm dd mm dd yy or dd mm yy Time Format Sets the time format 24H or 12H Time Zone Sets the time zone Set Date Sets the current date Set Time Sets the current time Web Link Customization Purpose To specify a link used for ordering consumables which can be accessed from Order Supplies at in the left frame Values Select Reorder Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at URL 214 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Regular Displays the regular URL http accessories us dell com sna that can be linked to Order Supplies at Premier Displays the premier URL http premier dell com that can be linked to Order Supplies at Print Server Settings Use t
363. llows the users to select a print cartridge the Advanced tab mode that uses less toner The image quality will be lower when this feature is used Maintaining Your Printer 613 Supply Setting Function Print Multiple Up in the The printer prints two or more pages on one side media Layout tab of a sheet Values for Multiple Up are 2 Up 4 Up 8 Up 16 Up or 32 Up Combined with the duplex setting Multiple Up allows you to print up to 64 pages on one sheet of paper 32 images on the front and 32 on the back Ordering Supplies You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and click the Order Supplies at to order toner for your printer You can also order toner cartridges by the following method 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Dell Supplies Management System The Dell Supplies Management System window appears 2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list If ordering from the web a When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two way communication a window that prompts you to type the Service Tag appears Type your Dell printer Service Tag in the field provided Your Service Tag number is located inside the toner access cover of your printer b Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list c
364. lor_MFP ppd gz from the Search for Drivers list K NOTE You can specify the printer name in Set Name h Confirm the settings and click OK For USB connections a Click Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP vx x Dell Dell_2155cdn_Color_MFP ppd gz from the Search for Drivers list K NOTE You can specify the printer name in Set Name Printing From the Applications When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 155 However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information on specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue You can set the default queue when you add the printer 1 Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser 2 Type the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated 3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Printer The Printer Configurations dialog box opens 4 Click Edit A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens 5 Confirm
365. lorer Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Pu EE z gt Printer Jobs IPy6 Link Local lt b ee Location Printer Settings Contact Person Print Server Settings Printer Status Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status Refresh Address Book Printer Information Cyan Cartridge Level OK Tray Settings Magenta Cartridge Level OK E Mail Alert Yellow Cartridge Level OK Snae SSS Black Cartridge Level OK Online Help see Order Supplies at Consumables Status www dell com supplies PHD unit Contact Dell Support at support dell com Paper Trays Status Capacity Size Hinala Chaat Canta Aad nnn 4 ilaina 3 ja E E Doe B intenet 5 Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 6 Reboot the printer Restore the wireless settings on your computer K NOTE If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool change the wireless settings using this tool Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 b Select Network Connections from Control Panel c Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties d Select Wireless Network tab e Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked f Click Advanced g Do eithe
366. low cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 935 Open the toner access cover Remove the used magenta cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 936 Open the toner access cover Remove the used cyan cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 937 Open the toner access cover Remove the used black cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 960 Open the toner access cover Remove the unsupported yellow cartridge and install a supported cartridge 093 961 Open the toner access cover Remove the unsupported magenta cartridge and install a supported cartridge 093 962 Open the toner access cover Remove the unsupported cyan cartridge and install a supported cartridge 093 963 Open the toner access cover Remove the unsupported black cartridge and install a supported cartridge 093 965 Open the front cover Remove the unsupported PHD unit and install a supported unit 093 970 Open the toner access cover and make sure that the yellow cartridge is fully installed 093 971 Open the toner access cover and make sure that the magenta cartridge is fully installed 093 972 Open the toner access cover and make sure that the cyan cartridge is fully installed 093 973 Open the toner access cover and make sure that the black cartridge is fully installed 116 752 Press the V Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover 117 361 Turn off the printer and turn it on again Contact customer support if this failure is repea
367. lugged into the outlet are working e Optional memory is properly installed If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and then turn on the printer This often fixes the problem Display Problems Problem Action After the printer is turned on e Turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and turn on the display on the operator the printer panel is blank keeps showing Please wait or the back light is not lit Self Test Message appears on the operator panel When the test is completed Ready is displayed Menu settings changed from Settings in the software program the printer driver or the operator panel have no the printer utilities are overriding the settings made on effect the operator panel Troubleshooting Guide 685 Printing Problems Problem Action Job did not print or incorrect characters printed Ensure that the top menu appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print Press the Menu button to return to the top menu Ensure that the print media is loaded in the printer Press the Menu button to return to the top menu Verify that the printer is using the correct page description language PDL Verify that you are using the correct printer driver Ensure that the correct USB or Ethernet cable is securely connected to the printer Verify that the correct print media size is
368. ly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel K NOTE For information on how to add a new entry see Setting Speed Dial 562 Understanding Your Printer Software Using Address Book Editor You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries Address Book Editor is synchronized with the address books of your printer and updated simultaneously as you save changes to the entries in Address Book Editor K NOTE This tool is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh K NOTE When the printer and your computer is connected via USB you must install the scanner driver With Address Book Editor you can e Automatically retrieves data from the address books of your printer at startup Synchronizes with the printer e Allows you to import the Address Book data from CSV file WAB file MAPI and LDAP server e Allows you to export the Address Book data into a CSV file Address Book Panel There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor Device Address Book for Fax E mail and Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax Understanding Your Printer Software 563 For Microsoft Windows Address Book Editor Eile Edit View Tool Help et A Device Address Book HIN amp Fax E ri save J PE PC Fax Address Book ID 001 Name Sample Phone Number 000000 Note 001 008 can be used as Speed Dial IDs Addr
369. main name Name IPv4 Get DNS Allows you to enable or disable the Server Address automatic setting of the DNS server from DHCP address via DHCP Manual DNS Manually sets the DNS server address in Server Address xxx xxx xxx xxx format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not selected IPv6 Get DNS Select the check box to get the DNS server Server Address address automatically from the DHCPv6 from DHCPv6 lite server lite Manual DNS Sets the DNS server address Server Address Priority to Select the check box to enable the DNS IPv6 DNS Name Resolution feature Name Resolution Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool jt 225 WINS WINS Mode Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP WINS Manually sets the primary WINS server address in Primary XXX XXX XXX Xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected Server WINS Manually sets the secondary backup WINS server address Secondary in XXX XXX XXX xxx format when WINS Mode is not Server selected LPD Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 1 000 seconds Time Out IP Filter Click IP Filter IPv4 to set the IP Filter settings on the IP iPv4 Filter IPv4 page Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9 000 to 9 999 Connection Sets the connection time out period between 1 and 1 000 Time Out seconds IP Filter Click IP Filter IPv4 to set the IP filter s
370. mall characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer 480 Understanding the Printer Menus High Speed Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode but the quality is less PDF Password Purpose To specify the password to print the secure PDF Value Enter PDF Password Enter the password to print the secure PDF Collated Purpose To specify whether to sort the job Value Off Does not sort the job On Sorts the job Output Size Purpose To specify the output paper size for PDF Value A4 Letter Auto 1 The default paper size is displayed Layout Purpose To specify the output layout Value Understanding the Printer Menus 481 Auto 100 No Zoom Booklet 2 Pages Up 4 Pages Up Output Color Purpose To specify the output color Value Color Auto Black amp White Network Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless network K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Ethernet Purpose To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Auto Detects the Ethernet settings automatically 10BASE T Half Uses 1OBASE T Half duplex 10BASE T Ful
371. marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Chart Print Purpose To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer The chart is printed to A4 or letter size paper Understanding the Tool Box Menus 463 Values Pitch Configuration Chart Prints full halftone pages for yellow magenta cyan and black Also prints pages to check the pitch A total of five pages are output Ghost Configuration Chart Prints a chart to check for ghost printing One page is printed 4 Colors Configuration Chart Bands of yellow magenta cyan and black are printed with varying density One page is printed MQ Chart Prints charts to check for the binding in A4 or Letter Alignment Chart Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper One page is printed Drum Refresh Configuration Chart Prints a chart to check the light fatigue of the drum cartridge Machine Check Purpose To check the operation of the printer components Values 464 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Machine Main Motor f Click Start to operate the main motor inside the Check Operation Check printer Confirm the motor sound Fuser Motor Click Start to operate the fuser motor Confirm Operation Check the motor sound Feed Roll Operation Click Start to operate the feed roll Confirm the Check motor sound REGI CLUTCH Click Start to operate
372. mode Maximum document length Document glass 297 mm ADF 355 6 mm Paper size Letter A4 depending on a country Resolution Standard R8 x 3 85 I mm Fine R8 x 7 71 mm Super Fine 400 dpi x 400 dpi Photo R8 x 7 71 mm User Memory 4 MB 320 pages Halftone 256 levels 610 Specifications Maintaining Your Printer 611 612 Maintaining Your Printer You need to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Determining the Status of Supplies If your printer is connected to the network the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels Type the printer s IP address in your web browser to view this information To use the E Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies type the desired e mail address in the e mail list box On the operator panel you can also confirm the following e Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing However the printer can only display information about one item at a time e Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge Conserving Supplies You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper Supply Setting Function Toner Toner Saving Mode in This check box a
373. n Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press w button until Speed Dial is highlighted and then press the V Set button A list of your speed dial entries is printed Phone Book You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books 1 412 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Press the amp Fax button Ensure that Fax to is highlighted and then press the Set button To select a destination do either one of the followings e Select from the local phone book Press g button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the V Set button Search from the local phone book or the server phone book Press Sg button until Search Local Phone Book or Search Server Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Set button K NOTE For more information on phone book and server phone book see Address Books Faxing Z NOTE If you are using the server phone book Server Phone Book must be set to On For details see Server Phone Book and LDAP Server K NOTE The phone numbers need to be registered before you can select Phone Book on the operator panel 5 Press gt button to select or enter a keyword to search destinations and th
374. n Web Tool The output is too light Toner smears or print comes off e Random spots Blurred images The entire output is blank Streaks appear on the output e Part or the entire output is black Pitched color dots e Vertical blanks e Ghosting Light induced fatigue Fog e Bead Carry Out BCO e Jagged characters Banding 688 Troubleshooting Guide e Auger mark e Wrinkled Stained paper e Damage on the leading edge of paper The output is too light Action Yes No 1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is Go to action 2 replaced Confirm the amount of toner left in complete each toner cartridge a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary Does this solve your problem 2 Ifyou are using non Dell brand toner cartridges The task is Go to action 3 disable the Non Dell Toner option complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Non Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab b Ensure that the On check box is not selected Does this solve your problem 3 Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer The task is Go to action 4 driver complete a On the Advanced tab ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected Does this solve your problem Troubleshooting Guide 689 Action Yes No 4 The print media surface may be uneven Try The task i
375. n application is running close the application once restart the application and then try scanning again The scanner driver has not been registered on your computer and cannot be accessed from ScanButton Manager Install the scanner driver If the scanner driver is installed uninstall it and then re install it again After the installation of the scanner driver is completed re install the ScanButton Manager 728 Troubleshooting Guide Problem Action Failed to scan your document on the printer via ScanButton Manager Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB cable Check whether the printer is on If the printer is on reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again If a scan application is running close the application once restart the application and then try scanning again Network connection cannot be used Connect with the USB cable Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Programs and Features in Windows Vista and Windows 7 on your computer and then re install it again Failed to create an image file via ScanButton Manager Ensure there is sufficient space in your hard disk Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re install it again Failed to initialize ScanButton Manager Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel Ad
376. n for the server computer Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 1 Click Start Network Start your user name Network for Windows 7 2 Click Network discovery and file sharing are turned off Network computers and devices are not visible Click to change Click Turn on network discovery and file sharing 4 Click Yes turn on network discovery and file sharing for all public networks Disable Simple File Sharing K NOTE This procedure is required for Windows XP and Windows XP 64 bit Edition Click start Control Panel Select Appearance and Themes Select Folder Options AA U N e On the View tab clear the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box and then click OK Click Start Control Panel Select Performance and Maintenance Select Administrative Tools Click Local Security Policy Click Local Policies gt Security Options O 2 NN nn 10 Right click Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts and select Properties 11 Ensure Classic local users authenticate as themselves is selected Installing the Printer Driver K NOTE Installation is not supported on Windows XP Home Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Home Basic 64 bit Edition Windows Vista Home Premium 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Starter Windows 7 Home Basic Windows 7 Home Premium Windows 7 Home Basic 64 bit Edition and Windows 7 Home Premium 64 bit
377. n open and close the front cover 075 102 Pull the jammed paper out of the SSF Open and close the front cover 075 922 Remove the paper from the SSF 075 923 Pull the paper out of the SSF Reload the paper in the SSF 077 300 Close the front cover 077 301 Close the toner access cover 091 912 Remove the ribbon from the PHD unit Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 091 972 Open the front cover and make sure that the PHD unit is fully installed 092 310 Clean the CTD sensor 092 910 093 919 Remove and shake the yellow cartridge Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 920 Remove and shake the magenta cartridge Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 921 Remove and shake the cyan cartridge Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 922 Remove and shake the black cartridge Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 093 930 Open the toner access cover Remove the used yellow cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 931 Open the toner access cover Remove the used magenta cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 932 Open the toner access cover Remove the used cyan cartridge and install a new cartridge 093 933 Open the toner access cover Remove the used black cartridge and install a new cartridge Understanding Printer Messages 599 093 934 Open the toner access cover Remove the used yel
378. n until the desired settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Sharper Makes the copy image sharper than the original Normal The color clarity of the image is the same as the original Softer Makes the copy image softer than the original Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Color Saturation To adjust the amount of colors of the copy to make the colors darker or lighter than the original 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the gt Copy button Press button until Color Saturation is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press or button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the y Set button High Makes the color of the copy more vivid Normal The color saturation is the same as the original Low Makes the color of the copy less vivid Denotes the factory default setting Copying 325 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Auto Exposure To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document
379. nd Web Link Customization pages Paper Density Purpose To specify the paper density Values Plain Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal Label Sets the density of labels to Light or Normal Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 209 Adjust BTR Purpose To specify the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller Values Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of 6 to 6 Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of 6 to 6 Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of 6 to 6 Covers Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick cover paper within the range of 6 to 6 Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of 6 to 6 Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of 6 to 6 Coated Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick coated paper within the range of 6 to 6 Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of 6 to 6 Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of 6 to 6 Adjust Fuser Purpose
380. nd then press the Y Set button Press button until Fax Defaults is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press or yw button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the V Set button To return to the top screen of the Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Faxing Know Your Printer 419 420 Understanding the Tool Box Menus The Tool Box allows you to view specify and diagnose the system settings The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report Printer Maintenance and Diagnosis tabs K NOTE A Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is set on the printer In this case input the password that you have already specified and click OK to apply the settings K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Printer Settings Report The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Printer Information Menu Settings Reports TCP IP Settings Defaults Settings and Fax Settings pages Printer Information Purpose To display the system information of the printer Values Dell Service Tag Number Displays the service tag number of your printer Express Service Code Displays the
381. nding the Printer Menus Font Purpose To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer Values CG Times LetterGothic CourierPS CG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS Ob CG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS Bd CG Times Bdlt Albertus Md CourierPS BdOb Univers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPS Univers MdlIt Clarendon Cd Palatino Roman Univers Bd Coronet Palatino It Univers BdIt Marigold Palatino Bd Univers MdCd Arial Palatino BdIt Univers MdCdIt Arial It ITCBookman Lt Univers BdCd Arial Bd ITCBookman LtIt Univers BdCdlIt Arial BdlIt ITCBookmanDm AntiqueOlv Times New ITCBookmanDm It AntiqueOlv It Times New It HelveticaNr AntiqueOlv Bd Times New Bd HelveticaNr Ob CG Omega Times New BdIt HelveticaNr Bd CG Omega It Symbol HelveticaNrBdOb CG Omega Bd Wingdings N C Schbk Roman CG Omega Bdlt Line Printer N C Schbk It GaramondAntiqua Times Roman N C Schbk Bd Garamond Krsv Times It N C Schbk Balt Garamond Hlb Times Bd ITC A G Go Bk GaramondKrsvHIb Times BdIt ITC A G Go BkOb Courier Helvetica ITC A G Go Dm Courier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmOb Courier Bd Helvetica Bd ZapfC Mdit Understanding the Printer Menus 475 Courier Bdlt Helvetica BdOb Zap Dingbats Symbol Set Purpose To specify a symbol set for a specified font Values ROMAN 8 ISO 17 MC TEXT SYMBOL ISO 21 MS PUB WIN 3 0 ISO
382. ne Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 195 Job Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete or disables the tone Fault Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally or disables the tone Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs or disables the tone Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper or disables the tone Low Toner Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low or disables the tone Auto Clear Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear or disables the tone Base Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel screen returns to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu or disables the tone All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones or disables all the tones mm inch Sets the measurement unit to be used on the operator panel screen as either mm or inches Default Print Paper Size Sets the default print paper size Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs Print ID Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper Print Text Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data which is not supported by the printer as tex
383. ne multifunction Color Printer printer Procedure K NOTE The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using K NOTE To use this feature you must install the fax driver For details see Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD for Windows or Installing the Drivers and Software for Macintosh Open the file you want to send by fax 2 Open the print dialog box from the application and then select Dell 2155cdn MFP Fax 3 Click Preferences in Windows or select FAX Setting in Macintosh For Microsoft Windows Faxing 397 General Select Printer Add Printer paysi i DELL 2155cdn Status Offline Location ee Find Printer Page Range al Number of copies 1 cee re For Apple Macintosh Printer Dell 2155cdn Color MFP ma fa Presets Standard B Copies l Collated Pages AIl OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 A 20 99 by 29 70 cm iA t FAX Setting a Orientation 4 When the setting dialog box appears specify the following settings K NOTE The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job 398 Faxing For Microsoft Windows s Printing Preferences Paper Output Graphics Layout Watermarks Forms Advanced Paper Summary Favorites ag A Standard Paper Size A4
384. network feature and reboot the printer You can also initialize NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu Values Initialize NIC Click the Start button to initialize NVRAM revert network NVRAM Memory and settings to the factory default settings and reboot the network restart printer capability Restart Printer Click the Start button to reboot the printer Security The Security tab includes Set Password LDAP Server LDAP User Mapping SSL TLS IPsec 802 1x and IP Filter IPv4 Set Password Purpose To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Set the password of the operator panel from Panel Lock in the Printer Settings This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the Left Frame K NOTE To restore the password to the default NULL initialize the non volatile memory NVM Values Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters 238 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Re enter Administrator Confirms the set password Password Access denial by the Sets the amount of time the administrator should wait for authentication failure of the access to the printer setup from Dell Printer the Administrator Configuration Web Tool Sets the time period from 5 up to 255 seconds The access 1s denied if the time out time is exceeded
385. nfigured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers 143 aon nn A Start Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box Select Line Printer Daemon LPD for Protocol Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP for Print Using K NOTE When printing is set up using IP printing the queue name is displayed as blank You do not need to specify it K NOTE Entry of Location is optional Click Add When Using Bonjour 1 2 O 2 NAURA 10 144 Turn on the printer Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Start the Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list Name and Print Using are automatically entered Click Add Specify the options installed to the printer and then click Continue Confirm that the printer is displayed on the Printer list
386. ng the language and proxy type lt http nnn nnn nnn nnn gt the IP address of the printer in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 166 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For Firefox 2 0 or Later Setting Up the Display Language 1 2 3 Select Options from the Tools menu Click Advanced If you are using Firefox 2 0 click Choose in the General tab If you are using Firefox 3 0 click Choose in the Content tab Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list enu For example English en or English United States en us e Italian it Spanish es e German de French fr Dutch nl e Norwegian no e Swedish sv e Danish da Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non Proxy 1 2 3 4 5 Select Options from the Tools menu Click Advanced tab Click Network on the Options dialog box Click Connection Settings If you are using Firefox 2 0 do one of the following e Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box e Select the Auto detect proxy settings for this network check box Select the Manual proxy configuration check box and then enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box e Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 167 If you are using Firefox 3 0 do one of the following e
387. ng them Print Prints all documents and saves them in memory Delete Deletes all documents from print memory document n Print and Deletes the specified document from Delete print memory after printing it Print Prints the specified document and saves it in memory Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory l This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored 2 The document name is displayed The save date and time are displayed if the docu ment name is not specified Proof Print K NOTE Proof Print feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable Purpose To print only one copy and check the print result before printing all of the copies This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time Values Understanding the Printer Menus 533 Select User ID All Print and Deletes all documents from print Documents Delete memory after printing them Print Prints all documents and save them in memory Delete Deletes all documents from print memory document n Print and Deletes the specified document from Delete print memory after printing it Print Prints the specified document and save it in memory Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory l This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored 2 The document name is displayed The save date and time are displayed if the
388. ngs Purpose To configure the power management of the printer auto clear time alarm tones time out time mm inch setting job log auto print position of the Print ID setting of the dump print setting of the additional memory setting of the substitute sheet and operator panel language settings Values Understanding the Tool Box Menus 433 Power Sleep Saver Timer 1 30 minutes 7 3 minutes Sets the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job Deep Sleep 5 60 minutes 10 minutes Sets the amount of transition time between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode se Power Saver Off Sets whether to wake up from the Sleep Wake Up On or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is Off Auto Reset 45 seconds Sets the amount of time before the 1 minute printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults 2 minutes when no additional settings are made 3 minutes 4 minutes 434 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Audio Tone A Control off Does not emit a tone when the operator Panel panel input is correct Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when the operator panel input is correct Loud Invalid Key off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume Normal when the operator panel input is incorrect
389. ngs report under General If the memory capacity has not increased turn off the printer unplug the power cable and re install the memory module If you installed the optional memory module after installing the printer driver update your driver by following the instructions for the operating system you are using If the printer is on a network update the driver for each client Installing Optional Accessories 57 Updating Your Driver to Detect Memory Module Microsoft Windows 1 Click Start Devices and Printers 1 Windows 7 XOA 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Windows Server Color Printer and select Printer properties 2008 R2 x64 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box Windows Vista 1 Click Start Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Vista x64 Printers 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers dialog box Windows Server 2008 1 Click Start Control Panel Printers Server 2008 x64 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Cl
390. nit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem The entire output is blank Action Yes No 1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is Go to action 2 replaced Confirm the amount of toner left in complete each toner cartridge a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary Does this solve your problem 2 Ifyou are using non Dell brand toner cartridges The task is Go to action 3 disable the Non Dell Toner option complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Non Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab b Ensure that the On check box is not selected Does this solve your problem 694 Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 3 Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer The task is Go to action 4 driver complete a On the Advanced tab ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected Does this solve your problem 4 The print media surface may be uneven Try The task is Go to action 5 changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete driver For example change the plain paper to thick a On the Paper Output tab change the Paper Type setting Does this solve your problem 5 Verify that the corr
391. nited States zs Order Online e Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies e URL list Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink is clicked Order By Phone Phone number list Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer supplies Preferences To open Preferences 1 Click the info i button in the Printer Status window Preferences appears K NOTE The info i button appears on the lower right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window The info i button is a standard used across all widgets 570 Understanding Your Printer Software Printer Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Seis F Status Update Interval moo o sec 0 600 SNMP Community Name ver 0 2 4 Service Tag en TS Printer Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu The first printer displayed in this list is set as default Status Update Interval You can specify the update interval of the printer status By default it is set to obtain the printer information every 10 seconds It can be set from 0 second to 600 seconds SNMP Community Name You can change the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
392. nitialize the PrintMeter Tray Settings Purpose To specify the paper types and sizes for the standard 250 sheet tray and the optional 250 sheet feeder respectively Values Understanding the Tool Box Menus 443 Tray 1 Paper Type Plain Sets the type of paper loaded in the Plain Thick standard 250 sheet tray Covers Covers Thick Label Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain Side 2 Plain Thick Side 2 Recycled Side 2 Color Side 2 Tray 1 Paper Size A4 Sets the size of paper loaded in the A5 standard 250 sheet tray B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Monarch Landscape DL DL Landscape C5 Custom Size 444 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Tray 1 Custom Size 127 355 mm Sets the length of custom size paper Y 5 0 14 0 inch loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray 297 mm 11 7 inch Tray 1 Custom Size 77 215 mm Sets the width of custom size paper X loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray 3 0 8 5 inch 210 mm 8 3 inch Tray 1 Display Popup On Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Col
393. nmark Malta Tunisia Dominican Republic Mexico Turkey Egypt Netherlands U A E Estonia New Zealand United Kingdom Finland Nicaragua United States France Norway Unknown Germany Panama Greece Poland Guatemala Portugal Fax Activity Purpose Understanding the Printer Menus 499 To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Values Auto Print Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and yp p ry g outgoing fax communications No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Purpose To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission soe Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission Fax Broadcast Purpose To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations Fax Protocol Purpose To set wheth
394. nscrewing them with a coin or similar object 652 Removing Options K NOTE The screw hole is located in 216 mm recess from the front of the printer 4 Gently lift the printer off the tray module and place it on a level surface A CAUTION Two people are required to lift the printer The printer should be lifted holding the front and back Never lift the printer from its sides 5 Insert the standard 250 sheet tray into the printer and push until it stops Removing Options 653 NOTICE Do not use excessive force on the tray Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer 6 Reconnect all cables including the power cable into the back of the printer and turn on the printer Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter A CAUTION When you remove the optional wireless adapter be sure to turn off the printer unplug the power cable and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Turn the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise K NOTE Loosen the screw You do not need to remove the screw 654 l Removing Options 3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer 5 Remove the wireless adapter from the printer by releasing the adapter s hook while pushing the wireless adapter towards the front of the printer Removing Options 655 6 Close the control board cover and then slide it t
395. nt a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm up period The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer or remote fax machine You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel Understanding the Printer Menus 501 Power Saver Wake Up Purpose To specify whether to wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off Values OffHook Wake Up Off Does not wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off On Wakes up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Of f Auto Reset Purpose To automatically reset the settings for COPY SCAN or FAX to the default settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time Values 45sec Imin 2min 3min 4min Fault Time out Purpose To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally The print job is cancelled if the time out time is exceeded Values Off Disables the fault time out On 60sec Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job 3 300 sec that stops abnormally 502 Understanding the Printer Menus Job Time out Purpose To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer The print job is cancel
396. nt is jammed in the paper feed area a Open the ADF cover carefully pulling it to the right Clearing Jams 661 If you find it difficult to pull the document c Remove the release roller assembly and remove the document by gently pulling it straight up d Insert the release roller assembly and press down the release lever 662 l Clearing Jams If the document is jammed in the paper exit area e Remove the jammed document from the document output tray f Close the ADF cover and then load the documents back into the ADF Clearing Jams 663 A NOTE Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal size document 2 Ifyou cannot see the jammed document or the jammed document do not move when you pulled open the document cover 3 Remove the document from the ADF feeder roller or the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right 4 Close the document cover and then load the documents back into the ADF Clearing Paper Jams From the SSF NOTICE Protect the drums of the Print Head Device PHD against bright light If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Pull the jammed paper out of the single sheet feeder If no jammed paper can be found or you are unable to remove the paper go to the next step to remove
397. nt of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background to enhance text Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the top and bottom margins of the scanned image Values 0 1 inch 2 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Margin Left Right Purpose To specify the left and right margins of the scanned image Values 0 1 inch 2 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Margin Middle Purpose To specify the middle margin of the scanned image Understanding the Printer Menus 547 Values 0 0 inch 0 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Fax Menu Use the FAX menus to configure a variety of fax features K NOTE The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country If Country is not set up a message Set Fax Country appears on the display Z NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Fax to Purpose To specify the recipient Values Recipient Keypad Enters the fax
398. nt the job go to the printer and use the operator panel menus to identify which job in the memory you want to print You can use this function for Secure Print Private MailBox Print Public MailBox Print and Proof Print K NOTE Stored Print function is available when The optional memory module is installed e The RAM disk is enabled in the operator panel menu e RAM Disk is set to Available in the printer driver Z NOTE The data in memory is cleared when the printer is turned off The stored print function includes the following job types e Secure Print e Private MailBox Print Printing 297 e Public MailBox Print e Proof Print Secure Print You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them later from the operator panel This feature can be used to print confidential documents A stored print job will be deleted after you print it or at a designated time K NOTE Secure Print is available when using the PCL driver Private MailBox Print You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them at a more convenient time from the operator panel This feature can be used to print confidential documents The stored jobs remain in printer memory until you delete them on the operator panel or turn off the printer K NOTE Private MailBox Print is available when using the PCL driver Public MailBox Print You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them at a more
399. nted since the printer was shipped from the factory Paper Used Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size Dell ColorTrack Purpose To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user Values ColorTrack Sets whether to enable the ColorTrack mode which specifies who has Mode access to color printing No Account Sets whether to permit the printing of data without authentication User Print information To permit the printing for non account user set to On ColorTrack Sets whether to automatically print error related information if Error Report printing with ColorTrack results in an error User Click Edit User Registration to edit print user registrations Registration l This item is available only when ColorTrack Mode is set to On Edit Print User Registration List Purpose To edit the print meter setting for each user Values User No List to Selecting each button displays a list of print meter settings for the group of user registration numbers indicated on the button No Displays the user registration number User Name Displays the user name Not in Use is displayed in User Name when there is no registration 246 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool MonoCount Displays the total number of monochrome pages printed to date and Limit the maximum number of monochrome pages the user is permitted to print Col
400. nter select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next Installation starts As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page Click Finish Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_ 2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start Devices and Printers Click Add a printer When you use Windows Server 2008 R2 click Add a local or network printer as an administrator If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Yes otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action Click Add a local printer Select the port connected to this product and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 117 10 11 12 13 14 Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next If you do not share your printer select Do not share
401. nter Only 294 Using Booklet Print Dell 2155cn and 2155cdn Models 296 Using the Stored Print Function 297 Secure Printa a2 Detia Bone eee ty Ba als 298 Private MailBox Print 298 Public MailBox Print 298 Proof Printo e etea mara Bk wh ace ee hoc oh 298 Storing Print Jobs 00 0002 299 Printing the Stored Jobs ooa aaa aaa 299 Specifying Your Password on the Operator Panel Secure Print Private MailBox Print aaa 299 Deleting StoredJobs 2 300 8 Contents Printing from USB Memory 300 Supported File Formats 301 PDF Port Direct Printing 301 Printing a Report Page 02 302 Printing System Settings Report 302 Printing Font Sample List 2 2 303 Printer Settings 2 0 0 0 000 304 Printing System Settings Report 304 Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings 305 Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings 306 Resetting Defaults 2 000202 308 Adjusting the Language 309 18 Copying nck Hund quate cee tach ea 311 Loading Paper forCopying 311 Selecting Paper Tray 00 311 Preparing a Document 311 Making Copies From the Document Glass 312 Making Copies From the ADF 313 Setting Copy Options 314
402. nter will automatically link them if the paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties preferences 284 Loading Print Media Operator Panel Using the Operator Panel Buttons The operator panel has a 4 line by 28 character liquid crystal display LCD light emitting diodes LED control buttons and numeric keypad which allow you to control the printer K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 22 21 20 19 7 186 17 1615 1413 12 1 One Touch Dial button e Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book The first eight fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons in row order starting from the left top corner 2 lt B Copy button e Moves to the top level of the Copy menu amp Fax button e Moves to the top level of the Fax menu 4 i Data LED e Lights up for incoming outgoing or pending Fax jobs Ready Error LED w Nn Operator Panel 285 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 286 e Lights up when the printer is ready Ready LED e Lights up when the printer has an error Error LED gt button e Moves a cursor or highlight right or left A W button e Moves a cursor or highlight up or down VY Set button e Confirms the entry of values ial Contacts button e Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services Y Redial
403. nting Duplex printing or two sided printing allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper For sizes that are acceptable for duplex printing see Supported Paper Sizes Printing 293 Duplex Printing With Duplexer Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Only 1 5 Click Start gt Printers and Faxes For Windows XP Click start Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers For Windows Server 2008 Click Start Control Panel Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Click Start Devices and Printers Right click the printer and select Printing Preferences The Paper Output tab appears Select Paper Source from Tray 1 Tray 2 and Auto From Duplex select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge K NOTE For details on the Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge options see Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge Click OK Duplex Printing Without Duplexer Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Only Manual duplex printing or two sided printing allows you to manually print on both sides of the paper For information on the paper sizes that support manual duplex printing see Supported Paper Sizes K NOTE You can use the manual duplex feature using PCL 6 printer driver K NOTE To use the manual duplex feature select Paper Source other than Auto or 1 294 SSF Click Start Printers and Faxes For Windows XP Clic
404. number is 80 and 443 and 8000 to 9999 Port Number 80 Protocol Settings SNMP Enter the community name used for reference and display You can enter a maximum of 31 characters The default is public Community Name Read only e Order URL Select Reorder URL http Accessories us dell com sna PrinterSeg aspx OK Cancel Update of status e Printer Status is regularly updated check box Select the check box to enable disable the Printer Status to be updated by the specified interval e Update interval text box Specify the update interval of the printer status Port Number Settings Port Number Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of your printer in a web browser Protocol Settings SNMP e Community Name Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box Order URL e Select Reorder URL 578 Understanding Your Printer Software The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the Dell Supplies Management System window Understanding Your Printer Software 579 580 Understanding Your Printer Software Understanding Fonts Typefaces and Fonts A font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design The distinct design is called a typeface The typefaces you select add personality to a document Well chosen typefaces make a document easier to read The printer has numerous
405. number using a keypad Speed Dial Enters the speed dial number stored Phone Book Searches the fax number from the Phone Book Group Dial Searches the fax number from the Group Dial in the Phone Book Search Local Phone Searches the fax number from the local Phone Book Book Search Server Phone Searches the fax number from the Server Phone Book Book Resolution Purpose To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality Values Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters 548 Understanding the Printer Menus Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine mode See the notes below Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images K NOTE Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device Lighter Darker Purpose To adjust the density to make the copy lighter or darker than the original Values Lighter3 Works well with dark print Lighter2 Lighter1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Darker3 OnHook Purpose To send or receive faxes manually Values Off
406. numeric keypad and then press the Set button 9 Press 4 or w button or enter the time using the numeric keypad and then press the V Set button Faxing 379 To return to the top screen of the Menu menu press the AC All Clear button K NOTE The printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong number is entered Changing the Clock Mode You can set the current time using either the 12 hour or the 24 hour format 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press g button until Date amp Time is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Time Format is highlighted and then press the Set button Press or button until the desired format is highlighted and then press the vA Set button To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Setting Sounds Speaker Volume 1 Press the I Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button 4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then pre
407. nus 429 Color Button Displays whether to scan in color or in color Photo Set Color when Color is selected for a color mode Button Resolution Displays the default scan resolution Document Size Displays the paper size of the original document Lighter Darker Displays the default scan density level Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level Contrast Displays the default contrast level Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Auto Expo Displays the background suppression level Level Margin Displays the value of the top and bottom margins Top Bottom Margin Displays the value of the left and right margins Left Right Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin TIFF File Displays the TIFF file format TIFF V6 or TTN2 Format Image Displays the image compression level Compression Max Email Size Displays the maximum size of e mail that can be sent Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission Lighter Darker Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time 430 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Print from Color Displays the default color mode USB Defaults Select Tray Displays the default tray SSF Paper Size Displays the default paper size when the single s
408. o specify the default paper size Values mm series A4 472 Understanding the Printer Menus A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env DL Env C5 Env Custom Size l Denotes country specific factory default value inch series Letter Folio Legal A4 A5 B5 Executive Envelope 10 Monarch Env DL Env C5 Env Custom Size L Denotes country specific factory default value K NOTE Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width Understanding the Printer Menus 473 Orientation Purpose To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page Values Portrait Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper 2 Sided K NOTE 2 Sided print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Purpose To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Values 2 Sided Print Off Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper On Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper Binding Edge Flip Long Edge Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Flip Short Edge Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge 474 Understa
409. of the printer To copy the settings to another printer specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box Then click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list button Copying the settings is complete The connection time out period is 60 seconds After that you can check whether the settings were copied to this page And you need to check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if the settings were actually copied or not If the settings can be copied but the printer configuration is different the settings of only the same items are copied Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses K NOTE You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job Copy Printer Settings Report Purpose To verify whether the printer setting is copied to other printers successfully K NOTE The history is cleared by turning off the printer Print Volume The Printer Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages Print Volume Purpose To verify the number of printed pages This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 245 Values Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages pri
410. ol For Microsoft Windows Click Start Program Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Scan Settings Tool S Scan Settings Tool IP Address Settings Password Setting To select a scanner enter its IP Address or search one from the network IP Address Search all scanners From the network Name Location IP Address Search Criteria About ok __ cancel For Apple Macintosh Click Settings on the main scanning window of the Dell 2155 Color MFP window 342 Scanning Dell 2155 Color MEP LAN ir Password Settings To select a scanner enter its IP Address or search one from the network IP Address C Scanner List Name Model Name IP Address Dell 2155cdn Color MFP 60 Dell 2155cdn Color MFP iis Dell 2155cdn Color MFP 60 Dell 215Scdn Color MFP Search again IP Address Settings In the IP Address Settings tab you can check the IP address that is set for your scanner or change the scanner selection IP Address Enter the IP address Search all scanners from the network Windows only Searches scanners in your network Scanner List Displays a list of scanners that are detected Search again Searches the scanners in your network Search Criteria Windows only Displays the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search condition Scanning 343 Search Criteria Dialog Box Windows only Search Criteria Subnet Ad
411. ol PBC Start Cancel Disables the security method of WPS PBC Start Configures the wireless setting with the security method of WPS PBC PIN Code Start Configuration Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your computer Reset Wireless K NOTE Reset Wireless feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network Purpose To initialize wireless network settings After executing this function and rebooting the printer all wireless network settings are reset to their default values Understanding the Printer Menus 485 Values Cancel Does not reset the wireless setting g Start Resets the wireless setting TCP IP Purpose To configure TCP IP settings Values IP Mode Dual Stack Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address IPv6 Mode Uses IPv6 to set the IP address 486 Understanding the Printer Menus IPv4 Get IP Address Auto IP Sets the IP address automatically A random value in the range of 169 254 1 0 to 169 254 254 255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address The subnet mask is set as 255 255 0 0 BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP RARP Sets the IP address using RARP
412. olor pages the user is permitted Print to print Cumulative Color Page Count Displays the total number of color pages printed to date Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 247 Upper Limit for Monochrome Print Sets the maximum number of monochrome pages the user is permitted to print Cumulative Monochrome Page Count Displays the total number of monochrome pages printed to date Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the Edit Print User Registration List page l This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button Print User Settings Delete Purpose To delete the user entries registered on the Edit Print User Registration page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the Edit Print User Registration page Values User Registration No Displays the selected user registration number User Name Displays the name of the user registered under the user registration number Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the Edit Print User Registration page Address Book The Address Book menu includes the E Mail Address Server Address and Phone Book pages 248 Dell Printer Configuration Web Too
413. om Dell K NOTE For Macintosh start the Status Monitor Widget and then select Order 44 1 Supplies button to open Order window Double click the icon on your desktop If you cannot find the icon on your desktop a Click DLRMM EXE under x abc Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Reorder where x abc is the location where the printer software is installed b Click File on the toolbar and then Create Shortcut on the drop down menu c Right click on the shortcut icon d Choose Send To from the drop down menu and then click Desktop create shortcut on the submenu The Dell Supplies Management System window appears You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clicking Start All Programs Dell Printers gt Additional Color Laser Software gt Dell Supplies Management System Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link www dell com supplies or order Dell printer supplies by phone To ensure that you get the best service have your Dell printer s Service Tag ready For information regarding locating your Service Tag see Express Service Code and Service Tag About the Printer About the Printer 45 46 About the Printer Setting up the Printer Printer Setup 48 Preparing Printer Hardware Removing Tape 1 Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer A CAUTION Before performing any of the following procedures read and
414. omatically feeds 280 Loading Print Media K NOTE Do not force the print media into the single sheet feeder K NOTE Load letterhead face down with the top of the sheet entering the printer first K NOTE If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Loading an Envelope in the SSF Envelope 10 Monarch or DL To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder insert the envelope short edge feed with the flap closed and the print side down Ensure that the flap comes at the right when you face towards the printer Loading Print Media 281 NOTICE Never use envelopes with windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer K NOTE Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely closed K NOTE Insert an envelope with the flap side face up and with the stamp area on the top right side c5 To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder insert the envelope short edge feed with the flap open and the print side down Ensure that the flap comes at the bottom when you face towards the printer OR 282 l Loading Print Media K K NOTICE Never use envelopes with windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer NOTE Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely opened NOTE Insert an envelope with the flap side face up and wit
415. omize Network File and Folder Sharing New Folder B Not Shared Network Path Not Shared Advanced Sharing Set custom permissions create multiple shares and set other advanced sharing options IP Advanced Sharing Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders To change this setting use the Network and Sharing Center 3 Click on the Sharing tab and then select Advanced Sharing 4 Select the Share this folder check box 5 Entera shared name in the Share name box K NOTE Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure Advanced Sharing 7 Share this folder Settings Share name MyShare Add Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to 10 G Comments ems Cr 6 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder 7 Click Add Scanning 357 8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name Myself Select Users or Groups 2 ee Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types Erom this location XXXX Locations _ Enter the object names to select examples Myself Check Names C advanced 9 Click OK 10 Click on the user login name that you have just entered
416. on commands Values off The line termination command is not added CR CR LF LF FF FF Add LF The LF command is added CR CR LF LF LF FF FF Add CR The CR command is added CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF CR XX The CR and LF commands are added CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Default Color Purpose To specify the color mode to Color or Black This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print mode Values Black Prints in the black and white mode Understanding the Printer Menus 479 Color Prints in the color mode PDF Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Quantity Purpose To specify the number of copies to print Values 1 Sets the value in increments of 1 1 999 2 Sided Print K NOTE 2 Sided Print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Purpose To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Value 1 Sided Prints on one side of a sheet of paper Long Edge Flip Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge Short Edge Flip Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge Print Mode Purpose To specify the print mode Value Normal For documents with normal sized characters High Quality For documents with s
417. on your computer select 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager and then click OK For Microsoft Windows Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner Scanner Button Event Select the program to launch for this action C Always use this program for this action K NOTE Once you select 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager with the Always use this program for this action check box selected 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager will automatically open without selecting an application K NOTE You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning For details see ScanButton Manager K NOTE For Macintosh the dialog box for selecting a program is not displayed 338 Scanning ScanButton Manager The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default and then you can open them using the related application Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related application For Microsoft Windows ScanButton Manager Configure the image file scanned by the scanner Destination Path l C Documents and Settings admin My Documents Cl Open the image file OK Cancel Help For Apple Macintosh OOF ScanButton Manager Destination Path m Open the image file Defaults Cancel Coax Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver Your printer supports the TWAIN d
418. one sheet at a time The task is Does this solve your problem complete 3 Use print media that is not damp The task is complete Does this solve your problem 718 Troubleshooting Guide Go to action 4 4 Fan the print media The task is Go to action 5 Does this solve your problem complete 5 Wipe the retard roller in the tray where the multi The task is Contact Dell feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water complete Does this solve your problem Noise Action Yes No 1 To specify the cause of the noise perform the Auto Registration Adjustment Does this solve your problem Go to action 2 Go to action 3 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell Does this solve your problem complete 3 Replace the toner cartridge K See Replacing The task is Go to action 4 the Toner Cartridges complete The toner cartridge K you are using has been damaged Replace it with a new one 4 Replace the toner cartridge Y See Replacing the Toner Cartridges The task is complete The toner cartridge Y you are using has been damaged Replace it with a new one Go to action 5 Troubleshooting Guide 719 5 Replace the toner cartridge M See Replacing the Toner Cartridges The task is complete The toner cartridge M you are using has been damaged Replace it with a new one Go to action 6 6 Replace
419. ook Editor 0 560 ScanButton Manager aoaaa aaa 560 Dell ScanCenter 560 Address Books oaaae 561 Types of Address Books 561 Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books 562 Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh 565 Status Monitor Widget Feature 566 Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget 566 Installing the Status Monitor Widget 566 Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget 567 Printer Status Window 2 2 2 568 Order Window 569 Pr ferences oa ado eae EA ee eR 570 Status Monitor Console for Linux 571 Status Monitor Console Feature 572 Before Installing the Status Monitor Console 572 Installing the Status Monitor Console 572 Starting the Status Monitor Console 573 Printer Selection Window 573 Printer Status Window 2 2 574 Dell Supplies Management System Window 575 Service Tag Window 577 Settings Window 577 24 Understanding Fonts 581 Typefaces and Fonts 581 Weight and Style 0 581 Pitch and Point Siz 0 2 582 Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 583 Resident Fonts sisa sacia AAT ots das 585 Symbol SECIS 4 5s paaa e ne ide cae wees ass 586 Symbol Sets for PCL 5 PCL6 586 25 Understanding Printer Messages 589 26
420. oose Send To from the drop down menu and then click Desktop create shortcut on the submenu The Dell Supplies Management System window appears You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clicking Start All Programs Dell Printers gt Additional Color Laser Software gt Dell Supplies Management System Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide 29 2 Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link www dell com supplies or order Dell printer supplies by phone To ensure that you get the best service have your Dell printer Service Tag ready For information regarding locating your Service Tag number see Express Service Code and Service Tag 30 Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User s Guide Finding Information K NOTE The following are the optional accessories that you can buy separately Additional memory 512 MB 250 sheet feeder Wireless adapter USB cable Ethernet cable What are you looking for Find it here Drivers for my printer e My User s Guide Drivers and Utilities CD The Drivers and Utilities CD contains setup video documentation and drivers for your printer You can use the CD to install drivers or access your setup video and documentation Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for expe
421. opy service Fax On Enables the Fax service On Enables the Fax services but requires a password to Password send faxes does not require a password to receive incoming faxes Off Disables the Fax service the printer will not send or receive faxes Scan On Enables the Scan service On Enables the Scan service but requires a password to Password use the service off Disables the Scan service Print from USB On Enables the Print from USB service On Enables the Print from USB service but requires a Password password On Color Enables the Print from USB service with a color Password mode but requires a password off Disables the Print from USB service Change Password Changes the password that is set under the Function Enabled menu 520 Understanding the Printer Menus l This item is available only when On Password orOn Color Password is enabled Secure Receive K NOTE Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Purpose To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes and to set or change the password Values Secure Receive Set Disable Does not require a password to receive faxes Enable Requires a password to receive faxes Change Password 0000 9999 Sets or changes the password required to receive faxes L This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is setto Enable Login Error K NOTE
422. or Plain Side 2 Plain Thick Side 2 Recycled Side 2 Color Side 2 Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Tray 2 Paper Size A4 Sets the size of paper loaded in the A5 optional 250 sheet feeder B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Tray 2 Display On Displays a popup message that prompts Popup the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Understanding the Tool Box Menus 445 Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes I This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed TCP IP Settings Purpose To configure TCP IP settings Values IP Address AutoIP Mode Automatically sets the IP address A random value in the range of 169 254 1 0 to 169 254 254 255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address The subnet mask is set as 255 255 0 0 BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP RARP Sets the IP address using RARP DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP Panel Manually sets the IP address IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer It is allocated to the printer using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each oc
423. or Apple Macintosh Address ID l D Specify an Address Number 1 ame DA S 2 E Server Type Computer O Server Server Name IP Address 4 T Share Name 5 E Path 6 E Login Name 7 EO Login Password 8 Confirm Login Password Q Port Number 139 Use Default Port Number Cancel ses To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book 2 Server Select Computer if you store documents in a shared folder on your Type computer Select Server if you store documents on a FTP server 366 Scanning 3 Server Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server Name IP name that you have shared out Address The following are examples e For Computer Server name myhost IP address 192 168 1 100 e For Server Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address 192 168 1 100 4 Share Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer For SMB Name only 5 Path Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server 6 Login Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your Name computer or to a FTP server e For Computer Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1 e F
424. or Server Contact the system administrator 7 Login Enter the password corresponding to the above login name Password For Computer Empty password is not valid in the Network Computer feature Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account See Setting a Login Name and a Password SMB Only for details on how to add a password in your user login account e For Server Contact the system administrator 8 Confirm Re enter your password Login Password 9 Port Enter the Server Port Number If you are unsure you can enter the Number default value of 139 for Computer and 21 for FTP server Available ports are For Computer 139 445 5000 65535 For Server 21 5000 65535 Scanning 367 Sending the Scanned File on the Network 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document 2 Press the gt Scan button Press button until Scan to Network is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted and then press the va Set button Press i button until the desired address book is highlighted and then press the Set button Network Computer Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol Network Server Stores the scanned image on the ser
425. or the resident PCL 5 PCL 6 fonts Symbol Sets for PCL 5 PCL 6 Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed 586 Understanding Fonts Roman 8 Default ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 PC 8 PC 8 DN PC 775 Baltic PC 850 Multilingual PC 852 Latin 2 PC 1004 OS 2 PC Turkish Windows 3 1 Latin 1 Windows 3 1 Latin 2 Windows 3 1 Latin 5 DeskTop PS Text MC Text Microsoft Publishing Math 8 PS Math Pi Font Legal ISO 4 United Kingdom ISO 6 ASCH ISO 11 Swedish names ISO 15 Italian ISO 17 Spanish ISO 21 German ISO 60 Norwegian v1 ISO 69 French Windows 3 0 Latin 1 Windows Baltic Symbol Wingdings ITC ZapfDingbats MS Understanding Fonts 587 588 Understanding Fonts Understanding Printer Messages The printer operator panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve This chapter provides a list of error codes and tells you how to clear error messages NOTICE When an error message appears the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secure K NOTE An error code is listed in an error message K NOTE For error messages that are not listed in this chapter refer to instructions in each error messages 12 11 10
426. orCount Displays the total number of color pages printed to date and the Limit maximum number of color pages the user is permitted to print Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user registration number Confirm Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected Change user registration number Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user registration number Print User Settings Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the user entries on the Edit Print User Registration page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the Edit Print User Registration page Values User Registration No Displays the selected user registration number Delete User Click this button to display the Print User Settings Delete page to delete the user from registration User Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the selected user registration number or enter a user name for the new entry Password Displays the password associated with the user name in asterisks or allows you to enter a password for the new entry Re enter Password Confirms the set password Color Mode Limitation Sets whether to permit only monochrome printing or both color and monochrome printing Upper Limit for Color Sets the maximum number of c
427. ormation on the Secure Receive feature see Using the Secure Receiving Mode Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Try the following 034 515 e Try the same operation e Check the printer or remote machine if the memory is full 034 791 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if the telephone line cord is connected properly If the line connection is correct check the following If Tone Pulse setting is correct Z NOTE For more information on Tone Pulse setting see Tone Pulse If Tone Pulse setting is correct check the following If the remote machine can receive a fax 597 Understanding Printer Messages 035 701 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check the following Status of the remote machine Tone Pulse setting Z NOTE For more information on Tone Pulse setting see Tone Pulse 035 702 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Try the same operation 035 708 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Try the following Try the same operation e Reduce the modem speed Z NOTE For more information on modem speed see Modem Speed 035 717 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Reduce the modem speed Z NOTE For more in
428. otor function properly 9 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed Does this solve your problem Streaks appear on the output 696 l Troubleshooting Guide iF Action Yes No 1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is Go to action 2 replaced Confirm the amount of toner left in each complete toner cartridge a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary Does this solve your problem 2 Ifyou are using non Dell brand toner cartridges The task is Go to action 3 disable the Non Dell Toner option complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Non Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab b Ensure that the On check box is not selected Does this solve your problem 3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell a Replace the PHD unit See Replacing the complete Print Head Device PHD Unit and Installing a PHD Unit b After you replace the PHD unit click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button The 4 Colors Conf
429. ottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media Load print media only when the tray is empty Wipe the retard rollers in the standard 250 sheet tray or single sheet feeder with a cloth moistened with water The envelope is creased after printed Make sure that the envelope is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray or single sheet feeder as instructed in Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder or Loading an Envelope in the SSF Troubleshooting Guide 687 Problem Action Page breaks in unexpected places Increase the value for Time Out on the operator panel the Tool Box or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Print media does not stack neatly in the output bin Turn the print media stack over in the tray Cannot perform manual duplex printing Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the Paper Output tab in the printer driver Cannot print from the standard 250 sheet tray because the print media in the tray is curled Load the print media into the single sheet feeder Print Quality Problems K NOTE Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool see Understanding the Tool Box Menus and Dell Printer Configuratio
430. ou can specify the printing options such as color mode or double sided printing 1 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser 2 Click Manage Printers 3 Click Configure Printer of the queue for which you want to specify the printing options 4 Type root as the user name and type the administrator password 5 Specify the required settings and click Continue The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully appears The setting is complete Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 2 Select Applications gt System Tools Terminal Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 149 su Type the administrator password ausr sbin lpadmin x Type the print queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Type the following command in the terminal window su Type the administrator password rpm e Del1l 2155cdn Color MFP The printer driver is uninstalled Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 Setup Overview SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 1 Install the printer driver 2 Set up the print queue 3 Specify the default queue 4 Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver 1 Double click Dell 2155 Color MFP x x x i686 rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD 2 Type the administrator password and click Install Installation starts When the installation
431. owards the front of the printer 7 Turn the screw clockwise 656 Removing Options 8 Tur on the printer Removing Options 657 658 Removing Options Clearing Jams Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid paper jams See Print Media Guidelines for more information K NOTE Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended to try a sample first Avoiding Jams Use only recommended print media See Print Media Guidelines for more information See Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder and Loading Print Media in the SSF to load print media properly Do not overload the print media sources Ensure that the print media stack height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load line labels in the tray Do not load wrinkled creased damp or curled print media Flex fan and straighten print media before you load it If a jam occurs with print media try feeding one sheet at a time through the single sheet feeder Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself Do not mix print media sizes weights or types in the same print media source Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media when using the standard 250 sheet tray and the optional 250 sheet feeder Also the recommended print side should be face down when using the single shee
432. p Address https te awis te oe Ne Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Pid 138 305 35a S Printer Jobs IPx6 Link Local St ith NW seit Pant Location Printer Settings Contact Person Print Server Settings Printer Status j Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status sl Address Book Printer Information i Cyan Cartridge Level OK Tray Settings Magenta Cartridge Level OK E Mail Alert Yellow Cartridge Level OK Pani E Black Cartridge Level OK alte Help aay Order Supplies at Consumables Status www dell com supplies PHD unit Contact Dell Support at support dell com Panar Taye 3 Soue Capacity Sa a ve i a E Done internet Dell 2155cdn Displays the product name of the printer Color MFP IPv4 Displays the IP address of the printer IPv6 Location Displays location of the printer The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page Contact Person Displays the name of the printer administrator The name can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page Event Panel Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer Machine image Shows the bitmap image of the printer The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when you click on the image Dell Printer Configur
433. password is left blank NULL You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu The user name cannot be changed See Set Password for more information Details of the Menu Items Printer Status Printer Status Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Printer Jobs Printer Jobs Job List Completed Jobs Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 173 Printer Printer Settings Report Menu Settings Settings Reports Printer Settings System Settings USB Settings PCL Settings PDF Settings Secure Settings Copy Defaults Copy Color Balance Copy Settings Fax Defaults Fax Settings Scan Defaults Print from USB Defaults Printer Maintenance Paper Density Adjust BTR Adjust Fuser Auto Registration Adjustment Color Registration Adjustments Clean Developer Reset Defaults Initialize PrintMeter Storage Non Dell Toner Adjust Altitude Clock Settings Web Link Customization 174 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Print Server Settings Print Server Reports Print Server Setup Page E Mail Alert Setup Page Print Server Settings Basic Information Port Settings TCP IP SMB E Mail Alert Bonjour mDNS SNMP
434. per fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images Lighter Darker Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time Fax Settings Purpose To configure the Fax settings K NOTE You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under Country V NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings y Values 204 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Receive Mode Fax Automatically receives faxes Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external phone and then pressing a remote receive code or by setting OnHook to On you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine and then pressing the Start button Telephone When the printer receives an incoming fax the external Fax telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel Fax and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Answer The printer can share a telephone line with an answering Machine F machine In this mode the printer will monitor the fax ax signal and pick up the l
435. poration in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Wi Fi is a registered trademarks of the Wi Fi Alliance Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries XML Paper Specification XPS This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http go microsoft com fwlink LinkId 52369 DES This product includes software developed by Eric Young eay mincom oz au AES Copyright c 2003 Dr Brian Gladman Worcester UK All rights reserved This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms TIFF libtiff Copyright c 1988 1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright c 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc JCC Profile Little cms Copyright c 1998 2004 Marti Maria Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products Dell Inc disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own The printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group Notes Notices
436. pper before copying a legal size document To customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality see Setting Copy Options To clear the option settings press the AC Al Clear button K NOTE The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired 2 Press the gt Start button to begin copying V NOTE You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document b y pressing the x Cancel button Setting Copy Options Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the gt Start button to begin copying K NOTE The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired e Number of Copies Color 314 Copying e Select Tray SSF Paper Size SSF Paper Type e Collated e Reduce Enlarge e Document Size e Original Type Lighter Darker Sharpness e Color Saturation e Auto Exposure e 2 Sided e Multiple Up e Margin Top Bottom e Margin Left Right e Margin Middle Number of Copies To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and M
437. press the Set button d Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the y Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE Installing Optional Accessories 67 a Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer gt Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple pp p printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears d Click the System Settings button The system settings report is printed 5 Confirm that the Network Wireless section exists Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Printer Settings K NOTE For more information on configuring the wireless adapter see Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter Determining the Wireless Network Settings You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer For details of the settings contact your network administrator 68 Installing Optional Accessories Wireless SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless Settings network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters Network Type Specifies the network type from Ad hoc or Infrastructure Security Secu
438. print a detailed list of the panel settings PCL Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PCL Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Fonts 426 Understanding the Tool Box Menus PCL Macro List Click this button to print a list of the PCL Macro PDF Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PDF fonts Job History Click this button to print the Completed Jobs history of the printer Error History Click this button to print the error history of the printer Print Meter Click this button to print the report for the total number of pages printed Color Test Page Click this button to print a color test page Stored Documents Click this button to print a list of the Stored Documents Protocol Monitor Click this button to print the Protocol Monitor report I You can print the list only when RAM disk is enabled TCP IP Settings Purpose To display the current settings of TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Values IP Address Mode Displays the method for acquiring the IP address IP Address Displays the IP address of the printer Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Gateway Address Displays the gateway address Defaults Settings Purpose To display the default settings for the Copy Scan Fax and Print from USB services of the printer Values Copy Color Displays whether to make copies in color or in black Defaults and
439. put Size Sets the output paper size Layout Sets the output layout Output Color Sets the output color l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Secure Settings Panel Lock 198 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Purpose To set a limited access to Admin Menu with a password and to set or change the password Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings Values Panel Lock Set Enables Disables password protection for the Admin Menu New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Menu Re enter Password Confirms the set password K NOTE This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Set Password on the left frame and set the password Function Enabled Purpose To specify whether to lock the Copy Scan and Fax services with a password and to set or change the password Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings Values Copy Sets whether to lock the Copy service with a password Fax Sets whether to lock the Fax service with a password Scan Sets whether to lock the Scan service with a password Print from USB Sets whether to lock the Print from USB service with a password New Password Sets a password that is required to ac
440. r Values Off Does not print the error report when printing with Color Track results in an error On Prints the error report when printing with Color Track results in an error Letterhead Duplex Mode K NOTE Letterhead Duplex Mode feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Purpose To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead Values Disable Does not print on both sides of letterhead Enable Prints on both sides of letterhead Low Toner Alert Msg Purpose To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low Values off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low On Shows the alert message when the toner is low Email From Field Purpose To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E mail Values Understanding the Printer Menus Sil Disable Disables editing of the transmission source Enable Enables editing of the transmission source Server Address Book Purpose To specify whether to search the e mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server Values Off Does not search the e mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server On Searches the e mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server K NOTE You can search the e mail addresses only from the Address Book that is local when Server A
441. r or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to sort out the problem Documents are not stored in the memory There may not be enough memory to store the document If the display shows aMemory Full message delete any documents you no longer need from the memory and then restore the document or wait for the job in progress e g a fax transmission or reception to complete Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting See Print Media Guidelines The printer will not send or receive faxes Ensure that the country code is set correctly Press the E Menu button and select System Setup Admin Menu Fax Settings Country Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse Check that the cables are connected properly If the telephone line cord is connected to the printer via any device such as an answering machine and a computer remove the device and directly connect the telephone line cord to the printer An error often occurs during a fax transmission or reception Reduce the modem speed the Menu button and select System Setup Admin Menu Fax Settings Modem Speed The printer receive faxes but it does not print Check the toner level Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray Ensure that S
442. r 41 Control Panel 435 Control Panel Tone 195 422 Copy Color Balance 186 202 Copy Completed 435 Copy Completed Tone 181 423 Copy Defaults 185 427 Copy Printer Settings 164 170 245 Copy Printer Settings Report 245 Copy Settings 186 Country 189 207 433 463 499 Cover 177 Covers 191 192 210 211 514 515 746 Index Covers Thick 191 192 210 211 514 515 Cumulative Color Page Count 247 Cumulative Monochrome Page Count 248 Custom Reduce Enlarge 202 450 Custom Size X 182 197 Custom Size Y 182 197 D Data LED 285 Date amp Time 425 Date Format 192 425 439 Default Color 183 198 479 Default Print Paper Size 181 196 424 438 Default Setup 249 Delayed Start 187 204 430 457 549 Dell ColorTrack 193 246 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 304 Page display format 168 Dell ScanCenter 560 Dell Service Tag Number 178 Dell Supplies Management System 557 Dell support website 33 Dell technical support policy 739 Details 177 Determining Values 644 DHCP 487 Dimensions 605 DIMM Size 605 Direct connection setup 115 Direct Fax 396 Disabling Panel Lock 554 Discard Size 189 207 432 462 498 Dispense Motor Check 465 Display of EWS 447 Display problem 685 DL 270 DNS 217 225 Document cover 641 Document glass 641 Document Size 185 190 202 208 322 428 430 450 454 545 Draft Mode 183 198
443. r 2003 x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Edition Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Connecting Your Printer e Windows 7 e Windows 7 64 bit Edition e Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 10 6 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client x86 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 x86 To connect the printer to a computer 1 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer 1 USB port K NOTE Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer 2 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer NOTICE Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB port available on the keyboard Connecting Your Printer 93 Network Connection To connect the printer to a network 1 Connect the network cable 1 Ethernet port To connect the printer to the network connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of the printer and the other end to a LAN drop or hub To setup a wireless connection insert the wireless adapter into the wireless adapter socket on the back of the printer For a wireless connection see Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter K NOTE To use the wireless adapter be sure to disconnect the network cable Connecting the Telephone Line
444. r Level images Keeps you informed about the amount of toner that remains for each color Toner Alert Displays an alert message when any remaining toner is low empty or unknown Order Online e Order Supplies Online button Click this button to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies This button appears when the amount of toners becomes less than 30 Refresh button Click this button to update the status of the printer Close button Click this button to close the Printer Status window Dell Supplies Management System Window This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site To open the Dell Supplies Management System window 1 Click Order Supplies Online button in the Printer Status window OR Click Dell Printers Dell Supplies Management System Understanding Your Printer Software 575 DelllSupplies Management Systemi Order Printer Supplies Dell printer supplies are available only through Dell Select Printer Model Dell 2155cdn Color MFP e a Order Online O Order Supplies Online ee Select Reorder URL http Accessories us dell com sna PrinterSeg aspx c Order by Phone To order Dell printer supplies by phone call the following 63 877 INK 2YOU United States S Select Printer Model Select your printer model name Order Online e Order Supplies Online button
445. r Printer Tool Box Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 113 114 K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Name and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page appears If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address Disabling Firewall Before Installing Printer Software K NOTE This step is necessary if you have Windows XP Service Pack 2 or 3 installed If your printer is connected directly to a network and the Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 firewall is enabled you cannot view your networked printer s when you run the Dell printer installation software To prevent this situation disable this firewall before you install the Dell printer software To disable or enable your Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 firewall perform the following steps 1 Click Start and click Help and Support K NOTE For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 if you use Online Help switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support window 2 Inthe S
446. r authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 Select Computer More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su Type the administrator password usr sbin lpadmin x Type the printer queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Type the following command in the terminal window Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 157 su Type the administrator password rpm e Dell 2155cdn Color MFP The printer driver is uninstalled 158 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS Using Your Printer 159 160 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Overview K NOTE This web tool is not available unless the printer is connected to a network using a network cable or the wireless printer adapter K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E Mail Alert Setup which sends e mail to you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention E https Sahai M Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edt view Favorites Tools Help Address 48 https k78 Sw aa Saini Ja Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP One Pv 138 D0 r
447. r name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the check box displayed under the Printer name and then click Next Installation starts If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Continue otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page Click Finish Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition K 116 1 NOTE You must log in as an administrator Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_ 2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a local printer Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers O nn nn 11 12 13 14 Select the port connected to this product and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next If you do not share your pri
448. r of the following 88 Installing Optional Accessories When wireless ad hoc mode is set to the printer Select Computer to Computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer Select Access point Infrastructure networks only and close the Advanced dialog box h Click Add to display Wireless network properties i Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK j Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list k Click OK to close the Property dialog box For Windows Vista a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network O d Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area Installing Optional Accessories 89 90 f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Serv
449. r or black and white Values Color Black amp White Prints in black and white Color Prints in color Color Button Set Purpose To specify the default background suppression level Values B amp W Button Black amp White Sets whether to scan in black and white when Black amp White is selected for a color mode GrayScale Sets whether to scan in gray scale when Black amp White is selected for a color mode Color Button Color Sets whether to scan in color when Color is selected for a color mode Color Photo Sets whether to scan in color Photo when Color is selected for a color mode This is suitable for photographic images Auto Expo Level Purpose To specify the default background suppression level 524 l Understanding the Printer Menus Values Normal Sets the background suppression level to Normal Higher 1 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 1 Higher 2 Sets the background suppression level to Higher 2 TIFF File Format Purpose To specify the default TIFF file format Values TIFF V6 Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6 TTN2 Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2 Image Compression Purpose To specify the image compression level Values High Sets the image compression level to High Medium Sets the image compression level to Medium Low Sets the image compression level to Low
450. r problem complete Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the optional 250 sheet feeder is The task is Go to action 2 properly inserted complete Does this solve your problem 2 Ensure the right hand cover is closed The task is Proceed to the complete action Does this solve your problem 716 Troubleshooting Guide corresponding to the type of the print media being used Thick 3a Thin 3b Manual Dup 3c Others 3d Action Yes No 3a Use thick paper that is 105 g m or less The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete 3b Use thin paper that is 60 g m or more The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete 3c Ensure that the print media is not curled The task is Go to action 4a complete Does this solve your problem 3d Is the print media damp Go to action 4c Go to action 5 4a Fan the print media The task is Go to action 4b Does this solve your problem complete 4b Wipe the retard roller in the optional 250 sheet The task is Contact Dell feeder with a cloth moistened with water complete Does this solve your problem 4c Turn over the print media The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete 5 Use print media that is not damp The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete Regi Jam Exit Sensor On JAM Action Yes No 1 Ensure
451. r smoothness directly affects the print quality If the paper is too rough the toner does not fuse on to the paper properly resulting in poor print quality If the paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding problems Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture Content The amount of moisture in the paper affects both the print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Grain Direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 g m to 135 g m 16 lb to 36 Ib bond paper grain long fibers are recommended For paper heavier than 135 g m 36 Ib bond grain short is preferred Fiber Content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically pulped wood Paper containing fibers such as cotton may lead to degraded paper handling Recommended Paper To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability use 75 g m 20 1b xerographic paper Business paper designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures without discoloring bleeding or releasing hazardous emissions The
452. r the Primary SMTP Gateway Reply Address and your or key operator s e mail address in the e mail list box 4 Click Apply New Settings K NOTE Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs Setting Up for Shared Printing You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that comes with your printer or using Microsoft point and print or peer to peer method However if you use one of the Microsoft methods some features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD may not be available If you want to use the printer on a network share the printer and install its drivers on all the computers on the network K NOTE You need to purchase an Ethernet cable for shared printing Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 Click start Printers and Faxes Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 131 Right click the printer icon and select Properties On the Sharing tab select the Share this printer check box and then type a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer Click OK If you are missing files you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 2
453. r the encryption type selected K NOTE For details on each item see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 7 Click the Apply New Settings button to apply the settings When the operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN connection setting is completed Constructing a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer When you setup your wireless connection first time the following settings are required on your computer For DHCP network 1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity K NOTE If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool change the wireless settings using this tool Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 a Select Network Connections from Control Panel b Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties c Select the Wireless Networks tab d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked K NOTE Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step e and step g so that you can restore them later e Click the Advanced button f Select Computer to Computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties h Under the Association tab enter the following information and click OK Network name SSID dell_ de
454. re that the print media is not curled The task is Go to action 3a complete Does this solve your problem 2f Is the print media damp Go to action 3d Go to action 3a 3a Fan the print media The task is Go to action 3b Does this solve your problem complete 3b Wipe the retard roller in the standard 250 sheet The task is Go to action 4b tray with a cloth moistened with water complete Does this solve your problem 3c Ifthe envelope is deformed correct it or use The task is Go to action 3a another envelope complete Does this solve your problem 3d Turn over the print media The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete 4a Use print media that is not damp The task is Go to action 3a Does this solve your problem complete 4b Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell complete Does this solve your problem SSF Misfeed Jam 714 Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the SSF is properly inserted The task is Does this solve your problem complete Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used e Thick 2a Thin 2b e Coated 2c e Envelope 2d If performing manual duplex printing go to action 2e If using paper other than the above or if not performing manual duplex printing go to action 2f 2a Use thick paper that is 216 g m or le
455. re using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool K NOTE The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser Setting Up From Web Browser It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 165 For Internet Explorer 6 0 Internet Explorer 7 0 Internet Explorer 8 0 Setting Up the Display Language 1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar 2 Select Languages in the General tab 3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list For example Italian Italy it IT Spanish Traditional Sort es ES tradnl German Germany de DE French France fr FR English United States en US Danish da DK Dutch Netherlands nl NL Norwegian Bokmal no Swedish sv SE Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non Proxy 1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu 2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network LAN Settings in the Connections tab 3 Do either of the following Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server Click Advanced and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under Exceptions After setti
456. ress Displays the IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Gateway Displays the gateway address Address IPvo4 Enable Stateless Displays whether to enable the Address stateless address Use Manual Displays whether to set the IP Address address manually Manual Displays the IP address Address gt Stateless Address Displays the stateless 1 3 6 addresses Link Local Displays the link local address Address Manual Gateway Displays the gateway address Address gt Auto Configure Displays the gateway address Gateway Address 216 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool DNS Ipv4 3 Get DNS Server Displays whether to Address from automatically set the DNS DHCP server address via DHCP Current DNS Displays the current DNS Server Address server address IPvo4 Get DNS Server Displays if the printer receives Address from the DNS server address DHCPv6 lite automatically from the DHCPv6 lite server Current DNS Displays the current DNS Server Address server address Priority to IPv6 Displays whether to use the DNS Name DNS Name Resolution feature Resolution WINS WINS Mode Displays whether to automatically set the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP WINS Primary Displays the primary WINS server address Server WINS Displays the secondary WINS server address Secondary Server LPD Port Status Displays the port status of the Line Printer Daemon LPD protoco
457. ress the V Set button Press or w button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the va Set button You can specify from 1 to 30 minutes for Sleep or 5 to 60 minutes for Deep Sleep Copying To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Copying 333 334 Copying Scanning Scanning Overview Use your Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer The Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer provides several ways to scan your document There are two main scanning types One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver and the other is operated on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver See the available features below to help you find the information you need Scanning With scanner driver Scanning Without scanner driver Scanning With scanner driver e Scan into a graphic software such as PaperPort bundled software for Windows and Adobe Photoshop using a TWAIN driver Supporting USB and Network connections for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using a graphic software See Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver e Scan into a Microsoft s default program such as Windows Photo Galler
458. result only when an error occurs transmission Do not output Does not print fax transmission results Denotes the factory default setting c Fax Cover Page Settings Click Fax Cover Page Settings button in Windows or select Fax Cover Page Settings for Feature Sets in Macintosh Fax Cover Page Purpose To specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax Values According to Printer Determines whether to attach a cover page to your fax Settings depending on the setting you specify in Fax Cover Page on the operator panel 400 Faxing Attach Attaches a cover page to your fax None Does not attach a cover page to your fax Denotes the factory default setting Sender Purpose To specify whether to print the sender s name on the fax cover page Values According to Printer Determines whether or not to print the sender s name on the fax Settings cover page based on the printer settings Enter a sender name Allows you to enter a sender s name that will be printed on the fax cover page in Sender Name Denotes the factory default setting Sender Name Purpose To enter a sender s name that will be printed on the fax cover page The sender s name can be up to 30 characters If it exceeds 30 characters only the first 30 characters will be printed 5 For Windows click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box and then click Print For Macintosh click Print T
459. rienced users or technicians Finding Information 31 What are you looking for Find it here e How to use my printer Quick Reference Guide Dell 2155en 2155cdn Multifunction Colar Printer Quick Reference Guide September 210 32 e Safety information e Warranty information Finding Information Product Information Guide CAUTION Read and follow all safety instructions in your Product Information Guide prior to setting up and operating your printer What are you looking for Find it here e How to set up my printer Setup diagram Dell 2155cn 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Settin e Express Service Code and Service Tag Service Tag Express Service Code XXXXXXX 000 000 000 00 The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the toner access cover of your printer e Latest drivers for my printer Go to support dell com e Documentation for my printer Finding Information 33 What are you looking for Find it here e Answers to technical service support dell com provides several online tools and support questions including Solutions Troubleshooting hints and tips articles from technicians and online courses Upgrades Upgrade information for components such as the printer dr
460. rinter to recover Change the file name that already exists on FTP server 031 594 Press the Wa Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 031 595 recover Try the same operation again Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 031 598 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check append access right to the file and if server supports FTP append command 031 599 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check rename access right to the file Check if server supports FTP rename command 596 Understanding Printer Messages Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 033 513 recover Try the following e Print the received fax or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed e Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature V NOTE For more information on the Secure Receive feature see Using the Secure Receiving Mode 033 762 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover The printer rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers Z NOTE For more information see Junk Fax Setup Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Try the following e Remove the received fax or wait for a while until sending a fax is 033 788 completed e Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature Z NOTE For more inf
461. rity Selects the security method from No security WEP Settings WPA PSK TKIP and WPA2 PSK AES WPA PSK AES Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from the list WEP Key Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP is selected for Security Pass Phrase Specifies the pass phrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes long only when WPA PSK is selected for Encryption Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter This section describes how to configure a wireless adapter through Easy Setup Navigator You can select a method to configure a wireless adapter from the following Wizard Setup through USB connection Installing Optional Accessories 69 Network Ethernet connection WPS PIN Advanced Setup through WPS PBC Operator Panel Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected setup Personal Identification Number is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router sup ports WPS 2 WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing
462. river for scanning images that supports Microsoft Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Apple Mac OS X 10 3 9 Mac OS X 10 4 11 Mac OS X 10 5 Mac OS X 10 6 works with various scanners 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Scanning 339 340 Start the drawing software that supports TWAIN such as PaperPort for Windows For using other than PaperPort proceed to step 6 To set the location where to store the scanned images Click Desktop Folders In the Folders panel specify a destination folder To set the scanner Click Desktop Scan Settings Select In the Available Scanners dialog box select TWAIN Dell 2155 Color MFP and then click OK Make sure that Display scanner dialog box check box is selected on the Scan or Get Photo panel Click Scan to begin scanning process The Dell 2155 Color MFP TWAIN Driver window appears Scanning For Microsoft Windows Dell 2155 Color MFP TWAIN Driver LAN Basic Scanning Image Quality Image Options Scan from Document Feeder Image type 24 bit Full Color Scan size Letter 8 5 x 11 Reson z oa 300 Reduce Enlarge 100 ara Auto Exposure
463. rs No Does not initialize the system parameters Init Print Meter Purpose To initialize the print meter of the printer When the print meter is initialized the meter count is reset to zero Clear Storage K NOTE Clear Storage feature is available only when the additional 512 MB memory module is installed Purpose To clear all files stored as Secure Print Mailbox Print Proof Print and Stored Print in the RAM disk Values All Clear Deletes all files stored as Secure Print Mailbox Print and Proof Print in the RAM disk Secure Document Deletes all files stored as Secure Print and Mailbox Print in the RAM disk Stored Document Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk Non DELL Toner Purpose To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer NOTICE Using a non Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non Dell toner cartridges Values off Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer 518 Understanding the Printer Menus Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used K NOTE An incorrect alti
464. rs and symbol sets The original setting will remain valid if no input is made SNMP Purpose To configure the detailed settings of SNMP Values SNMP Enable SNMP Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1 v2c Configuration v1 v2c protocol Protocol Edit SNMP Click to display SNMP v1 v2c page and to edit the vli v2e setting of SNMP v1 v2c protocol from the page Properties Enable SNMP Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 v3 Protocol protocol Edit SNMP v3 Click to display SNMP v3 page and to edit the Properties setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the page You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled SNMP v1 v2c Purpose To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1 v2 protocol To enter this page click Edit SNMP v1 v2 Properties in the SNMP page Values Community Community Sets the community name to access read only data Name Name Read using up to 31 alphanumeric characters only The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Read Community is public 232 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Re enter Enters the community name to access read only Community data again to confirm it Name Read 1 only Community Sets the community name to access read and write Name data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters Read Write The original setting
465. rs on the Windows Computers 119 For installing XML Paper Specification XPS printer driver K NOTE XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 and Windows 7 64 bit Edition Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 nH nn A U N 10 11 12 13 120 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win_ 7Vista XPS_2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Select printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or host name and then click Next Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Continue otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name box and then click Next To use this prin
466. rt A printed system settings report also allows you to verify whether or not options have been installed properly See Understanding the Printer Menus to identify the display and operator panel buttons if you need help When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the Menu button 2 Press Sw button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the VA Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the vA Set button The system settings report is printed 302 l Printing When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple Pp p printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears Click the System Settings button The system settings report is printed The message Send Printer Information appears while the page prints The printer returns to the standby mode after printing the system settings report If any other message appears when you print this page see the online Help for more information Printing Font Sample List
467. s 312 Copying 3 Close the document cover K NOTE Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption K NOTE If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the document cover open To customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality see Setting Copy Options To clear the option settings press the AC All Clear button K NOTE The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired 4 Press the gt Start button to begin copying K NOTE You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by pressing the x Cancel button Making Copies From the ADF NOTICE Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray The ADF output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged Copying 313 K NOTE A computer connection is not required for copying 1 Load up to 35 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib documents facing up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first Then adjust the document guides to the document size K NOTE Ensure that you use the document sto
468. s Click the Start button to print the System Settings page Panel Settings Click the Start button to print the Panel Settings page PCL Fonts List Click the Start button to print the PCL Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Fonts List PCL Macro List Click the Start button to print the PCL Macro List PDF Fonts List Click the Start button to print the PDF Fonts List Job History Click the Start button to print the Job History report Error History Click the Start button to print the Error History report Print Meter Click the Start button to print the Print Meter report Color Test Page Click the Start button to print the Color Test Page Protocol Monitor Click the Start button to print the Protocol Monitor report Speed Dial Click the Start button to print the Speed Dial report Address Book Click the Start button to print the Address Book report Server Address Click the Start button to print the Server Address report Fax Activity Click the Start button to print the Fax Activity report Fax Pending Click the Start button to print the Fax Pending report Stored Documents 4 Click the Start button to print the Stored Documents list l This item is available only when RAM disk is enabled Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Printer Settings The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings USB Settings PCL Settings PDF Settings Secure Set
469. s Go to action 5 changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete driver For example change the plain paper to thick a On the Paper Output tab change the Paper Type setting Does this solve your problem 5 Verify that the correct print media is being used The task is Go to action 6 See Supported Paper Types If not use the print complete media recommended for the printer Does this solve your problem 6 Ensure that the eight yellow ribbons are correctly The task is Go to action 7 removed from the Print Head Device PHD unit complete See Removing the Print Head Device PHD Ribbons and Installing a PHD Unit If not remove the ribbons Does this solve your problem 7 Ensure that the developer motor functions Go to action 8 Contact Dell properly a Launch the Tool Box and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab b Select Main Motor Operation Check from the drop down list box and click the Start button c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound Does the motor function properly 690 Troubleshooting Guide Action Yes No 8 Ensure that the dispense motor for each toner Go to action 9 cartridge functions properly a Launch the Tool Box and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab b Select Dispense Motor Check Yellow Dispense Motor Check Magenta Dispense Motor Check Cyan or Dispense Motor Check Black from the drop down list box and click the
470. s Using the DRPD The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection you will need another telephone line at your location or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside To set up the DRPD 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press w button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press w button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 6 Press a or button until the desired pattern is highlighted and then press the Set button 7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again To receive faxes in the DRPD you need to set the menu to DRPD For details see Available Fax Settings Options Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns If this service is available from your telephone company ask your telephone company whic
471. s in a separate process Remember each folder s view settings Restore previous folder windows at logon Show Control Panel in My Computer Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 4 Click OK 5 Right click the folder and then select Properties The Properties dialog box appears 6 Select the Sharing tab and then select Share this folder 354 Scanning 7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box 10 11 K NOTE Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure New Folder Properties L General Sharing Securty Customize You can share this folder with other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder O Do not share this folder Share this folder Share name MyShare Comment User limit Maximum allowed O Allow this number of users a To set permissions for users who access this Permisi i eae emissions folder over the network click Permissions Leem To configure settings for offline access click Cachi Caching aching New Share Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder Click Add Search user login name by clicking Advanced or
472. s the primary SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Gateway Protocol gateway SMTP Port Displays the SMTP port number Number E Mail Send Displays the authentication method for outgoing e Authentication mail POP3 Server Displays the POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 server Address address POP3 Port Displays the POP3 port number Number Reply Address Displays the IP address of servers connected with SMTP protocol when data is incoming SMTP Server Displays the status of the SMTP server connection Connection E Mail Alert E Mail List 1 Displays the acceptable e mail Settings addresses for the E Mail Alert feature specified in E Mail List 1 Select Alerts Supplies Alerts Displays the e mail alert receive for List 1 status for consumables Paper Handling Displays the e mail alert receive Alerts status for paper handling Service Call Displays the e mail alert receive status for service calls E Mail List 2 Displays the acceptable e mail addresses for the E Mail Alert feature specified in E Mail List 2 Select Alerts Supplies Alerts Displays the e mail alert receive for List 2 status for consumables Paper Handling Displays the e mail alert receive Alerts status for paper handling Service Call Displays the e mail alert receive status for service calls Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ji O22 Print Server Settings The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information Port
473. selected If you are using a print spooler verify that the spooler has not stalled Check the printer s interface from the Admin Menu Determine the host interface you are using Print a panel settings page to verify that the current interface settings are correct 686 Troubleshooting Guide Problem Action Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the standard 250 sheet tray or single sheet feeder Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer See Supported Paper Types for more information Fan the print media before loading it in the standard 250 sheet tray Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly Ensure that the width and length guides of the print media sources are adjusted correctly Ensure that the standard 250 sheet tray is securely inserted Do not overload the tray Do not force print media into the single sheet feeder when you load it otherwise it may skew or buckle Ensure that the print media is not curled Face the recommended print side up or down appropriately for the type of print media you are using See Loading Print Media in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray and the Optional 250 Sheet Feeder for more information Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves Do not mix print media types Do not mix reams of print media Remove the top and b
474. sers Guide hi sta print driver ana supporting software troubleshooting Guide Product Features 3 Click Wireless adapter Mibe Flash Players es Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn Dell 2155cdn Home gt Optional Accessories Setup Select an option to view its installation K 250 sheet feeder instructions BJ Memory module oE Wireless adapter The instruction video starts Follow the on screen instructions to configure wireless settings Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter K NOTE You can also install the Dell wireless adapter by following the instructions described in Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter provided with the wireless adapter 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 66 l Installing Optional Accessories 2 Align the connector and the three protrusions of the wireless adapter with the four holes and insert the adapter K NOTE Ensure that the adapter is fully inserted and secured 3 Turn on the printer K NOTE If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel always do as instructed 4 Print the system settings report to confirm that the wireless adapter is installed correctly Printing System Settings Report When Using the Operator panel Press the E Menu button b Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Set button c Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then
475. server address book for the Scan to E mail feature K NOTE Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax service LDAP User Mapping Purpose To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping Values Common Name Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server Surname Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server Given Name Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server E mail Address Sets the attribute type of the e mail address set for the LDAP server Fax Phone Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server 240 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool SSL TLS Purpose To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer Values SSL TLS HTTP SSL TLS Select the check box to enable the HTTP Communication SSL TLS Communication HTTP SSL TLS Sets the port number which is not identical with Communication Port that of HTTP for SSL TLS This must be 443 or Number between 8 000 and 9 999 Machine Generate Self Click this button to display the Generate Self Digital Signed Certificate Signed Certificate page Certification Certificate Details Click this button to display the Certificate Details page for the contents of the certificate or to delete the certificate sI This item is enabled only when you generate the self
476. sh computer and the printer are connected If you use wired connection connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer Start Printer Setup Utility K NOTE You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications Click Add in the Printer List dialog box Select Rendezvous from the menu Select Dell for Printer Model and select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Click Add Configuring Settings All the optional accessories are verified as installed Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 1 Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 2 Select the printer in the Printer Name list and click Options amp Supplies 3 Select Driver and select the options that have been installed in the printer and then click OK Mac OS X 10 3 9 or 10 4 11 1 Start Printer Setup Utility 2 Select the printer in the Printer List dialog box and click Show Info 3 Select Installable Options and select the options that have been installed in the printer and then click Apply Changes 146 l Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS Common UNIX Printing System on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS 5 Client or SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11
477. sheet feeder K NOTE This setting is only available when the SSF is selected for the paper tray 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the Pe Copy button Press button until SSF Paper Type is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press a or W button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Set button Plain 318 Copying Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick Coated Coated Thick Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Color Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Recycled S2 Color S2 Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Collated To sort the copy output For example if you make two copies of three page documents one complete three page document will be printed followed by the second complete document K NOTE You can collate more pages when optional memory module is installed ip 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Copying 319 Place a single document facing down on the document gla
478. sign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with the installer When you use the Network Installation feature and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP or DHCP on the operator panel menu you can set the IP address from 0 0 0 0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window Verifying the IP Settings You can confirm the settings by printing the system settings report or using the ping command Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report 1 Print the system settings report When Using the Operator Panel a Press the E Menu button b Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Set button c Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button d Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the y Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE a Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box 106 Setting the IP Address K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears d Click the System Settings button Th
479. sives face sheet printable stock and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch psi Use labels that can be without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material Print Media Guidelines NOTICE Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first When printing on labels e Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions e Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver e Use Standard Tray for label Do not print through Single Sheet Feeder for label Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 inches of the die cut Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 inches of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Do not print a label through the printer more than once e Portrait orientation is preferred especially when printing bar codes Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam e Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet It is recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm 0 04 inc
480. size 50 Sets the default reduction ratio A4 gt AS5 70 B5 A5 81 100 Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image A5 gt B5 122 Sets the default enlargement ratio A5 gt lt A4 141 200 Understanding the Tool Box Menus 449 inch series Custom Sets the default reduction ratio 50 Ledger Letter 64 Legal Letter 78 100 Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image Statement Letter Sets the default enlargement ratio 129 Statement Legal 154 200 Custom 25 400 Reduces or enlarges the image to the Reduce Enlarge 100 custom size when you set Reduce Enlarge to Custom Document Size Auto Detects the document size automatically A4 Sets the document size A5 B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Original Type Text Improves the image quality of documents with text Text amp Photo Improves the image quality of documents with both text and photos gray tones Photo Improves the image quality of documents with photos 450 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Lighter Darker Lighter 3 Makes the copy lighter than the original Lighter 2 Works well with dark print Lighter 1 Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darker 1 Makes the copy darker than the original Darker 2 Works well with light print or faint p
481. size ColorTrack Error Report Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack Letterhead Duplex Mode Displays whether to print both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper Low Toner Alert Msg Understanding the Tool Box Menus Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low Off indicates that the tone is disabled Email From Field Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E mail Server Address Book Displays whether to specify the e mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server Server Phone Book Displays whether to specify the e mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server Date amp Time Date Format Displays the selected date format Time Format Displays the selected time format 24H or 12H Time Zone Displays the selected time zone Set Date Displays the date setting Set Time Displays the time setting Paper Density Plain Displays the plain paper density settings Label Displays the label paper density settings Auto Auto Registration Displays whether to automatically Registration Adjustment adjust color registration Adjustment Adjust Altitude Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed Non Dell Toner Non Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer Understanding
482. so be displayed by clicking the E Mail Alert in the left frame Values E Mail Server Primary SMTP Sets the primary SMTP gateway Settings Gateway SMTP Port Sets the SMTP port number This must be 25 587 Number or between 5 000 and 65 535 E Mail Send Sets the authentication method for outgoing e Authentication mail Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 229 SMTP Login Sets the SMTP login user Up to 63 alphanumeric User characters periods hyphens underscores and at symbols can be used If specifying more than one address separate them using commas SMTP Login Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 Password alphanumeric characters Re enter SMTP Confirms the set SMTP account password Login Password POP3 Server Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format Address of aaa bbb ccc ddd or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters POP3 Port Sets the POP3 server port number This must be Number 110 or between 5 000 and 65 535 POP User Sets the POP3 account user name Up to 63 Name alphanumeric characters periods hyphens underscores and at symbols can be used If specifying more than one address separate them using commas POP User Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 Password alphanumeric characters Re enter POP Confirms the set password User Password Reply Address Designates the reply e mail address sent with each E
483. speed dial code in the group Name Displays the name registered for the speed dial code Not in Use is displayed in Name when there is no registration Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the selected speed dial code or enter a fax number for the new entry Apply New Click this button to apply the new settings Settings Restore Click this button to restore the previous settings Settings Back Click this button to return to the top page 2 This item is available only when you click the Confirm Change button FAX Group Delete Purpose To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the FAX Group top page Values ID Displays the selected group ID Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings 258 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Back Click this button to return to the top page Tray Settings Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray and the optional 250 sheet feeder Values Tray 1 Paper Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Size Tray 1 Paper Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Type Tray 1 Custom Sets the length of cus
484. splay the TCP IP Settings page which lists the IP address When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The system settings report is printed If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 162 l Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open 3 Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page appears If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus e Printer Status e Printer Jobs e Printer
485. ss The task is Does this solve your problem complete Go to action 3a 2b Use thin paper that is 60 g m or more The task is Does this solve your problem complete Go to action 3a 2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time The task is Does this solve your problem complete Go to action 3b 2d Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the The task is SSF as instructed in Loading an Envelope in the complete SSF Does this solve your problem Go to action 3c 2e Ensure that the print media is not curled The task is Does this solve your problem complete Troubleshooting Guide 715 Go to action 3a Action Yes No 2f Is the print media damp Go to action 3d Go to action 3a 3a Fan the print media The task is Go to action 3b Does this solve your problem complete 3b Wipe the retard roller in the SSF tray with a cloth The task is Go to action 4b moistened with water complete Does this solve your problem 3c Ifthe envelope is deformed correct it or use The task is Go to action 3a another envelope complete Does this solve your problem 3d Turn over the print media The task is Go to action 4a Does this solve your problem complete 4a Use print media that is not damp The task is Go to action 3a Does this solve your problem complete 4b Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell Does this solve you
486. ss and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the BG Copy button Press g button until Col lated is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press or 9 button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Set button Off Does not copy in collated order On Copies in collated order Auto Only the documents loaded from ADF are copied in collated order Denotes the factory default setting To customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality see Setting Copy Options 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying a When you are using the document glass and it is set to On the display prompts you for another page If you want to place a new document press button to select Yes and then press the Set button Another display prompts you for placing next page Replace the document with a new document Ensure that Continue is highlighted and then press the va Set button Reduce Enlarge To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADF K NOTE When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF 320
487. ss the V Set button 380 l Faxing 7 Press g button until Line Monitor is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press or w button until the desired volume is highlighted and then press the y Set button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again Ringer Volume 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press f or button until the desired volume is highlighted and then press the y Set button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again Specifying the Fax Settings Options Changing the Fax Settings Options 1 2 Press the Menu button Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the y Set button Press g button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Set button Press g button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the y Set button Faxing 381 6 Press or button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter th
488. ssive mode SMB Client Connection Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 60 Time Out seconds LLTD Purpose To specify the maximum number of devices Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 235 Values Maximum number of Sets the maximum number of device from 64 to 1 024 device Wireless LAN Z NOTE Wireless LAN feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network Purpose To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network To use the wireless adapter be sure to disconnect the network cable K NOTE Once wireless LAN is activated wired LAN protocol will be disabled Values Wireless SSID Sets the name that identifies the wireless network Settings Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered Network Type Sets the network type from either Ad Hoc or Infrastructure MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter for the printer Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer 236 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Security Encryption Select the security method from the list Settings No Security Sets No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security method from WEP WPA PSK and WPA Enterprise WEP Sets the WEP to use through the
489. st Sh eee Location Printer Settings Contact Person Print Server Settings Printer Status Copy Printer Settings Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status Refresh Address Book Printer Information Cyan Cartidge Level OK Tray Settings Magenta Cartridge Level OK E Mail Alert Yellow Cartridge Level OK Set Password m Black Cartridge Level OK Online Help Order Supplies at Consumables Status www dell com supplies PHD unit Contact Dell Support at support dell com Paper Trays Status Capacity Size 3 Dite eas Cantar PEPETA tiei sa J gt Dore O internet 5 Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 6 Reboot the printer 7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer 82 l Installing Optional Accessories K NOTE If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool change the wireless settings using this tool Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Select Network Connections from Control Panel v o Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties Select Wireless Network tab le d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked Click Advanced f Do either of the following
490. stem administrator 016 764 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 016 765 recover Contact SMTP server administrator 016 766 016 767 Press the va Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 016 768 recover Check e mail address and try scanning again 016 786 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 016 790 recover Check if the network cable is connected properly If there is no problem with the network cable contact server administrator 016 791 Press the V Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover 016 799 Press the Y Set button to clear the message and cancel the current print job Confirm the configuration of the printer on the printer driver 016 920 Press the va Set button and try again 016 921 016 922 016 930 The device is not supported Remove it from the front USB port 016 931 The USB hub is not supported Remove it from the front USB port 592 Understanding Printer Messages 016 985 Press the v Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to 016 986 recover Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the scanned image 024 910 Reload the specified paper on the standard 250 sheet tray 024 911 Reload the specified paper on the optional 250 sheet feeder 024 914 Reload the specified paper on the SSF 024 946 Insert the standard 25
491. t Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation 7 Click Finish When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 139 140 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers K NOTE The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Installing the Drivers and Software 1 ND Nr A Ww o0 10 11 12 Run the Drivers and Utilities CD on the Macintosh computer Double click the Dell 2155 Installer icon and then click Continue When the popup dialog box prompts you for confirming the program included in the installation package click Continue Click Continue on the Welcome screen Select a language for the Software License Agreement After reading the Software License Agreement click Continue If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement click Agree to continue the installation process Confirm the installation location and then click Continue Click Install to perform the standard installation If you want to select a custom installation click Customize to select items that you want to install e Dell 2155 Color MFP Printer Driver e Dell 2155 Color MFP Fax Driver e Dell 2155 Color MFP Scan Driver e Dell Printer Status Monitor Type the administrator s name and password and then click OK
492. t P Copy button 3 Press w until Margin Left Right is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 4 Press or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the y Set button 0 2 inch 4 Specify the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Denotes the factory default setting 330 Copying 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Margin Middle To specify the middle margin of the copy 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the PS Copy button 3 Press button until Margin Middle is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 4 Press 4 or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the Set button 0 0 inch 0 Specify the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying Changing the Default Settings The default settings of the copy menu options including contrast and image quality can be set to the most frequently used modes When you copy a document the specified default settings are used unless they are change
493. t feeder Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment For more information see Storing Print Media Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job Push the tray in firmly after loading Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached Clearing Jams 659 e Overtightening the guides may cause jams e Wipe the retard rollers in the tray or single sheet feeder with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water if jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently Identifying the Location of Paper Jams A CAUTION Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments This may permanently damage the printer The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path 1 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 Duplexer 2155cdn only 3 Fuser 4 Optional 250 Sheet Feeder 660 l Clearing Jams 5 Single Sheet Feeder SSF 6 Standard 250 Sheet Tray Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder ADF remove the jam according to the following procedure K NOTE To prevent document jams use the document glass for thick thin or mixed documents NOTICE Protect the drums of the Print Head Device PHD against bright light If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate 1 Remove the remaining documents from the ADF If the docume
494. t if this failure is repeated 009 363 Turn off the printer Confirm the black cartridge is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 010 317 Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes Open the front cover and make sure that the fuser is fully installed 010 377 Turn off the printer Confirm that the fuser is correctly installed and turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 016 316 Turn off the printer Remove the optional 512 MB memory module from the slot and then reattach it firmly Turn on the printer Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 016 317 Turn off the printer and turn it on again Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 016 318 Remove the unsupported additional memory module Contact customer support if this failure is repeated 016 386 Turn off the printer and turn it on again Contact customer support if this 016 387 failure is repeated 016 388 590 Understanding Printer Messages 016 391 Turn off the printer and turn it on again Contact customer support if this 016 392 failure is repeated 016 393 016 394 016 404 Contact your system administrator 016 405 016 503 Press the w Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly 016 504 Press the Y Set button or wait for 30 seconds for the pr
495. t or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper ECM Displays whether the Error Correction Mode ECM is enabled Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs 432 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Fax Activity Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Fax Protocol Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Country Displays the country where the printer is used 1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Printer Maintenance The Printer Maintenance tab includes the System Settings Date amp Time Paper Density Color Registration Adjustment Adjust Altitude Reset Defaults Non Dell Toner Initialize Print Meter Tray Settings TCP IP Settings Network Settings Copy Defaults Scan Defaults Fax Defaults Print from USB Defaults and Fax Settings pages K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings System Setti
496. t the printer object in the Printers Printers and Faxes or Devices and Printers folder is shared The shared icon is shown under the printer icon Browse Network or My Network Places Find the host name of the server and the shared name you assigned to the printer Now that the printer is shared you can install the printer on network clients using the point and print method or the peer to peer method Point and Print Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect to a remote printer This feature automatically downloads and installs the printer driver Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer double click My Network Places 2 Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name 3 Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 133 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ex Q a JO search E gt Folders E s WXp eng Network Tasks la ey SharedDocs G Add a network place ct a View network connections Qa eee f eee S Prinl Create Shortcut T Set up a home or small a rey Rreete Shorteue cheduled Tasi office network Properties 23 Set up a wireless network For a home or small office A View workgroup computers Show icons For networked UPnP devices Other Places gy
497. t when the printer receives it Banner Sheet Insert Position Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output Banner Sheet Specify Tray Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed RAM Disk Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print and Store Print features 196 Substitute Tray Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Letterhead Duplex Mode Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead Low Toner Alert Msg Alerts you if the toner is low Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel l This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer 2 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed 3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer USB Settings Purpose To change USB settings on your printer Values USB Port Enables the USB interface on your printer PCL Settings Purpose To change the PCL settings Values Paper Tray Sets the paper input tray Paper Size Sets the paper size Custom Size Y Sets the length of custom size paper The available range is from 127 mm 5 0 inch to 355 mm 14 0 inch Custom Size X Sets
498. t when the printer receives it Banner Sheet Displays where to insert a banner sheet in the Insert Position output paper Banner Sheet Displays the tray to feed a banner sheet Specify Tray RAM Disk Displays whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print and Proof Print features Substitute Tray Displays if paper of another size has to be used when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size setting for the current job Letterhead Displays whether to print both sides on Duplex Mode letterhead Low Toner Alert Displays whether to show the alert message Msg when the toner is low Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel screen USB Settings USB Port Displays whether to enable the USB interface PCL Settings Paper Tray Displays the paper input tray Paper Size Displays the paper size setting Custom Size Y Displays the length of custom size paper Custom Size X Displays the width of custom size paper Orientation Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page Font Displays the selected font from the list of registered fonts Symbol Set Displays a symbol set for the specified font 182 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Font Size Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts Font Pitch Displays the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts
499. ta in the USB memory or the USB memory device itself may be destroyed Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image To send an e mail attached with the scanned image from your printer follow the steps below e Set E Mail Alert e Register a user Start to send e mail with the scanned file Setting an E Mail Alert 1 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click E Mail Alert The E Mail Server Settings page appears 370 Scanning index htm Microsoft Internet Explorer Ble Edt p O O RAD Pena ros e Address mmatin m lm Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at www dell com supplies support dell com Contact Dell Support at Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4 5 a IPv6 Link Local mat gaii Sl mae Pym Location Contact Person lt i Ie Print Server Reports Print Server Setings Security Basic Information Port Settings TCP IP SMB E Mail Alert Bonjour mDNS SNMP Scan to PC LLTD Reset Print Server E Mail Alert Refiesh E Mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway F SMTP Port Number 25 5 587 6000 65535 E Mail Send Authentication invalid g SMTP Login User SMTP Login Password ee Re enter SMTP Login Password vee POP3 Server Address POP3 Port Number 1
500. tails see Printing a Speed Dial List Address Book This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer s memory as Address Book information Server Address This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer s memory as Server Address information Fax Activity This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent Fax Pending This list shows the status of pending faxes You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing any settings Print Meter This report shows the total number of pages printed The report will be titled Dell ColorTrack Report Procedures 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press Ss button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the y Set button 4 Press button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted and then press the V Set button The selected report or list is printed Faxing 417 e Speed Dial Speed Dial list e Address Book Address Book list e Server Address Server Address list e Fax Activity Fax activity information e Fax Pending Pending faxes e Print Meter Print volume report Changing Setting Options 418 1 2 Press the E Menu button Press g button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until Defaults Settings is highlighted a
501. talled 316 Copying SSF Paper Size To select the default paper size of the single sheet feeder K NOTE This setting is only available when the SSF is selected for the paper tray 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass and Making Copies From the ADF 2 Press the lt B Copy button 3 Press button until SSF Paper Size is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press or W button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Set button Inch series Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 A4 210 x 297mm A5 148 x 210mm B5 182 x 257mm Executive 7 3 x 10 5 Envelope 10 4 1 x 9 5 Monarch Env 3 9 x 7 5 DL Env 110 x 220 mm C5 Env 162 x 229mm mm series Copying 317 A4 210 x 297 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B5 182 x 257 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 3 x 10 5 Envelope 10 4 1 x 9 5 Monarch Env 3 9 x 7 5 DL Env 110 x 220 mm C5 Env 162 x 229 mm Denotes the factory default setting 5 Press the gt Start button to begin copying SSF Paper Type To select the default paper type of the single
502. te when the print job was submitted 178 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Completed Jobs Purpose To check the completed jobs Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed Click the Refresh button to update the screen Values ID Displays the job ID Job Name Displays the file name of the job Owner Displays the name of the job owner Host Name Displays the name of the host computer Output Result Displays the status of the job Job Type Displays the type of the job Impression Number Displays the total number of pages for the job No of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets for the job Host I F Displays the status of the host interface Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted Printer Settings Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report Printer Settings and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame Printer Settings Report The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages Menu Settings Purpose To display the current settings of the operator panel menus Values Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 179 System Settings Power Saver 180 Time Sleep Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job Power Saver Time Deep Sleep Displays the time tak
503. ted 600 l Understanding Printer Messages Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD This section provides information for network printing with WSD the new Microsoft protocol for Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Adding Roles of Printer Services When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client For Windows Server 2008 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager 2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu 3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next 4 Check the Print Server check box and then click Next 5 Click Install For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager 2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu 3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next 4 Click Next 5 Check the Print Server check box and then click Next 6 Click Install Printing With Web Services on Devices WSD 601 Printer Setup You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer or using Microsoft Windows Add Printer wizard Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and
504. ted and then press the Y Set button Press g button until the paper type for the optional 250 sheet feeder is displayed and then press the Set button Confirm that the selected paper type is highlighted and then press the Menu button If you installed the optional 250 sheet feeder after installing the printer driver update your driver by following the instructions for each operating system If the printer is on a network update the driver for each client Installing Optional Accessories Updating Your Driver to Detect 250 Sheet Feeder Microsoft Windows 7 Windows 7 x64 Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 1 Click Start gt Devices and Printers 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Printer properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box Windows Vista Vista x64 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties 3 Click the Options tab and then select Get Information from Printer 4 Click Apply and then click OK 5 Close the Printers dialog box Windows Server 2008 Server 2008 x64 1 Click Start Control Panel Printers 2 Right click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color
505. ted and then press the vV Set button Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the y Set button Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Soeed Dial is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Faxing 407 10 Press button until the desired speed dial number between 001 and 200 is highlighted and then press the Set button Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the Set button Enter the name and then press the V Set button Press g button until Phone Number is highlighted and then press the V Set button Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad and then press the Set button To insert a pause between numbers press the Y Redial Pause button appears on the display To assign a name to the number enter the name For details about how to enter names see Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters Press w button until Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the V Set button When a message prompting you to apply settings press button to select Yes and then press the V Set button To store more fax numbers repeat steps 6 to 11 To return to the top screen of the E Menu menu press the AC All Clear button Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial 408 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single doc
506. ted and then press the y Set button Press g button until Y1 ES is highlighted and then press the y Set button The printer is restarted automatically Understanding the Printer Menus 555 556 Understanding the Printer Menus Understanding Your Printer Software Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software programs depending on your operating system Printer Status Window The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs for example when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low By default the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs When an error occurs the error message appears on the Printer Status window You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in Printing Status Window Properties You can also check toner level quantity of paper remaining or the configuration of options for the local printer Status Monitor Console Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer Select a printer from the list view or Printer Selection by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a particular printer Dell Supplies Management System You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon You can order consumables by phone or from the web 1 Click St
507. tep 6 e Press the A Speed Dial button For details see Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial Press button until the desired recipient is highlighted and then press gt button to select the recipients Press the Set button to confirm Press the gt Start button Faxing 393 When the document is loaded on the document glass the display prompts you for another page Press a or button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately and then press the vA Set button The printer starts dialing the number and then sending the fax when the remote fax machine is ready K NOTE You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by pressing the Cancel button K NOTE Pressing the gt Start button does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax service is locked For details see Set Available Time for the Available time and Function Enabled for the Fax service Sending a Fax Manually 394 1 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document Press the amp Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution For adjusting the contrast see Adjusting the Document
508. ter as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next Installation starts As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 14 Click Finish Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition K NOTE You must log in as an administrator 1 na A U N 10 11 12 13 14 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win 7Vista XPS_2155 zip where D is the CD drive letter Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Select printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 8 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 6 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or host name and then click Next Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue K NOTE If you are an administrator on the computer click Continue otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To chan
509. tet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask It is specified using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255 255 255 255 255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask 446 Understanding the Tool Box Menus Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address It is specified using the format nnn nnn nnn nnn Each octet that makes up nnn nnn nnn nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new Click this button to restart the printer and apply the settings changes Network Settings Z NOTE Network Settings is not available when the printer is connected using a USB cable Purpose To configure the setup of the printer using your web browser Values Print Server Display Click to display the Print Server Setup page on the Dell Settings Printer Configuration Web Tool Display of off Does not display the server settings for the Dell Printer EWS Configuration Web Tool On Displays the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
510. that the PHD unit is installed correctly The task is Go to action 2 Does this solve your problem complete 2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit The task is Contact Dell complete See Replacing the Print Head Device PHD Unit Does this solve your problem Exit Jam Exit Sensor Off JAM Troubleshooting Guide 717 Action Yes No 1 Ensure the fuser is installed correctly The task is Contact Dell complete Does this solve your problem Standard 250 Sheet Tray Optional 250 Sheet Feeder Multi feed Jam Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the tray is properly inserted The task is If using coated Does this solve your problem complete paper 80 19 action 2 If using other type of print media go to action 3 2 Load coated paper one sheet at a time The task is Go to action 4 Does this solve your problem complete 3 Use print media that is not damp The task is Go to action 4 Does this solve your problem complete 4 Fan the print media The task is Go to action 5 complete Does this solve your problem 5 Wipe the retard roller in the tray where the multi The task is feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water complete Does this solve your problem Contact Dell SSF Multi feed Jam 1 Ensure the media type you are using If using coated paper go to action 2 If using other type of print media go to action 3 Go to action 4 2 Load coated paper
511. that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list 6 Select the Default Printer check box 7 Confirm the settings and click OK Specifying the Printing Options You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double sided printing 1 Open a web browser 2 Type http Nocalhost 631 admin in Location and press the lt Enter gt key 3 Type root as the user name and type the administrator password The CUPS window appears K NOTE Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue If you have not set it go to Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 4 Click Manage Printers 5 Specify the required settings and click Continue 156 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully appears The setting is complete Execute printing from the application Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator 1 Select Computer More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Type the following command in the terminal window su Type the administrator password lppessuc lt G SWS e OO Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt Retype the password fo
512. the standard 250 sheet tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 5 Lift the printer and align the five guide pins of the optional 250 sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the printer Gently lower the printer onto the optional 250 sheet feeder A CAUTION Two people are required to lift the printer The printer should be lifted holding the front and back Never lift the printer from its sides Installing Optional Accessories 59 A CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the printer onto the optional 250 sheet feeder 6 Secure the optional 250 sheet feeder to the printer by tightening the two screws provided with the feeder with a coin or similar object K NOTE The screw hole is located in 216 mm recess from the front of the printer 7 Insert the standard 250 sheet tray into the printer and push until it stops 60 l Installing Optional Accessories 8 Re connect all cables into the back of the printer and turn on the printer K NOTE The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type 9 Print the system settings report to confirm the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed correctly Printing System Settings Report When Using the Operator Panel a Press the A Menu button b Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button c Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the V Set
513. the Chart 1 of the color registration chart find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color Y M and C If you find the straightest line make a note of the value 9 to 9 indicated by the straightest line for each color When the value is 0 for each color you do not need to adjust the color registration for the fast scan 644 Maintaining Your Printer When the value is not 0 enter the value using the procedure in Entering Values 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 ET r a E E IRS 4 2 2 2 2 m ee en A o 2 e 3 8 S 38 BC 8 Straightest line Slow Scan On the Chart 2 of the color registration chart find the medium line within the range of white area for each color pattern Y M and C If you find the medium line make a note of the value 9 9 indicated by the medium line for each color When the value is 0 for each color you do not need to adjust the color registration for the slow scan When the value is not 0 enter the value using the procedure in Entering Values Maintaining Your Printer 645 Lattice pattern Entering Values When Using the Operator Panel Using the operator panel enter the values found in the color registration chart to make adjustments 1 2 646
514. the REGI CLUTCH Operation Check Confirm that you can hear the clutch clicking Dispense Motor Click Start to operate the dispense motor for Check Yellow each toner cartridge Confirm the motor sound Dispense Motor Check Magenta Dispense Motor Check Cyan Dispense Motor Check Black Play of Sound Plays back through speakers of your computer a recording of the normal sound for the currently selected Machine Check item Start Click this button to check the operation of the items selected with Machine Check and output the results to Result Result Displays the results of the checked items I When performing the feed roll operation check remove the paper tray from the printer Paper Wrinkle Check Mode Purpose To determine whether or not paper is wrinkled in the fuser This function stops printing before the paper enters the fuser After you remove the paper inside the printer check the following Ifthe paper is wrinkled the wrinkle occurred in the part other than fuser e Ifthe paper is not wrinkled the wrinkle occurred in the fuser Values Understanding the Tool Box Menus 465 466 Paper Size A AS B5 Letter Folio Legal Executive Envelope 10 Monarch DL c5 Sets the size of paper to be used by the Paper Wrinkle Check Mode Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick
515. the Set this printer as default check box d Ifyou want to restrict color printing select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option Enter the password when Color Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack e Ifyou want to install the Fax Driver select the Fax Driver check box Select the software and documentation you want to install and then click Install If you want to change the installation destination click Input and specify new location Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations screen appears Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk You can view and or change the printer settings monitor toner level and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies K NOTE The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool type the printer s IP address in your web browser The printer configuration appears on the screen You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention To set up e mail alerts 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 2 Click E Mail Alert link 3 Under E Mail Server Settings ente
516. the Tool Box Menus 425 Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Custom Size Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Custom Size X Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Display Popup Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the optional 250 sheet feeder Tray 2 Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the optional 250 sheet feeder Tray 2 Display Popup Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder l This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed 2 This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed 3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Reports Purpose To print the settings and history information of the printer The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings The default is A4 Values System Settings Click this button to print a detailed list of the system settings Panel Settings Click this button to
517. the computer Windows Server 2003 To enable WIA computer os P 1 Click Start point to Administrative Tools and then click Services 2 Right click Windows Image Acquisition WIA and then click Start Cannot scan using TWAIN or Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer WIA on a Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 computer To install Desktop Experience 1 Click Start point to Administrative Tools and then click Server Manager 2 Under Features Summary click Add Features 3 Select the Desktop Experience check box click Next and then click Install 4 Restart the computer 726 Troubleshooting Guide Problems With Installed Optional Accessories If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working Turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and then turn on the printer If this does not fix the problem unplug the printer and check the connection between the option and the printer e Print the system settings report to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed re install it See Printing System Settings Report Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using The following table lists printer s option and corrective action for related problem If the suggested corrective action does not correct the problem call customer service Problem Action 250 sheet feeder
518. the density level to be used for fax transmission Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool l 187 188 Fax Settings Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode Auto Receive Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call Auto Receive Tel Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Receive Answer Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Displays the volume of the ring tone which Volume indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Line Type Displays the line type PSTN or PBX Tone Pulse Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing Resend Delay Displays the interval between re send attempts Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax number is busy Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations
519. the toner cartridge C See Replacing the Toner Cartridges The task is complete The toner cartridge C you are using has been damaged Replace it with a new one Contact Dell Copy Problem Problem Action A document loaded in the Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed ADF cannot be copied Ensure that the release lever is properly positioned Fax Problems Problem Action The printer is not working Unplug the power cord and plug it in again there is no display and the buttons are not working Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle No dial tone sounds Connecting the Telephone Line Check that the phone line is connected properly See Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone Diagnose the FAX connection See Diagnosing the Fax Connection 720 Troubleshooting Guide The numbers stored in the memory do not dial correctly Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly Print a Phone Book list The document does not feed into the printer Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly Check that the document is of the right size not too thick or thin Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed Faxes are not received automatically The FAX mode should be selected Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray
520. then press the Set button 4 Ensure that FAX Parameter appears and then press the Y Set button 5 Press button until G3M TX Coding appears and then press the y Set button 6 Press button until the desired encoding appears and then press the y Set button You can select MH MR or MMR You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions 1 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode Faxing 387 Press w button to select Fax Scanner Diag and then press the y Set button Press g button until Parameter appears and then press the Y Set button Ensure that FAX Parameter appears and then press the Set button Press button until G3M RX Coding appears and then press the V Set button Press button until the desired encoding appears and then press the y Set button You can select MH MR or MMR Diagnosing the Fax Connection You can diagnose the Fax connection using the FAX Line Diagnosis feature that can detect the abnormalities of telephone line connection 1 Turn on the printer while holding down 4 and buttons to start in Customer Mode 2 Press w button to select Fax Scanner Diag and then press the y Set button 3 Press button until FAX Test appears and then press the V Set button 4 When the message Check FAX Connection appears press the Set button 5 When the message Re
521. this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next Installation starts As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to print a test page Click Finish Network Connection Setup K NOTE To use this printer in a Linux environment you need to install a Linux driver For more information on how to install and use these see Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS K NOTE When using a CD drive in a Linux environment you need to mount the CD according to your system environment The command strings are mount media CD ROM Network Printer Setup on a Local Network For installing PCL printer driver 1 118 In the Easy Setup Navigator window click Software Installation to launch the installation software Select Network Installation and then click Next Select the model name of your printer and then click Next Select Local Installation and then click Next Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 5 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list and then click Next If the target printer is not displayed on the list click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually You may specify the IP address and port name at this point If you have installed this printer on the server computer select the I am setting up this printer on a
522. tings Copy Defaults Copy Color Balance Copy Settings Fax Defaults Fax Settings Scan Defaults and Print from USB Defaults pages System Settings Purpose To configure the basic printer settings Values Power Saver Time Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job Power Saver Time Deep Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode Power Saver Wake Up Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep OffHook Wake Up mode when OnHook is set to Off Auto Reset Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made Fault Time Out Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally Job Time Out Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer Control Panel Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct or disables the tone Invalid Key Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect or disables the tone Machine Ready Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready or disables the tone Copy Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete or disables the to
523. tings without using the video instructions follow the following instructions WPS PIN The PIN code of WPS PIN can only be configured from the operator panel K NOTE WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected setup Personal Identification Number is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the V Set button 4 Press button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Installing Optional Accessories 75 10 11 Press button until Wireless Setup is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press button until WPS is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press button until PIN Code is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Write down the 8 digit PIN code displayed on the first line of the panel display or press button until Print PIN Code is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The PIN code is printed Ensure that Start Configuration is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Ensure that the message PLease wait Wireless Setting is displayed and enter the
524. tom size paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet Size Y tray Tray 1 Custom Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250 sheet Size X tray Tray 1 Display Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set Popup the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 Paper Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Size Tray 2 Paper Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Type Tray 2 Display Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set Popup the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder l This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 259 260 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Print Media Guidelines Print media refers to paper labels envelopes and coated paper among others Your printer provides high quality printing on a variety of print media Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles This section describes selecting print media caring for print media and loading the print media in the standard 250 sheet tray Paper For the best print quality in color use 75 g m 20 lb xerographic grain long paper For the best print quality in black and white use 90 g m 24 1b xerographic grain long paper It
525. tration adjustment On Automatically performs color registration adjustment Color Reg Adjust Purpose To manually perform color registration adjustment Understanding the Printer Menus S15 Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved K NOTE The Color Reg Adjust feature can be configured when Auto Reg Adjust is setto Off Values Auto Correct Yes Automatically performs color registration correction No Does not perform color registration correction Color Reg Yes Chart Prints a color registration chart The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow magenta and cyan lines On the chart find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors If the value for this line is 0 color registration adjustment is not required If the value for this line is any value other than 0 specify the adjustment values under Lateral Adjustment and Process Adjustment No Does not print a color registration chart Enter Number LY LM LC 9 to 9 Sets lateral perpendicular to paper feed direction and process paper feed direction color adjustment values individually for Yellow Magenta and Cyan Enter a number RY RM RC 9to 9 in order of lateral adjustment left lateral adjustment right and process adjustment Press th
526. tray before removing the retard roller 2 Holding the retard roller tabs with your fingers pull the retard roller out of the groove in the axle 628 l Maintaining Your Printer Installing a Retard Roller in the Standard 250 Sheet Tray 1 Align the new retard roller with the groove on the axle Maintaining Your Printer 629 2 Insert the retard roller into the axle until it snaps The protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller hook reseats into the groove on the axle 3 Load paper in the standard 250 sheet tray and then insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops 630 Maintaining Your Printer Cleaning Inside the Printer Cleaning the Feed Roller Clean the feed roller inside the printer if print media does not feed correctly 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the standard 250 sheet tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 3 Push the side button to open the front cover Maintaining Your Printer 631 4 Open the belt unit 5 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90 degrees counterclockwise 632 Maintaining Your Printer 6 Hold the gray tabs and then pull out the PHD unit Maintaining Your Printer 633 K NOTE Keep the PHD unit in a dark place If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate 7 Clean the feed roller inside t
527. tterhead Preprinted or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper When using the single sheet feeder the pre printed paper such as letterhead enters the printer first with the print side facing down The following table shows the orientation when loading letterheads in the tray or feeders For other pre printed and pre punched paper load the paper by reference to the following table 278 Loading Print Media Print media source Print side Page orientation Standard 250 sheet Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Letterhead enters tray and optional 250 sheet feeder Face up the printer last Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Letterhead enters Face down the printer first NOTE Set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead Preprinted or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper Loading Print Media 279 Print media source Print side Page orientation Single sheet feeder Face down Letterhead enters SSF i the printer first Loading Print Media in the SSF 1 Adjust the width guides to the print media s width 2 Hold both sides of the print media facing down close to the single sheet feeder and push it 8 cm to 9 cm 4 inches into the printer until it aut
528. tude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality incorrect indication of remaining toner etc Values 0m Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed 1000m 2000m 3000m Secure Settings Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus This prevents items from being changed accidentally K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings See also Panel Lock Panel Lock Purpose To set a limited access to Admin Menu with a password and to set or change the password Values Panel Lock Set Disable Disables password protection for Admin Menu Enable Enables password protection for Admin Menu Change Password 0000 9999 Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu Understanding the Printer Menus 519 l This item is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Function Enabled K NOTE Function Enabled feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Purpose To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services Values Copy On Enables the Copy service On Enables the Copy service but requires a password Password to use the service On Color Enables the Copy service with a color mode but Password requires a password off Disables the C
529. twork and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect f Enter the Security key and click OK if necessary For Fixed IP networks 1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity K NOTE If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool change the wireless settings using this tool Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 a Select Network Connections from Control Panel b Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties c Select the Wireless Networks tab 84 Installing Optional Accessories d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked K NOTE Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step d and step f so that you can restore them later e Click the Advanced button f Select Computer to Computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties h Under the Association tab enter the following information and click OK Network name SSID dell_ device Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled Ad hoc network checked Wireless network properties Association Authentic
530. ty as the Printer Administrator 4 Click Manage Printers 5 Specify the required settings and click Continue 152 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully appears The setting is complete Execute printing from the application Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator 1 Select Computer More Applications and select Konsole on the Application Browser 2 Type the following command in the terminal window su Type the administrator password lppessuc lt G SWS e OO Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 Select Computer More Applications and select Konsole on the Application Browser 2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su Type the administrator password usr sbin lpadmin x Type the printer queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Type the following command in the terminal window Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers CUPS 153 su Type the administrator password rpm e Dell 2155cdn Color MFP
531. ult sharpness level Contrast Displays the default contrast level Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scan Auto Exposure Level Displays the background suppression level Margin Displays the value of the top and bottom Top Bottom margins Margin Displays the value of the left and right margins Left Right Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin TIFF File Displays the selected TIFF file format TIFF V6 Format or TTN2 Image Displays the image compression level Compression Max Email Size Displays the maximum size of e mail that can be sent Email From Field Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E mail Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Print from USB Color Displays whether to print in color or in black and Defaults white Select Tray Displays the default input tray SSF Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Type Displays the paper type settings of the single sheet feeder 2 Sided Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper Layout Displays the output layout Paper Density Plain Displays the paper density of plain paper Label Displays the paper density of labels Adjust BTR Plain Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller 6 to 6 for pl
532. ument facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Loading an Original Document To enter the speed dial number do one of the followings after pressing the amp Fax button e Ensure that Fax to is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press g button until Speed Dial is highlighted and then press the V Set button e Press the A Speed Dial button l Faxing 3 Enter the speed dial number between 001 and 200 using the numeric keypad and then press the y Set button The corresponding entry s name briefly displays To confirm the name again press the Set button 4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs For details see Adjusting the Document Resolution For adjusting the contrast see Adjusting the Document Contrast 5 Press the gt Start button The document scans into the memory When the document is loaded on the document glass the display prompts you for another page Press or button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately and then press the V Set button The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers K NOTE Using the asterisk in the first digit you can send a document to multiple locations For example if you enter 00 you can send a document to the lo
533. urpose To specify the left and right margins of the copy Values Understanding the Printer Menus 541 0 2 inch 4 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Margin Middle Purpose To specify the middle margin of the copy Values 0 0 inch 0 mm Sets the value in increments of 0 1 inch 1 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 0 50 mm Scan Menu Use the SCAN menus to configure a variety of scanner features Z NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Scan to USB Memory Save to Purpose To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer Values Save to Saves the scanned image to root or folders in a USB memory Scan to E Mail Email to Purpose To specify the recipient of the e mail to attach the scanned image Values 542 Understanding the Printer Menus Recipient Keypad Enters an e mail address using a keypad Address Book Searches an e mail address from the Address Book Email Group Searches an e mail address from the Email Group in the Address Book Search Local Searches an e mail address from the Local Address Address Book Book Search Server Searches an e mail address from the Server Address Address Book Book From Setting Purpose To specify the sender of the e mail Values Keypad Enters an e mail address using a keypad Local Address Book Searches an e mail addr
534. user Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page E Mail Group Top Page Purpose To view the e mail address entries registered on the E Mail Group page Values Group ID Displays the group ID Name Displays the assigned group name Not in Use is displayed in Name when there is no registration Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID Confirm Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected Change group ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID E Mail Group Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the e mail address group entries on the E Mail Group page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm Change or Create button on the E Mail Group top page Values E Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID or enter a new group name Delete Click this button to delete the current entry Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 251 E Mail Address Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button ID Displays the user ID Select the check box on the left to create the group Name Displays the user name Not in Use
535. utername lprintername Browse j Example echiputername printername or http compu name printers printername printer Add a printer usi g a TCP IP address or hostname Net Cancel For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a printer driver If no system driver is available you need to specify the path to available drivers Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer and then click Next If you want to verify installation click Print a test page Click Finish When a test page prints successfully installation is complete Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 138 Click Start Control Panel Printers 2 Click Add a Printer 3 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and then click Next If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that I want isn t listed and type the path to the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the n
536. uters CUPS 151 Printing From the Applications When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information on specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue 1 To activate the Printer setup Autodetected printers do the following a Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser b Type the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated c Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Printer 2 Select the printer you want to set to default on the Printer Configuration and select Set default in Other button menu 3 Click Finish Specifying the Printing Options You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double sided printing 1 Open a web browser 2 Type http Mocalhost 631 admin in Location and press the lt Enter gt key 3 Type root as the user name and type the administrator password The CUPS window appears K NOTE Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue If you have not set it go to Setting the Password for Authori
537. uto Correct Click Start to perform color Registration registration automatically Adjustments Print Color Regi Chart Click Start to print a color registration chart Registration PY Process 9to 9 Sets lateral perpendicular to Adjustments Yellow 0 paper feed direction and process paper feed direction PM Process 9to 9 color adjustment values that are Magenta 9 found in the color registration chart individually for Yellow PC Process 9 to 9 Magenta and Cyan Cyan 0 LY Left 9 to 9 Yellow 0 LM Left 9 to 9 Magenta 9 LC Left 9 to 9 Cyan 0 RY Right 9 to 9 Yellow 0 RM Right 9 to 9 Magenta 0 RC Right 9to 9 Cyan 0 Apply New Settings After you complete change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes Understanding the Tool Box Menus 441 l This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The method for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used Values Adjust Altitude 0 meter Sets the altitude of the location where the 1000 meters printer is installed 2000 meters 3000 meters Apply New Settings After you change
538. v I Denotes country specific factory default values SSF Paper Type K NOTE SSF Paper Type feature is available only when print media is inserted in the single sheet feeder Purpose To specify the default paper type of the single sheet feeder Values Plain Plain Thick Covers Covers Thick Coated Coated Thick Envelope Recycled Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched 536 Understanding the Printer Menus Color Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Recycled S2 Color S2 Collated Purpose To sort the copy job For example if you make two copies of three page documents one complete set of three page documents is printed one by one Values Off Does not sort a copy job On Sorts a copy job Auto Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the ADF Reduce Enlarge Purpose To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image Values mm series Custom 100 50 A4 A5 70 B5 gt A5 81 100 A5 gt B5 122 A5 gt A4 141 200 inch series Understanding the Printer Menus l 537 Custom 100 50 Ldgr Ltr 64 LglLtr 78 100 Stmt Ltr 129 Stmt Legl 154 200 K NOTE You can set the value in a percentage for Custom Document Size Purpose To specify the default document size Values mm series Auto
539. ver by using the FTP protocol Search Address Book Searches a network address from the Address Book K NOTE The network addresses need to be registered before you can select Network Computer or Network Server on the operator panel 6 Press button until the desired destination is highlighted and then press the Set button 7 Specify the scan options such as file format color mode resolution and document size For details see File Format 8 Press the gt Start button to begin sending the scanned files Scanning to a USB Memory The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to store scanned image directly to a USB memory attached to the printer without using software 368 Scanning Types of a USB Memory You can use a USB memory with the following interfaces e USB 1 1 e USB 2 0 The USB memory must be formatted in FAT file systems FAT16 FAT32 or VFAT before inserting the memory device into the USB port of the printer K NOTE If the USB memory is formatted in a file system other than above the printer may not recognize that the USB memory is attached K NOTE A USB memory with authentication feature and some brands of USB memories cannot be used with this printer To store the scanned images to a USB memory 1 Insert a USB memory into the USB port of the printer See Inserting and Removing a USB Memory for more details 2 Load the document s facing up with top edge in first into the ADF
540. vice Installing Optional Accessories 79 Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled Ad hoc network checked Wireless network properties Association Authentication Connection Network name SSID dell device Wireless network key This network requires a key for the folowing Network Authentication Open E Data encryption Disabled s Cancel i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Property dialog box For Windows Vista a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Internet c Select Network and Sharing Center d Select Connect to a network e Select dell_ device from the network items listed in Connect to a network f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 a Open Control Panel b Select Network and Sharing Center 80 Installing Optional Accessories d Select Connect to a network Select dell_ device from the network items listed in Connect to a network Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 a b c d e Open Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sh
541. vity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications No Auto Print Does not print a fax activity report automatically Understanding the Tool Box Menus Fax Transmit Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission Print On Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Error Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission Fax Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax Broadcast transmission Print On Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Error Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations Fax Protocol Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission Print On Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error Error occurs Print Disable Does not print the protocol monitor report Country Selects the country where the printer is used Apply New Settings After you change the settings click this button to apply the changes Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Diagnosis The Diagnosis tab includes the Chart Print Machine Check Paper Wrinkle Check Mode Environment Sensor Info Clean Developer and Refresh Mode pages K NOTE Values
542. web browser To find your printer s IP address see Printing System Settings Report Settings from the software program update the default system settings for the printer Settings from the printer driver only apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer If you cannot change a setting from your software program use the operator panel Tool Box or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Changing a system setting from the operator panel Tool Box or from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default Printing System Settings Report You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report 304 Printing When Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Ensure that Report List is highlighted and then press the Set button 4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted and then press the va Set button The system settings report is printed When Using the Tool Box K NOTE 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Tool Box V NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple Pp P printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names and then click OK The Tool Box opens 2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report t
543. white Select Tray Displays the input tray Understanding the Tool Box Menus 427 SSF Paper Size Displays the paper size loaded in the single sheet feeder SSF Paper Type Displays the paper type loaded in the single sheet feeder Collated Displays whether to collate the copy Reduce Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction enlargement ratio Document Size Displays the default paper size Original Type Displays the type of the original document Lighter Darker Displays the default copy density level Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level Color Saturation Displays the default color saturation level Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Auto Expo Level Displays the background suppression level Color Balance Yellow Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density yellow Color Balance Yellow Middle Dens Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow Color Balance Yellow High Dens Displays the color balance level of high density yellow Color Balance Magenta Low Dens Displays the color balance level of low density magenta Color Balance Magenta Middle Dens Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta Color Balance Magenta High Dens Displays the color balance level
544. wireless network WPA Sets the WPA PSK to use PSK WPA2 through the wireless network PSK WEP Encryption Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii WEP Key 1 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption Re enter WEP Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it Key 1 WEP Key 2 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption Re enter WEP Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it Key 2 WEP Key 3 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption Re enter WEP Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it Key 3 WEP Key 4 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption Re enter WEP Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it Key 4 Transmit Key Sets the transmit key type from the list WPA PSK Pass Phrase Sets the pass phrase Re enter Pass Phrase Enters the pass phrase again to confirm it Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool l l For encryption AES or TKIP method is used 2 This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network Type K NOTE The optional wireless adapter supports WEP WPA PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES and WPA PSK AES Reset Print Server Purpose To initialize NVRAM non volatile RAM for the
545. word corresponding to the above login name Password For FTP Contact the system administrator e For SMB Empty password is not valid in the Network Computer feature Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account See Setting a Login Name and a Password SMB Only for details on how to add a password in your user login account 9 Re enter Re enter your password Password Scanning 363 Using Address Book Editor 1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer Address Book Editor 2 Click Tool New Device Address Book Server 364 Scanning For Microsoft Windows F Address Book Editor New PG Fax Address Book i E Mail gt Edit Register Group Infor E Mail Subject Settings OE PC Fax Address Book New Fax Entry New Fax Group New E Mail Entry New E Mail Group i E E Mail Server OE PC Fax Address Book Register Group Server Address dialog box appears Scanning 365 For Microsoft Windows Server Address 001 K Address ID Name Server Type Computer O Seryer N Computer Settings ward w Server Name P Address 4 Share Name Path me Login Name Login Password t 8 Lomen Login Password Q Port Number M Use Default Port Number F
546. x Dial Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number dials before Number any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX 206 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Discard Size Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page ECM Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode ECM To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM Modem Speed Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Country Sets the country where the printer is used Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Fax Protocol Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs l This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Sc
547. y aaa 394 Confirming Transmissions ooa 395 Automatic Redialing 2 2 395 Sending a Delayed Fax ooa 395 Sending a Fax from the Driver Direct Fax 396 Examples a aana eng a aly ae ay D pee 397 ReceivingaFax 404 About Receiving Modes 404 Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes 404 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode 404 Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode 404 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine Fax 0 Ap a A ee 405 Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 405 Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD 406 Receiving Faxes in the Memory 406 Polling Receive 407 Automatic Dialing ooa 407 Speed Dialing oo a 407 Setting Speed Dial a 0 2 407 Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial 408 Group Dialing oaa 409 12 Contents Setting Group Dial 1 0 0002 409 Editing Group Dial 2 2 1 410 Sending a Fax Using Group Dial Multi address Transmission 411 Printing a Speed DialList 412 Phone Book 0 0000 412 Other Ways to Fax 413 Using the Secure Receiving Mode 413 Using an Answering Machine oaa 415 Using a ComputerModem 416 PrintingaReport 416 Speed Dial non adi eae Se Ree ek 417 Address Book 417 Server Address ooa 417 Fax Activity
548. y 4 WEP 128Bit Specifies the WEP 128bit key to use through the wireless network Up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered Transmit Specifies the transmit key from Key WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 WPA PSK Select to configure the wireless setting with TKIP the security method of WPA PSK TKIP Pass Specifies the passphrase of Phrase alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only when WPA PSK TKIP is selected for Encryption WPA2 PSK Select to configure the wireless setting with AES the security method of WPA2 PSK AES Pass Specifies the passphrase of Phrase alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only when WPA PSK AES is selected for Encryption 484 Understanding the Printer Menus Ad hoc Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless router No Security Select to configure the wireless setting without specifying the security method from WEP WEP 64Bit Specifies the WEP 64bit key to use through the wireless network Up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered Transmit Specifies the transmit key from Key WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 WEP 128Bit Specifies the WEP 128bit key to use through the wireless network Up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered Transmit Specifies the transmit key from Key WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 WPS Push Button Contr
549. y and Microsoft Paint using a Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver Supporting USB and Network connections on Windows only See Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition WIA Driver Scan and send the scanned document to computer connected via USB cable Supporting USB connection for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using bundled software tool of ScanButton Manager Scanning 335 Using the feature of Scan to Application on the operator panel of your printer the scanned image is saved in the location of your computer specified with the ScanButton Manager See Scanning From the Operator Panel Scanning Without scanner driver Scan and save the scanned document in a USB memory See Scanning to a USB Memory Scan and send the scanned document by e mail See Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image Scan and send the scanned document to computer or server connected to network See Scanning to Network The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it to your computer For the best results use these recommended settings Type Resolution Documents 300 dpi black and white or 200 dpi grayscale or color Documents of poor quality or that contain 400 dpi black and white or 300 dpi small text grayscale Photographs and pictures 100 200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale Images for an
550. y instructions in your Product Information Guide NOTICE Protect the drums of the Print Head Device PHD against bright light If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate NOTICE Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface black colored film of the belt unit Scratches dirt or oil from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality Removing the PHD Unit 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Pull the standard 250 sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the standard 250 sheet tray with both hands and remove it from the printer Maintaining Your Printer 619 3 Push the side button to open the front cover 4 Open the belt unit 620 Maintaining Your Printer 5 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90 degrees counterclockwise 6 Hold the gray tabs and then pull the PHD unit out of the printer Maintaining Your Printer 621 Installing a PHD Unit 1 Open the PHD packaging 622 Maintaining Your Printer 2 Take out the PHD unit from the packaging 3 Completely pull out the eight yellow ribbons from the PHD unit 4 Remove the rear protective cover from the PHD unit K NOTE Do not remove the front protective cover at this moment Maintaining Your Printer 623 Ss Rear protective cover Front protective cover 5 Insert the PHD unit until the line on the handle aligns with the white line on
551. ze Displays the paper size setting of the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Custom Displays the length of custom size paper loaded Size Y in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Custom Displays the width of custom size paper loaded Size X in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 1 Display Popup Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the standard 250 sheet tray Tray 2 Paper Size 4 Displays the paper size setting of the optional 250 sheet feeder Tray 2 Paper Displays the paper type setting of the optional Type 250 sheet feeder Tray 2 Display Displays whether to show a popup menu that Popup prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 250 sheet feeder Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 193 194 I This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer 2 3 4 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer This item is available only when the optional 250 sheet feeder is installed Reports Purpose To print various types of reports and lists Values System Setting

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Dell&trade; 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer